industrial chemical technology

576
LONG TERM TRAINING PROGRAMME ON “INDUSTRIAL CHEMICAL TECHNOLOGY” MODULE – I (03/10/2010 TO 20/02/2011) COURSE MATERIAL COURSE CO-ORDINATOR Prof. Latesh B. Chaudhari Asst. Prof., F.E.T.R., Bardoli. CONDUCTED BY Nodal Institute Chemicals and Petrochemicals Sectors N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Isroli-Bardoli. & ANCHOR INSTITUTE Chemicals and Petrochemicals Sectors Promoted by Industries Commissionerate Government of Gujarat In Partnership with Faculty of Technology, D.D.U., Nadiad Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Transcript of industrial chemical technology

Page 1: industrial chemical technology

LONG TERM TRAINING PROGRAMME

ON

“INDUSTRIAL CHEMICAL TECHNOLOGY”

MODULE – I

(03/10/2010 TO 20/02/2011)

COURSE MATERIAL

COURSE CO-ORDINATOR

Prof. Latesh B. Chaudhari Asst. Prof., F.E.T.R., Bardoli.

CONDUCTED BY

Nodal Institute Chemicals and Petrochemicals Sectors N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Isroli-Bardoli.

&

ANCHOR INSTITUTE

Chemicals and Petrochemicals Sectors Promoted by

Industries Commissionerate Government of Gujarat

In Partnership with Faculty of Technology, D.D.U., Nadiad

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 2: industrial chemical technology

1.1 HEAT TRANSFER FUNDAMENTALS 1.1.1 Introduction

Practitioners of the thermal arts and sciences generally deal with four basic

thermal transport modes: conduction, convection, phase change, and radiation. The

process by which heat diffuses through a solid or a stationary fluid is termed heat

conduction. Situations in which heat transfer from a wetted surface is assisted by the

motion of the fluid give rise to heat convection, and when the fluid undergoes a liquid–

solid or liquid–vapor state transformation at or very near the wetted surface, attention is

focused on this phase-change heat transfer. The exchange of heat between surfaces, or

between a surface and a surrounding fluid, by long-wavelength electromagnetic radiation

is termed thermal heat radiation.

It is our intent in this section to describe briefly these modes of heat transfer, with

emphasis on an important parameter known as the thermal resistance to heat transfer.

Simple examples are given for illustration; detailed descriptions of the same topics are

presented in specialized chapters.

1.1.2 Conduction Heat Transfer

One-Dimensional Conduction Thermal diffusion through solids is governed by

Fourier’s law, which in one-dimensional form is expressible as

where q is the heat current, k the thermal conductivity of the medium, A the

crosssectional area for heat flow, and dT /dx the temperature gradient, which, because it

is negative, requires insertion of the minus sign in eq. (1.1) to assure a positive heat flow

q. The temperature difference resulting from the steady-state diffusion of heat is thus

related to the thermal conductivity of the material, the cross-sectional area A, and the path

length L (Fig. 1.1), according to

Prepared By: Prof. Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof. ,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 3: industrial chemical technology

The form of eq. (1.2), where k and A are presumed constant, suggests that in a way that is

analogous to Ohm’s law governing electrical current flow through a resistance, it is

possible to define a conduction thermal resistance as

One-Dimensional Conduction with Internal Heat Generation Situations in which a

solid experiences internal heat generation, such as that produced by the flow of an

electric current, give rise to more complex governing equations and require greater care

in obtaining the appropriate temperature differences.

Prepared By: Prof. Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof. ,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 4: industrial chemical technology

Direct Contact HeatTransfer Direct contact heat transfer can occur whenever two substances at different temperatures

touch each other physically. The implication is that there is not an intervening wall

between the two substances. Heat transfer where there is a surface between the two

streams is sometimes called indirect, or the heat transfer device is one of the closed types.

The physical interaction of the two streams can accomplish heat transfer very efficiently.

Without an intervening wall, the energy transport between the two streams can take place

across small thermal resistances. In addition, the fact that a wall is not present can allow a

mass transfer process to take place. In some cases, this is a desirable phenomenon (open

cooling towers), but in other cases it may not be.

Costs are often more favorable for direct contact heat transfer devices than for

their closedcounterparts. The thermal resistances present in closedheat exchangers result

in less heat transfer than might be accomplishedin direct contact, andthis often translates

to lower operating costs for the latter. In addition, the equipment to accomplish the direct

contact processes is generally less expensive than the counterpart closed heat exchangers.

Both aspects can result in considerable life-cycle cost savings for the direct contact

approach over that of the closed type of heat exchanger. Some potential limitations are

inherent in direct contact processes. There is a requirement that the two streams be at the

same pressure. Although this requirement does not often cause significant problems, it

could be very important. Also, as noted above, the mass transfer possibility in direct

contact may not be desirable. Direct contact heat transfer is a fieldwith a wide range of

potential applications. The actual situation is that with some notable exceptions, such as

open feedwater heaters andwet cooling towers, few of these applications have been

usedto any great extent. Reasons for this are numerous, but one of the main reasons is

that engineers are not as knowledgeable as they might be about the design of these types

of systems. This chapter is an attempt to expose some of these possibilities so that the

design of more efficient industrial processes might result.

To present a description of direct contact processes within the limited space of

this chapter, some restriction in scope is necessary. Because the direct contact of any

Prepared By: Prof. Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof. ,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 5: industrial chemical technology

number of generic streams is possible (and most have in fact been proposed to transfer

heat), only some of the more important applications will be notedhere.

Solid–solid transfer processes are not covered, nor are high-temperature situations

included where radiative heat transfer is important. Open cooling towers are not

discussed here to any great extent, even though they are the single most widely applied

type of direct contact heat exchangers. Although some information related to cooling

towers is provided in the Section 19.4, this will by no means cover a very significant

fraction of the total literature on the subject. The previous work on cooling towers is

voluminous and tends s to use quite specialized design approaches. Interested readers can

find current overviews by ASHRAE (2000) and Mills (1999). An earlier review of the

literature on the numerical modeling developed to predict cooling tower performance was

given by Johnson et al. (1987). The literature contains reports of studies of interaction

between different substances as well as the same substances. For example, a great deal of

interest has been directed to the use of water in phase-change situations, particularly the

condensation of steam on liquid water. On the other hand, interest has also been directed

to the use of fluids of different types. For example, a great deal of literature on heat

transfer in immiscible liquids was cited years ago by Sideman (1966), and many studies

on this topic have appeared since then.

Generally, the prediction of mass transfer has been given more attention over the

years than has the fieldof direct contact heat transfer. Because of mass transfer and heat

transfer analogies, some information from the mass transfer literature can be used in

direct contact heat transfer design. This analog is exposed minimally here, however.

Emphasis here is on surveying predictions and applications, the main thrusts of benefit to

designers.

19.2 SENSIBLE HEAT EXCHANGE

19.2.1 General Comments

Prepared By: Prof. Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof. ,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 6: industrial chemical technology

Heat transfer from a continuous fluid to droplets or bubbles of another fluid is a

complicated situation involving not only the typical convection-related variables (e.g.,

geometry, velocity, and thermo physical properties) but also the proximity of the objects

to one another where more than one is present. The latter characteristic can be handled in

an overall way through the definition of the void fraction or holdup, the latter denoted

here by the symbol φ. Either of these relates to the volumetric ratio of the amount of the

dispersed phase (droplet or bubble) to the total volume. Holdup has a profound effect on

direct contact heat transfer, as noted several times in this chapter. Another aspect that

influences the heat transfer to droplets or bubbles is the shape of these objects. It has been

well documented that droplets and bubbles can experience a wide variety of shapes,

depending on the object size and the flow situation (Grace, 1983). Despite this, much

work has been done on a variety of systems assuming that the droplet is spherically-

shaped. A great deal of the early work was reviewed by Sideman (1966). EVAPORATION AND CONDENSATION

General Considerations

Lock (1994) has summarized the various modes in which condensation and evaporation

can take place in simple direct contact systems. These include the evaporation–

condensation interactions with droplets and jets in the presence of an incondensable gas.

Consider a representation of the regimes shown in Fig. 19.1. In this figure the italic

notations relate to the state of the vapor, with four regions defined by the intersection of

the interface isobar and the interface isotherm. The non shaded areas, hot evaporation on

the upper right and cold condensation on the lower left, are the normally anticipated

regions where those phenomena occur. Above the isotherm TI the region of vapor heat

gain is demarcated from the region of vapor heat loss. In the hot evaporation region, the

vapor–gas mixture is at a higher temperature than the liquid. This superheated mixture

drives the process by the transfer of heat to the cooler liquid. Below the isotherm, but still

on the same side of the isobar, the process can take place only if the liquid is superheated

and thus furnishes the heat necessary for the evaporation process. Cool evaporation is

limited by the liquid superheat, as would be represented by the liquid Jak ob number.

Condensation processes take place in the region shown to the left of the interface

Prepared By: Prof. Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof. ,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 7: industrial chemical technology

isobar in Fig. 19.1. These are normally considered to occur when the vapor is cooler than

the liquid, and this region is denotedas cold condensation (lower left). Clearly, the liquid

source or sink available for evaporation or condensation is limited in real situations.

Hence the finite heat capacity of the liquid is a critical element in the determination of the

amount of heat and mass transfer that can occur. For the cool evaporation and warm

condensation regions, this can be assessed by examining the Jakob number for the liquid.

A practical issue that can arise is the presence of a non condensable gas, often air, in a

condensing or evaporating system. In evaporating systems, small amounts of a

component of this type do not cause much effect, and the phase-change processes are

relatively unimpeded. In condensing systems, the situation is quite different. Here the

Prepared By: Prof. Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof. ,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 8: industrial chemical technology

phase-change process can be grossly hindered. Thus it is very important in condensing

systems to know the extent of the presence of non condensables and account for them

appropriately.

Condensation of a Vapor on or in a Liquid

Condensation of a vapor on or in a liquid, whether or not that liquid is the same substance

as the vapor, is commonly encounteredin engineering systems. Direct contact processes

differ from their indirect counterparts in many respects already noted. In indirect transfer,

the extent of the process is limited by the area of the surface andthe heat transfer rate

possible through the surface. In direct contact processes, the situation is limitedby the

interplay between the latent heat of condensation and the amount of sensible heat the

liquidcan absorb. The amount of the liquid used for condensing purposes and its

subcooling determines the extent of condensation that can be accomplished. The presence

of noncondensables during the condensation process affects performance in negative

ways. Details of the many studies of this will not, in general, be summarized here because

of the effects of the multitude of variables that influence individual situations.

Condensation of a vapor that contains noncondensable elements on a surface finds that a

noncondensable layer builds up near the surface. This causes both a heat transfer and a

mass transfer resistance that impedes the basic condensation process. In many respects

this is similar to what is foundin surface condensers when noncondensable gases are

present. In vapor droplet direct contact condensation in a liquid, this same phenomenon is

present at the inner interface of the bubble. Additionally, though, the presence of

noncondensables results in a decreased vapor pressure inside the bubble compared to that

of a pure substance in the same situation. This then lowers the condensation temperature,

decreasing the driving potential for heat transfer.

Many studies of direct contact condensation are reported in the literature. An

extensive review of this literature was given by Sideman and Moalem-Maron (1982).

Film Condenser We start with a description of a situation that will be of value

primarily for visualization purposes. This is the direct contact film condenser shown

in Fig. 19.2. In this situation, a bulk vapor is condensed on another liquid, the latter

serving as the sink. Patternedafter the model usedfor Nusselt’s solution for laminar

Prepared By: Prof. Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof. ,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 9: industrial chemical technology

film condensation, and described in most elementary heat transfer texts, the concepts

form a basis for other systems that follow below.

Consider the heat transfer processes that occur in the direct contact film condenser.

The pure saturatedv apor condenses on the liquidof the same substance. Heat then

flows by conduction through the condensed liquid to the sink liquid. Since it is

assumedhere that there is no other place for the heat to be absorbedultimately than

the sink liquid, the heat capacity of that liquid is the determining factor for the duty

possible from devices of this type.

The heat transfer processes that must be analyzedfor this type of system are the

diffusion phenomena through the two liquidfilms. For short times, the sink liquidis

consideredas being semi-infinite at the interface between it andthe condensedliquid

Prepared By: Prof. Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof. ,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 10: industrial chemical technology

INDUSTRIAL CHEMICAL TECHNOLOGY MODULE – I 

HEAT TRANSFER TECHNOLOGY DATE: 21/11/2010                BY: L. B. Chaudhari  Conduction Mode of Heat Transfer: Transfer of heat from one part of a body to another part of a same body or from on body to another body which is in physical contact with it, without appreciable displacement of particles of a body.  Fourier’s Law:  The physical  law governing  the  transfer of heat  through uniform material by conduction mode  is known as Fourier’s Law.  Q ∝ A x [ ­ dT / dx]   Q = k x A x [ ­ dT / dx]  Where, Q  = Rate of heat transfer, W A  = Area of heat transfer, m2 dT / dx = Rate of change of temperature with distance in the direction of heat flow, oC/m k  = Thermal conductivity, W/mK  Q/A = q = k x [ ­ dT / dx]  q  = Heat Flux, W/m2  Fourier’s  Law  states  that  “the  rate  of  heat  flow  by  conduction  through  uniform material  is directly  proportional  to  the  area  normal  to  the  direction  of  heat  flow  and  temperature gradient in the direction of heat flow”.    Thermal Conductivity:  Q = ­ k x A x [dT / dx]  k = (‐ Q x dx) / (A x dT)  k = ( W x m) / (m2 x K)  k = W / mK (Unit of Thermal Conductivity)  Thermal conductivity is defined as “the quantity of heat passing through a quantity of material of unit  thickness with unit heat  flow area  in unit  time when unit  temperature difference  is maintained across the opposite face of material”  

OR  

“The ability of material to conduct heat through itself is known as thermal conductivity”.  

Prepared By: Prof. Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof. ,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 11: industrial chemical technology

• Thermal conductivity depends on the nature of material and its temperature. • Thermal conductivity of solids is higher then that of liquids and liquids is higher then that of 

gases.  

State of Matter  Solids  Liquids  Gases Range of Thermal Conductivity (W/mK)  2.3 to 420 0.09 to 0.7  0.006 to 0.6

 The thermal conductivities of some materials at room temperature:    

Material  Thermal Conductivity W/m · °C  Material  Thermal Conductivity 

W/m · °C Diamond  2300  Brick 0.72Silver  429  Water (l) 0.613Copper  401  Human skin 0.37Gold  317  Wood (oak) 0.17

Aluminum  237  Helium (g) 0.152Iron  80.2  Soft rubber 0.13

Mercury (l)  8.54  Glass fiber 0.043Glass  0.78  Air (g) 0.026

 The range of thermal conductivity of various materials at room temperature 

Prepared By: Prof. Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof. ,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 12: industrial chemical technology

Classification of Materials according to thermal Conductivity:  HEAT CONDUCTORS: The materials having higher value of thermal conductivity are referred to as heat  conductors.  Eg.  Silver metal  (k  =  420 W/mK),  Red  Copper  (k  =  395 W/mK),  Gold  (k  =  302 W/mK), Aluminums (k = 210 W/mK)  HEAT INSULATORS: The materials having low value of thermal conductivity are referred to as heat insulators. Eg. Cork (k = 0.025 W/mK), Glass Wool (k = 0.10 W/mK), Asbestos (k = 0.024 W/mK), 85% magnesia (k = 0.04 W/mK)  Thermal Insulation:  • Process equipments such as reaction vessels, Reboilers, distillation column, evaporators etc or 

steam pipe will lose heat to the atmosphere by conduction, convection and radiation. • Thus to overcome this heat  loss, some form of  lagging  is applied to  the hot surfaces. Eg.  In a 

furnace  surface  temperature  is  reduced by making use of  series  of  insulating bricks  that  are poor conductor of heat (Heat Insulators). 

 Requirement of lagging materials:  1. It should have low thermal conductivity and 2. It should suppress convection currents.  Optimum insulation thickness:  Increasing  the  thickness  of  insulation  will  decrease  the  heat  loss  but  at  the  same  time  it  will increase  the  fixed  cost.  Thus,  optimum  thickness  which  will  help  in  minimum  heat  loss  and minimum cost is calculated.    

 Optimum Insulation Thickness 

 

Prepared By: Prof. Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof. ,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 13: industrial chemical technology

Effect of Temperature on Thermal Conductivity:  

 Variation of the thermal conductivity with temperature 

 Effect on Thermal Conductivity of Cu & Al with temperature 

 Temperature, K  Copper  Aluminum 

100 482 302200 413 237300 401 237400 393 240600 379 231800 366 218

 

Prepared By: Prof. Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof. ,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 14: industrial chemical technology

 

 

tW

 

t

Tt 

DATE : 17/

HEA 

HEAbetw

Hea 

C

k = Ther

Tempera

 RADIATIO

It  is the  changWheneveris converte

Radhemispheremitted oradiation terms of in

THERMAL temperatu

i) Convertiii) Absorbi

/10/2010 

AT is a form

AT TRANSFween hot at is transfe

CONDUCT

mal conduct

ature depen

N  

the energges  in  the r a chargeded into a fo

iation  is ere above tr  incident fluxes  sucntensity. 

RADIATIOure.  

ing internang incomin

INDUSTM

 

m of energy

FER  is  the and cold boerred by th

TION 

 tivity 

ndent 

gy  transfer“electrond particle uorm of ene

mitted by he surfacein a specifch  as  emis

ON:  It  is  th

al energy inng electrom

TRIAL CHEMODULE‐1 

THERMA 

y which flo

science wodies callehree prima

C

h = Convco‐efficieTemperadepende

rred  in  theic  configurundergoesergy known

every poie. The quafied directssive  powe

he  form of

nto out‐flomagnetic w

EMICAL T: HEAT TRAL RADIAT

ow as a res

hich dealsed the SOUry modes:

CONVECT

vective heat ent ature  & ent 

e  form of eration”  of s acceleratn as electr

nt on a plntity that ion  in spacer,  irradia

 f  radiation

owing electwaves whic

TECHNOLRANSFER TION  

ult of tem

s with  the URCE and th 

ION

transfer  

momentum

electromagthe  atomion, energomagnetic

ane surfacdescribes tce  is the rtion  and 

n emitted b

tromagnetch are con

LOGY 

  B

perature g

rates of ehe RECIEV

ε = Emmiσ = Stefa

m  Tempera

gnetic wavms  or moley possessec radiation

ce  in all dithe magniadiation  inradiosity  a

by bodies 

ic waves,  verted to i

BY : K.R.DE

gradient. 

exchange oER.  

RADIATIO

isivity, n‐Boltzman ture depend

ves as a reecules  of med by the p. 

irections  intude of rantensity.   Vare  expres

because o

internal en

ESAI 

of heat 

ON

co‐efficientdent 

esult of matter. particle 

nto  the diation Various ssed  in 

of  their 

nergy. 

Prepared By: Prof. Kartik Desai, Sr. Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 15: industrial chemical technology

tt

 T

 

 

t

t

A

T

The the Stefanthe fourth

WheBoltzmann

 The rate o

Whe

BLACK BO

Blackbodyspecified blackbodydirection. area normGreybodyindependeEmissivityto the radiMonochrosurface  totemperatu

Absorptivi• It  d

radiReflectivitTransmiss

rate of ra‐Boltzman power of 

ere  E,  is  tn constant,

 f radiative

ere, Stefan

DY RADIAT

y : A blackbtemperatuy. A  blackbAlso, a bla

mal to direc:  It  is  defent of wave (ε): The raiation emitomatic  emo  the  moure and wa

ity (α): Theepends  station is orty (ρ): The ivity (τ): T

diant thernn Law: “Ththe absolu

the  emissiv, and  (ε) is

 heat trans

n‐Boltzman

TION (TER

body is defure  and  wbody  absorackbody ection of emined  such elength. atio of thetted by a bmissivity (ελonochromaavelength. 

e fraction otrongly  oniginating. fraction ofhe fraction

rmal energhe emissioute temper

ve  power s the emiss

sfer betwe

nn constan

RMS INVOL

fined as a wavelengthrbs  all  incmits radia

mission. that  the 

e radiation black body λ): The ratiatic  emiss 

ελof irradiati  the  temp

f irradiation of irradia

gy transferon of thermrature (Kel

flux  of  thsivity of th

een  two su

nt, (σ) = 5.6

LVED & RA

perfect emh,  no  surfident  radition energ

monochro

emitted bat the samio of the mive  power

λ = Eλ/Ebλ ion absorbperature  o

on reflectedation trans

 between mal radiativlvin or Ran

 he  surface e surface.

urfaces, a a

 6703 x10‐8

ADIATIVE P

mitter and face  can  eation,  regagy uniform

omatic  em

by the surfme tempermonochromr  of  a  bl

bed by the of  the  sou

d by the sumitted by 

 

two bodieve energy inkine)”. 

(W/m2), (  

and b  is: 

(W/m2K4) 

PROPERTIE

absorber emit  moreardless  of 

mly  in all di

missivity  (ε

ace at a giature. matic emissack  surfac

surface. urce  at  wh

urface. the surfac

es is descriis proporti

(σ) is  the 

ES) 

of radiatioe  energy wavelengirections p

ε)  of  the  b

iven tempe

sive powerce  at  the

hich  the  in

ce. 

ibed by onal to 

Stefan‐

on. At a than  a gth  and per unit 

body  is 

erature 

r of the e  same 

ncident 

 

Prepared By: Prof. Kartik Desai, Sr. Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 16: industrial chemical technology

  BASIC LAW’S OF RADIATION  1) Stefan‐Boltzmann law: The total radiation energy emitted by a black body per unit  

 time and per unit surface area was given as: 

        Total blackbody emissive power, Eb  = σ *T4  ,  where σ =5.67 x10‐8 W/(m2 ∙ K4)  

 2) Plank’s law: Spectral(or Monochromatic)  blackbody emissive power (Ebλ) :                  

The  amount  of  radiation  energy  emitted  by  a  blackbody  at  a  thermodynamic temperature (T) per unit time, per unit surface area, and per unit wavelength(λ). 

Ebλ(λ,T) = C1/[λ5*(exp(C2/λ*T)‐1) 

where, C1 = 2Π*h*c02, C2 = h*c0/k, h : Plank’s constant, k : Boltzmann’s constant  3) Wien’s displacement law: The wavelength at which the peak spectral blackbody  

       emissive power  occurs for a specified temperature is            given by Wien’s displacement law. 

                                  (λ*T)max power =2897 μm*K   4) Kirchhoff’s law: The total hemispherical emissivity of a surface at temperature T is  

equal to its total hemispherical absorptivity for radiation coming  from a blackbody at same temperature. 

ε(T) = α(T)  QUESTIONS:  1) Why the negative sign appears in Fourier's law of heat conduction?  2) A sealed cube containing argon floating in deep space is heated on one side by a       nearby star. Will there be any heat transfer due to natural convection? 3) What is thermal radiation? 4) Define: Emmisivity, Absorptivity, Reflectivity, Transmitivity, Black body. 5) Explain Stefan‐Boltzman’s law.   Kartik R. Desai Sr. Lecturer, N.G.Patel Polytechnic, Isroli‐Afwa. 

Prepared By: Prof. Kartik Desai, Sr. Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 17: industrial chemical technology

INDUSTRIAL CHEMICAL TECHNOLOGY MODULE – I 

HEAT TRANSFER TECHNOLOGY DATE: 24/10/2010               BY: H. S. DESAI  What Is Heat Transfer?  HEAT TRANSFER is the science which deals with the rates of exchange of heat between hot and cold bodies called the SOURCE and the RECIEVER.  What are Heat Transfer Equipments?  A heat  transfer  equipments  are  the  devices  built  for  efficient heat  transfer from  one medium to another.  Classification of Heat Transfer Equipments:  

1. According to Mechanical Design: ‐ Double Pipe Heat Exchanger ‐ Shell & Tube type Heat Exchanger ‐ Plat Type Heat Exchanger ‐ Extended Surface (Fin) type Heat Exchanger ‐ Mechanically Agitated Reactor (With Jacket and / or Coil) 

2. According to Nature of Flow arrangement: ‐ Parallel (Co‐current Flow) ‐ Opposite (Counter Current) ‐ Perpendicular (Cross Flow) 

3. According to Number of Passes: ‐ Single Pass ‐ Multiple Pass 

4. According to Physical State of Heat Exchanging Fluids: ‐ Gas to Gas ‐ Liquid to Liquid (Coolers) ‐ Gas to Liquid (Economizer) ‐ Liquid or gas to condensing vapors (Condensers) ‐ Gas to Boiling liquid (Evaporators) 

5. According to Operating Pressure Range: ‐ Low Pressure (0 to 8 atm) ‐ Medium Pressure (8 to 35 atm) ‐ High Pressure (35 atm and above) 

 

Prepared By: Prof. Himanshu Desai, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 18: industrial chemical technology

Types of Heat Transfer Equipments:  

• Shell and tube • Double pipe  • Plate • Finned tubes/gas heaters • spiral  • Vessel jackets • Reboilers and vaporisers / evaporators Etc • Agitated Vessels or Agitated Reactors. 

 Important Terminologies:  Range, Approach, Newton’s Law of Cooling, Heat Transfer Coefficient  Temperature Profile & Logarithmic Mean Temperature Difference (LMTD): 

 

Prepared By: Prof. Himanshu Desai, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 19: industrial chemical technology

What is Shell & Tube Heat Exchanger?  A shell  and  tube  heat  exchanger is  a  class  of heat  exchanger designs.  It  is  the  most common type of heat exchanger in oil refineries and other large chemical processes, and is suited  for  higher‐pressure  applications.  As  its  name  implies,  this  type  of  heat  exchanger consists of a shell (a large pressure vessel) with a bundle of  tubes inside it. One fluid runs through  the  tubes,  and another  fluid  flows over  the  tubes  (through  the  shell)  to  transfer heat between the two fluids. The set of tubes is called a tube bundle, and may be composed by several types of tubes.  Types of Shell & Tube Heat Exchangers:  

 

 

  

Prepared By: Prof. Himanshu Desai, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 20: industrial chemical technology

Construction of Shell & Tube Heat Exchangers:  Shell & Tube heat exchangers consist of many components such as: Shell, Tube Bundle, Baffles, Tie Rod, Tube sheet, Pass, Inlet & Outlet Nozzles.   

 Baffles:   Baffles  are  metal  discs  cut  to  certain  area.  They  are  used  to  increase  the 

residence time of shell side fluid,  to  increase the turbulence and to support the tubes. 

Tube Sheet:  Tube bundle is welded to the tube sheet. Pass:     It is a metal plate used to create multiple passes in the flow. Tie Rod:   They are used to keep the baffles at the prescribed positions. Nozzles:   They are standard pipes used for entry and exit of shell and tube side fluids.  Working of Shell & Tube Heat Exchanger:  

• In  the  shell  and  tube heat  exchanger  shown above,  the  shell  side  fluid  flows once through the shell and the tube side fluid flows twice through the tube bundle. 

• In this  type of heat exchangers the tube side  fluid  flows  in co‐current and counter current fashion with respect to shell side fluid. 

  

Prepared By: Prof. Himanshu Desai, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 21: industrial chemical technology

INDUSTRIAL CHEMICAL TECHNOLOGY MODULE – I 

HEAT TRANSFER TECHNOLOGY Date: 05/12/2010                By: H. S. Desai 

 CONDENSERS & STEAM TRAP 

CONDENSER:  

• A condenser is  a  device  or  unit  used  to condense a  substance  from  its gaseous to its liquid state, typically by cooling it. 

• In  doing  so,  the latent  heat is  given  up  by  the  substance,  and  will  transfer  to  the condenser  coolant.  Condensers  are  typically heat  exchangers which  have  various designs and come in many sizes ranging from rather small to very large industrial‐scale units used in plant processes. 

• Condensers  are  used  in air  conditioning,  industrial chemical  processes such as distillation, steam power plants and other heat‐exchange systems. Use of cooling water or surrounding air as the coolant is common in many condensers. 

 Types of Condensers:  Surface Condensers: Surface  condenser is  the  commonly  used  term  for  a  water‐cooled shell  and  tube  heat exchanger installed  on  the  exhaust steam from  a  steam  turbine in thermal  power stations. These condensers are heat exchangers which convert steam from its gaseous to its liquid  state  at  a  pressure  below atmospheric  pressure.  Where  cooling  water  is  in  short supply,  an  air‐cooled  condenser  is  often  used.  An  air‐cooled  condenser  is  however significantly more expensive and cannot achieve as low a steam turbine exhaust pressure as water cooled surface condenser.  Contact condenser: Contact  Condenser  is  a  device  in  which  a  vapor  is  brought  into  direct  contact  with  a cooling  liquid and condensed by giving up its  latent heat to the  liquid.  In almost all cases the cooling liquid is water, and the condensing vapor is steam. In this type of condenser the steam and cooling water are mixed in a condensing chamber and withdrawn together.   STEAM TRAP:  A steam trap is a device used to discharge condensate and non condensable gases with a negligible  consumption  or  loss  of  live steam.  Most  steam  traps  are  nothing  more  than automatic valves. They open, close or modulate automatically.   The three important functions of steam traps are: 

1. Discharge condensate as soon as it is formed. 2. Have negligible steam consumption. 3. Have the capability of discharging air and other non‐condensable gases. 

Prepared By: Prof. Himanshu Desai, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 22: industrial chemical technology

Types of Steam Trap:  

1. Mechanical  traps.  They have a  float  that  rises  and  falls  in  relation  to  condensate level and this usually has a mechanical  linkage attached that opens and closes the valve. Mechanical traps operate in direct relationship to condensate levels present in  the  body  of  the  steam  trap. Inverted  bucket and float  traps are  examples  of mechanical traps. 

 2. Temperature  traps.  They  have  a  valve  that  is  driven  on  /  off  the  seat  by  either 

expansion  /  contraction  caused  by  temperature  change.  They  differ  from mechanical traps in that their design requires them to hold back some condensate waiting for it to cool sufficiently to allow the valve to open. In most circumstances this  is  not  desirable  as  condensate  needs  to  be  removed  as  soon  as  it  is formed. Thermostatic  traps, Bi­Thermostatic  traps and bimetallic  traps are examples of temperature operated traps. 

 3. Thermodynamic  (TD)  traps.  Thermodynamic  traps  work  on  the  difference  in 

dynamic  response  to  velocity  change  in  flow of  compressible  and  incompressible fluids.  As  steam enters,  static  pressure  above  the  disk  forces  the disk  against  the valve seat. The static pressure over a large area overcomes the high inlet pressure of the steam. As the steam starts to condense, the pressure against the disk lessens and  the  trap cycles. This essentially makes a TD  trap a  "time cycle" device:  it will open  even  if  there  is  only  steam  present,  this  can  cause  premature  wear.  If  non condensable gas is trapped on top of the disc, it can cause the trap to be locked shut. 

Prepared By: Prof. Himanshu Desai, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 23: industrial chemical technology

‐ 0 ‐ 

Performance Assess.& Energy conservation approach for industrial boiler‐H.R.Jivanramjwala‐N.G.Patel Polytechnic  

PERFORMANCE ASSESSMENT AND

ENERGY CONSERVATION APPROACH FOR

INDUSTRIAL BOILER

Prepared By: Prof. H.R. Jivanramjiwala, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 24: industrial chemical technology

‐ 1 ‐ 

Performance Assess.& Energy conservation approach for industrial boiler‐H.R.Jivanramjwala‐N.G.Patel Polytechnic  

1. INTRODUCTION...........................................................................................1

2. TYPE OF BOILERS.......................................................................................2

3. ASSESSMENT OF A BOILER .....................................................................4

4. ENERGY EFFICIENCY OPPORTUNITIES .......................................... 14

1. INTRODUCTION

This section briefly describes the Boiler and various auxiliaries in the Boiler Room.

A boiler is an enclosed vessel that provides a means for combustion heat to be transferred to water until it becomes heated water or steam. The hot water or steam under pressure is then usable for transferring the heat to a process. Water is a useful and inexpensive medium for transferring heat to a process. When water at atmospheric pressure is boiled into steam its volume increases about 1,600 times, producing a force that is almost as explosive as gunpowder. This causes the boiler to be an equipment that must be treated with utmost care.

The boiler system comprises of: a feed water system, steam system and fuel system. The feed water system provides water to the boiler and regulates it automatically to meet the steam demand. Various valves provide access for maintenance and repair. The steam system collects and controls the steam produced in the boiler. Steam is directed through a piping system to the point of use. Throughout the system, steam pressure is regulated using valves and checked with steam pressure gauges. The fuel system includes all equipment used to provide fuel to generate the necessary heat. The equipment required in the fuel system depends on the type of fuel used in the system.

The water supplied to the boiler that is converted into steam is called feed water. The two sources of feed water are: (1) Condensate or condensed steam returned from the processes and (2) Makeup water (treated raw water) which must come from outside the boiler room and plant processes. For higher boiler efficiencies, an economizer preheats the feed water using the waste heat in the flue gas.

Prepared By: Prof. H.R. Jivanramjiwala, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 25: industrial chemical technology

Performance Assess.& Energy conservation approach for industrial boiler‐H.R.Jivanramjwala‐N.G.Patel Polytechnic  

BOILER BURNER

Econo mizer

Water Source

STEAM TO PROCESS

EXHAUST GAS VENT

STACK

Econo mizer

DEAERATOR PUMPS

VENT BOILER

BURNER

BLOW DOWN SEPARATOR

FUEL

Water Source

CHEMICAL FEED

BRINE

SOFTENERS

Figure 1. Schematic diagram of a Boiler Room

2. TYPE OF BOILERS

This section describes the various types of boilers: Fire tube boiler, Water tube boiler, Packaged boiler, Fluidized bed combustion boiler, Stoker fired boiler, Pulverized fuel boiler, Waste heat boiler and Thermic fluid heater. 2.1 Fire Tube Boiler

In a fire tube boiler, hot gases pass through the tubes and boiler feed water in the shell side is converted into steam. Fire tube boilers are generally used for relatively small steam capacities and low to medium steam pressures. As a guideline, fire tube boilers are competitive for steam rates up to 12,000 kg/hour and pressures up to 18 kg/cm2. Fire tube boilers are available for operation with oil, gas or solid fuels. For economic reasons, most fire tube boilers are of “packaged” construction (i.e. manufacturer erected) for all fuels.

Figure 2. Sectional view of a Fire Tube Boiler (Light Rail Transit Association)

Prepared By: Prof. H.R. Jivanramjiwala, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 26: industrial chemical technology

Performance Assess.& Energy conservation approach for industrial boiler‐H.R.Jivanramjwala‐N.G.Patel Polytechnic  

2.2 Water Tube Boiler

In a water tube boiler, boiler feed water flows through the tubes and enters the boiler drum. The circulated water is heated by the combustion gases and converted into steam at the vapour space in the drum. These boilers are selected when the steam demand as well as steam pressure requirements are high as in the case of process cum power boiler / power boilers.

Most modern water boiler tube designs are within the capacity range 4,500 – 120,000 kg/hour of steam, at very high pressures. Many water tube boilers are of “packaged” construction if oil and /or gas are to

be used as fuel. Solid fuel fired water tube designs are available but packaged designs are less common.

The features of water tube boilers are:

Figure 3. Simple Diagram of Water Tube Boiler (YourDictionary.com)

� Forced, induced and balanced draft provisions help to improve combustion efficiency. � Less tolerance for water quality calls for water treatment plant. � Higher thermal efficiency levels are possible

2.3 Packaged Boiler

To Chimney

The packaged boiler is so called because it comes as a complete package. Once delivered to a site, it requires only the steam, water pipe work, fuel supply and electrical connections to be made to become operational. Package boilers are generally of a shell type with a fire tube design so as to achieve high heat transfer rates by both radiation and convection.

Oil Burner

Figure 4. A typical 3 Pass, Oil fired packaged boiler

(BIB Cochran, 2003)

Prepared By: Prof. H.R. Jivanramjiwala, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 27: industrial chemical technology

Performance Assess.& Energy conservation approach for industrial boiler‐H.R.Jivanramjwala‐N.G.Patel Polytechnic  

Stack Stochiometric Gas Excess Air

Un burnt

Ash

and Un-

burnt parts ofFuel in A

sh

Blow

Dow

n

Convection

& R

adiation

The features of packaged boilers are: � Small combustion space and high heat release rate resulting in faster evaporation. � Large number of small diameter tubes leading to good convective heat transfer. � Forced or induced draft systems resulting in good combustion efficiency. � Number of passes resulting in better overall heat transfer. � Higher thermal efficiency levels compared with other boilers.

These boilers are classified based on the number of passes - the number of times the hot combustion gases pass through the boiler. The combustion chamber is taken, as the first pass after which there may be one, two or three sets of fire-tubes. The most common boiler of this class is a three-pass unit with two sets of fire-tubes and with the exhaust gases exiting through the rear of the boiler.

3. ASSESSMENT OF A BOILER

This section describes the Performance evaluation of boilers (through the direct and indirect method including examples for efficiency calculations), boiler blow down, and boiler water treatment.

3.1 Performance Evaluation of a Boiler

The performance parameters of a boiler, like efficiency and evaporation ratio, reduces with time due to poor combustion, heat transfer surface fouling and poor operation and maintenance. Even for a new boiler, reasons such as deteriorating fuel quality and water quality can result in poor boiler performance. A heat balance helps us to identify avoidable and unavoidable heat losses. Boiler efficiency tests help us to find out the deviation of boiler efficiency from the best efficiency and target problem area for corrective action.

3.1.1 Heat balance

The combustion process in a boiler can be described in the form of an energy flow diagram. This shows graphically how the input energy from the fuel is transformed into the various useful energy flows and into heat and energy loss flows. The thickness of the arrows indicates the amount of energy contained in the respective flows.

Stack Gas

Stochiometric Excess Air Un burnt

FUEL INPUT STEAM OUTPUT

Figure 11. Energy balance diagram of a boiler

Prepared By: Prof. H.R. Jivanramjiwala, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 28: industrial chemical technology

Performance Assess.& Energy conservation approach for industrial boiler‐H.R.Jivanramjwala‐N.G.Patel Polytechnic  

Dry Flue Gas Loss

BOILER

Heat in Steam

Heat loss due to dry flue gas

Heat loss due to steamDry Flue Gas Loss in flue gas

Heat loss due to moisture in fuel

Heat loss due to unburnts in residue

Heat loss due to moisture in air

Heat loss due to radiation & other unaccounted loss

BOILER

8.1 %

1.7 %

0.3 %

2.4 %

1.0 %

73.8 %

A heat balance is an attempt to balance the total energy entering a boiler against that leaving the boiler in different forms. The following figure illustrates the different losses occurring for generating steam.

100.0 %

Fuel

12.7 %

Heat loss due to dry flue gas Heat loss due to steam in flue gas

Heat loss due to moisture in fuel

Heat loss due to moisture in air

Heat loss due to unburnts in residue Heat loss due to radiation & other unaccounted loss Heat in Steam

Figure 12. Typical Losses from Coal Fired Boiler

The energy losses can be divided in unavoidable and avoidable losses. The goal of a Cleaner Production and/or energy assessment must be to reduce the avoidable losses, i.e. to improve energy efficiency. The following losses can be avoided or reduced: � Stack gas losses:

- Excess air (reduce to the necessary minimum which depends from burner technology, operation, operation (i.e. control) and maintenance).

- Stack gas temperature (reduce by optimizing maintenance (cleaning), load; better burner and boiler technology).

� Losses by unburnt fuel in stack and ash (optimize operation and maintenance; better technology of burner).

� Blow down losses (treat fresh feed water, recycle condensate) � Condensate losses (recover the largest possible amount of condensate) � Convection and radiation losses (reduced by better insulation of the boiler).

3.1.2 Boiler efficiency

Thermal efficiency of a boiler is defined as “the percentage of (heat) energy input that is effectively useful in the generated steam.”

There are two methods of assessing boiler efficiency: � The Direct Method: the energy gain of the working fluid (water and steam) is compared

with the energy content of the boiler fuel � The Indirect Method: the efficiency is the difference between the losses and the energy

input

Prepared By: Prof. H.R. Jivanramjiwala, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 29: industrial chemical technology

Performance Assess.& Energy conservation approach for industrial boiler‐H.R.Jivanramjwala‐N.G.Patel Polytechnic  

3.1.3 Direct method of determining boiler efficiency

Methodology

This is also known as ‘input-output method’ due to the fact that it needs only the useful output (steam) and the heat input (i.e. fuel) for evaluating the efficiency. This efficiency can be evaluated using the formula:

Heat Output

Boiler Efficiency (η) = x 100 Heat Input

Boiler Efficiency (η) = Q x (hg – hf)

q x GCV

x 100

Parameters to be monitored for the calculation of boiler efficiency by direct method are:

� Quantity of steam generated per hour (Q) in kg/hr. � Quantity of fuel used per hour (q) in kg/hr. � The working pressure (in kg/cm2(g)) and superheat temperature (oC), if any � The temperature of feed water (oC) � Type of fuel and gross calorific value of the fuel (GCV) in kcal/kg of fuel

And where

� hg – Enthalpy of saturated steam in kcal/kg of steam � hf – Enthalpy of feed water in kcal/kg of water

Example

Find out the efficiency of the boiler by direct method with the data given below: � Type of boiler: Coal fired � Quantity of steam (dry) generated: 10 TPH

2 0 � Steam pressure (gauge) / temp: 10 kg/cm (g)/ 180 C � Quantity of coal consumed: 2.25 TPH

0 � Feed water temperature: 85 C � GCV of coal: 3200 kcal/kg

2 � Enthalpy of steam at 10 kg/cm pressure: 665 kcal/kg (saturated) � Enthalpy of feed water: 85 kcal/kg

10 x (665 – 85) x 1000

Boiler Efficiency (η) = x 100 = 80.56 percent 2.25 x 3200 x 1000

Advantages of direct method

� Plant workers can evaluate quickly the efficiency of boilers � Requires few parameters for computation

Prepared By: Prof. H.R. Jivanramjiwala, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 30: industrial chemical technology

Performance Assess.& Energy conservation approach for industrial boiler‐H.R.Jivanramjwala‐N.G.Patel Polytechnic  

� Needs few instruments for monitoring � Easy to compare evaporation ratios with benchmark figures

Disadvantages of direct method

� Does not give clues to the operator as to why efficiency of the system is lower � Does not calculate various losses accountable for various efficiency levels

3.1.4 Indirect method of determining boiler efficiency

Methodology

The reference standards for Boiler Testing at Site using the indirect method are the British Standard, BS 845:1987 and the USA Standard ASME PTC-4-1 Power Test Code Steam Generating Units.

The indirect method is also called the heat loss method. The efficiency can be calculated by subtracting the heat loss fractions from 100 as follows:

Efficiency of boiler (n) = 100 - (i + ii + iii + iv + v + vi + vii)

Whereby the principle losses that occur in a boiler are loss of heat due to:

i. Dry flue gas ii. Evaporation of water formed due to H2 in fuel iii. Evaporation of moisture in fuel iv. Moisture present in combustion air v. Unburnt fuel in fly ash vi. Unburnt fuel in bottom ash vii. Radiation and other unaccounted losses

Losses due to moisture in fuel and due to combustion of hydrogen are dependent on the fuel, and cannot be controlled by design.

The data required for calculation of boiler efficiency using the indirect method are: � Ultimate analysis of fuel (H2, O2, S, C, moisture content, ash content) � Percentage of oxygen or CO2 in the flue gas � Flue gas temperature in oC (Tf) � Ambient temperature in oC (Ta) and humidity of air in kg/kg of dry air � GCV of fuel in kcal/kg � Percentage combustible in ash (in case of solid fuels) � GCV of ash in kcal/kg (in case of solid fuels)

A detailed procedure for calculating boiler efficiency using the indirect method is given below. However, practicing energy managers in industry usually prefer simpler calculation procedures.

Prepared By: Prof. H.R. Jivanramjiwala, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 31: industrial chemical technology

Performance Assess.& Energy conservation approach for industrial boiler‐H.R.Jivanramjwala‐N.G.Patel Polytechnic  

Step 1: Calculate the theoretical air requirement

= [(11.43 x C) + {34.5 x (H2 – O2/8)} + (4.32 x S)]/100 kg/kg of fuel

Step 2: Calculate the percent excess air supplied (EA)

= O2 percent x 100 -------------

(21 - O2 percent)

Step 3: Calculate actual mass of air supplied/ kg of fuel (AAS)

= {1 + EA/100} x theoretical air

Step 4: Estimate all heat losses

i. Percentage heat loss due to dry flue gas

= m x Cp x (Tf-Ta) x 100 ----------------------------

GCV of fuel

Where, m = mass of dry flue gas in kg/kg of fuel m = (mass of dry products of combustion / kg of fuel) + (mass of N2 in fuel on 1 kg basis ) + (mass of N2 in actual mass of air we are supplying). Cp = Specific heat of flue gas (0.23 kcal/kg )

ii. Percentage heat loss due to evaporation of water formed due to H2 in fuel

= 9 x H2 {584+Cp (Tf-Ta)} x 100

-------------------------------------- GCV of fuel

Where, H2 = percentage of H2 in 1 kg of fuel

Cp = specific heat of superheated steam (0.45 kcal/kg)

iii. Percentage heat loss due to evaporation of moisture present in fuel

= M{584+ Cp (Tf-Ta)} x 100 ---------------------------------

GCV of fuel

Where, M – percent moisture in 1kg of fuel Cp – Specific heat of superheated steam (0.45 kcal/kg)

iv. Percentage heat loss due to moisture present in air

= AAS x humidity factor x Cp (Tf-Ta)} x 100

--------------------------------------------------- GCV of fuel

Prepared By: Prof. H.R. Jivanramjiwala, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 32: industrial chemical technology

Performance Assess.& Energy conservation approach for industrial boiler‐H.R.Jivanramjwala‐N.G.Patel Polytechnic  

C: H2:

84 percent 12.0 percent

S: 3.0 percentO2: 1 percent

GCV of Oil: 10200 kcal/kg

Percentage of Oxygen: 7 percent

Where, Cp – Specific heat of superheated steam (0.45 kcal/kg)

v. Percentage heat loss due to unburnt fuel in fly ash

= Total ash collected/kg of fuel burnt x GCV of fly ash x 100 -----------------------------------------------------------------------

GCV of fuel

vi. Percentage heat loss due to unburnt fuel in bottom ash

= Total ash collected per Kg of fuel burnt x G.C.V of bottom ash x 100 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------

GCV of fuel

vii. Percentage heat loss due to radiation and other unaccounted loss

The actual radiation and convection losses are difficult to assess because of particular emissivity of various surfaces, its inclination, airflow patterns etc. In a relatively small boiler, with a capacity of 10 MW, the radiation and unaccounted losses could amount to between 1 percent and 2 percent of the gross calorific value of the fuel, while in a 500 MW boiler, values between 0.2 percent to 1 percent are typical. The loss may be assumed appropriately depending on the surface condition.

Step 5: Calculate boiler efficiency and boiler evaporation ratio

Efficiency of boiler (n) = 100 - (i + ii + iii + iv + v + vi + vii)

Evaporation Ratio = Heat utilized for steam generation/Heat addition to the steam

Evaporation ratio means kilogram of steam generated per kilogram of fuel consumed. Typical Examples are:

� Coal fired boiler: 6 (i.e. 1 kg of coal can generate 6 kg of steam) � Oil fired boiler: 13 (i.e. 1 kg of oil can generate 13 kg of steam)

However, the evaporation ratio will depend upon type of boiler, calorific value of the fuel and associated efficiencies.

Example

� Type of boiler: Oil fired � Ultimate analysis of Oil

Prepared By: Prof. H.R. Jivanramjiwala, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 33: industrial chemical technology

10 

Performance Assess.& Energy conservation approach for industrial boiler‐H.R.Jivanramjwala‐N.G.Patel Polytechnic  

� Percentage of CO2: 11 percent� Flue gas temperature (Tf): 220 0C � Ambient temperature (Ta): 27 0C � Humidity of air : 0.018 kg/kg of dry air

Step-1: Calculate the theoretical air requirement

= [(11.43 x C) + [{34.5 x (H2 – O2/8)} + (4.32 x S)]/100 kg/kg of oil = [(11.43 x 84) + [{34.5 x (12 – 1/8)} + (4.32 x 3)]/100 kg/kg of oil = 13.82 kg of air/kg of oil

Step-2: Calculate the percent excess air supplied (EA)

Excess air supplied (EA) = (O2 x 100)/(21-O2) = (7 x 100)/(21-7) = 50 percent

Step 3: Calculate actual mass of air supplied/ kg of fuel (AAS)

AAS/kg fuel = [1 + EA/100] x Theo. Air (AAS)

= [1 + 50/100] x 13.82 = 1.5 x 13.82 = 20.74 kg of air/kg of oil

Step 4: Estimate all heat losses

i. Percentage heat loss due to dry flue gas

m x Cp x (Tf – Ta ) x 100 = -----------------------------

GCV of fuel

m = mass of CO2 + mass of SO2 + mass of N2 + mass of O2

0.84 x 44 0.03 x 64 20.74 x 77 m = ----------- + ---------- + ----------- (0.07 x 32)

12 32 100

m = 21.35 kg / kg of oil

21.35 x 0.23 x (220 – 27) = ------------------------------- x 100

10200

= 9.29 percent

Prepared By: Prof. H.R. Jivanramjiwala, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 34: industrial chemical technology

11 

Performance Assess.& Energy conservation approach for industrial boiler‐H.R.Jivanramjwala‐N.G.Patel Polytechnic  

A simpler method can also be used: Percentage heat loss due to dry flue gas

m x Cp x (Tf – Ta ) x 100

= ----------------------------- GCV of fuel

m (total mass of flue gas)

= mass of actual air supplied + mass of fuel supplied

= 20.19 + 1 = 21.19

= 21.19 x 0.23 x (220-27)

------------------------------- x 100 10200

= 9.22 percent

ii. Heat loss due to evaporation of water formed due to H2 in fuel

9 x H2 {584+0.45 (Tf – Ta )}

= --------------------------------- GCV of fuel where H2 = percentage of H2 in fuel

9 x 12 {584+0.45(220-27)}

= -------------------------------- 10200

= 7.10 percent

iii. Heat loss due to moisture present in air

AAS x humidity x 0.45 x ((Tf – Ta ) x 100

= ------------------------------------------------- GCV of fuel

= [20.74 x 0.018 x 0.45 x (220-27) x 100]/10200

= 0.317 percent

iv. Heat loss due to radiation and other unaccounted losses

For a small boiler it is estimated to be 2 percent

Step 5: Calculate boiler efficiency and boiler evaporation ratio

Efficiency of boiler (n) = 100 - (i + ii + iii + iv + v + vi + vii)

i. Heat loss due to dry flue gas : 9.29 percent

Prepared By: Prof. H.R. Jivanramjiwala, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 35: industrial chemical technology

12 

Performance Assess.& Energy conservation approach for industrial boiler‐H.R.Jivanramjwala‐N.G.Patel Polytechnic  

ii. Heat loss due to evaporation of water formed due to H2 in fuel : 7.10 percent iii. Heat loss due to moisture present in air : 0.317 percentiv. Heat loss due to radiation and other unaccounted losses : 2 percent

= 100- [9.29+7.10+0.317+2]

= 100 – 17.024 = 83 percent (approximate)

Evaporation Ratio = Heat utilized for steam generation/Heat addition to the steam

= 10200 x 0.83 / (660-60) = 14.11 (compared to 13 for a typical oil fired boiler)

Advantages of indirect method � A complete mass and energy balance can be obtained for each individual stream, making

it easier to identify options to improve boiler efficiency

Disadvantages of indirect method � Time consuming � Requires lab facilities for analysis

4. ENERGY EFFICIENCY OPPORTUNITIES

This section includes energy efficiency opportunities related to combustion, heat transfer, avoidable losses, auxiliary power consumption, water quality and blow down.

Energy losses and therefore energy efficiency opportunities in boilers can be related to combustion, heat transfer, avoidable losses, high auxiliary power consumption, water quality and blow down. The various energy efficiency opportunities in a boiler system can be related to: 1. Stack temperature control 2. Feed water preheating using economizers 3. Combustion air pre-heating 4. Incomplete combustion minimization 5. Excess air control 6. Radiation and convection heat loss avoidance 7. Automatic blow down control 8. Reduction of scaling and soot losses 9. Reduction of boiler steam pressure 10. Variable speed control for fans, blowers and pumps 11. Controlling boiler loading 12. Proper boiler scheduling 13. Boiler replacement

Prepared By: Prof. H.R. Jivanramjiwala, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 36: industrial chemical technology

Prof. Latesh B. Chaudhari,

Asst. Professor,

Faculty of Engineering Technology & Research, Isroli- Bardoli.

Prepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 37: industrial chemical technology

CONVECTIONCONVECTION

C ti i thConvection is the transfer of heat by the actual movement of the warmed matter.

•Convection is the transfer of heat energytransfer of heat energy in a gas or liquid by

fmovement of currents.

Prepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 38: industrial chemical technology

CONVECTIONCONVECTION

H t d iHeated air rises, cools,

then falls

Hot water rises, cools,

and falls

Air near heater isreplaced by cooler

air andthen fallsand falls air, andthe cycle repeats

Prepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 39: industrial chemical technology

CONVECTIONCONVECTION

Prepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 40: industrial chemical technology

SEA BREEZE AND SEA BREEZE AND LAND BREEZELAND BREEZE

SEA BREEZE LAND BREEZE

Prepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 41: industrial chemical technology

CONDUCTIONCONDUCTIONCONDUCTIONCONDUCTION

• Conduction is the • Conduction is the transfer of energy through matter from through matter from particle to particle.

• It is the transfer and distribution of heat energy from atom to atom within a atom within a substance.

Prepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 42: industrial chemical technology

HOW DOES CONDUCTION HOW DOES CONDUCTION HAPPEN?HAPPEN?HAPPEN?HAPPEN?

Prepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 43: industrial chemical technology

RADIATIONRADIATIONRADIATIONRADIATIONSunlight is a form of

radiation that is radiated through space to our planet

ith t th id f fl idwithout the aid of fluids or solids.

Since there are no fluids inSince there are no fluids in space, convection is not responsible for transferring theresponsible for transferring the heat. Thus, radiation brings heat to our planet.heat to our planet.

Prepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 44: industrial chemical technology

RADIATIONRADIATIONRADIATIONRADIATIONPrepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 45: industrial chemical technology

RADIATION AMONG RADIATION AMONG RADIATION AMONG RADIATION AMONG OBJECTSOBJECTS

Prepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 46: industrial chemical technology

HEAT TRANSFER

Prof Latesh B ChaudhariProf. Latesh B. ChaudhariAsst. Professor

l f h & hFaculty of Engg. Tech. & ResearchIsroli-Bardoli

Prepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 47: industrial chemical technology

What we are going to learnWhat we are going to learn

How heat spreads from one region to another.

Examples:

How the whole copper rod get hot when we heat one pp d g aendHow does the heat spread throughout the whole pot of

t h l h t th b ttwater when we are only heating the bottom

How does the heat from the Sun reaches us

Prepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 48: industrial chemical technology

Heat TransferHeat Transfer

Heat always moves from a warmer place to a cooler place.pHot objects in a cooler room will cool to room temperatureroom temperature.Cold objects in a warmer room will heat up to room temperatureto room temperature.

Prepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 49: industrial chemical technology

QuestionQuestion

If a cup of coffee and an ice lolly were left on the table in this room what would happen to them? Why?

The cup of coffee will cool until it reaches room temperature The lolly will melt androom temperature. The lolly will melt and then the liquid will cool to room temperaturetemperature.

Prepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 50: industrial chemical technology

What is happening?What is happening?

All things are made up of moleculesWhen things get heated, they absorb heat energy.This means that the molecules are absorbing the heat energyWith th l l bl tWith more energy, the molecules are able to move fasterWhen the molecules move faster the temperatureWhen the molecules move faster, the temperature of the object increases.Temperature increase means the object gets p j ghotter.

Prepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 51: industrial chemical technology

3 Processes of Heat Transfer3 Processes of Heat Transfer

Conduction

ConvectionConvection

Radiation

Prepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 52: industrial chemical technology

CONDUCTIONCONDUCTION

Occurs mainly in solids

Two types of conductionMolecular vibrationFree electron diffusion

Note: Conduction is not the main form of heat transfer in liquids and gases because their s e qu ds d g ses bec use emolecules are spaced further apart.

Prepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 53: industrial chemical technology

STEADY STATESTEADY STATESTEADY STATESTEADY STATE��THERMAL CODUCTIVITY�THERMAL CODUCTIVITY�

STEADY STATE IS THE STATE WHEN THERE IS NO MORE ABSORPTION OF HEAT AND THE TEMPERATURE BECOMES CONSTANTSTEADY STATE IS THE STATE WHEN THERE IS NO MORE ABSORPTION OF HEAT AND THE TEMPERATURE BECOMES CONSTANT��

DURING STEADY STATE� DIFFERENT PARTICLES MAY HAVE DIFFERENT TEMPERATURES BUT DIFFERENT PARTICLES HAVE CONSTANT TEMPERATURE� DURING STEADY STATE� DIFFERENT PARTICLES MAY HAVE DIFFERENT TEMPERATURES BUT DIFFERENT PARTICLES HAVE CONSTANT TEMPERATURE�

Prepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 54: industrial chemical technology

Molecular VibrationMolecular Vibration

When heat is supplied to one end, the molecules at the hot end start to vibrate more vigorously.

In the process, they ‘bump’ into their neighboring molecules. In doing so, some energy is transferred to the neighbour.

The neighbour molecule gains energy and starts to ib t i l Th l tivibrate more vigorously. The cycle continues.

Prepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 55: industrial chemical technology

Conduction AnimationConduction Animation

The conduction animation is on the left.Notice the movement of the moleculesNotice the movement of the molecules along the rod.

Cli k h f i tiClick here for animation

Prepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 56: industrial chemical technology

Free electron DiffusionFree electron Diffusion

This form of conduction takes place only in metals. As only metals have free electronsonly metals have free electrons.

The electrons are freed from the molecule when heated and they travel towards the cold end.and they travel towards the cold end.

At the cold end they collide into a molecule therefore passing all their energy to the molecule.p g gy

Prepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 57: industrial chemical technology

Comparing the 2 mechanismsComparing the 2 mechanisms

Molecular vibration Free electron diffusion

Occurs in all solids Occurs in metals onlyOccurs in all solids

Slow process

Occurs in metals only

Fast processSlow process Fast process

This explains why metals heat up faster:

1. Metals have 2 mechanisms of conduction occuring at the same time.

2. In metals, free electron diffusion is the main mechanism, which is faster.

Prepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 58: industrial chemical technology

Conductors and InsulatorsConductors and Insulators

Materials that can conduct heat easily and readily (eg. Metals) are known as y ( g )conductors.Materials that do not conduct heat easilyMaterials that do not conduct heat easily (eg. Water, air, plastic) are known as insulatorsinsulators.

Prepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 59: industrial chemical technology

ConductionConduction

CONDUCTION is when heat moves through a ________. Metals are better conductors of heat than plastic or wood.than plastic or wood.

This is whyThis is why…These parts are made of plastic ormade of plastic or wood:

These parts areThese parts are made of metal:

Prepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 60: industrial chemical technology

ConductionConduction

In this experiment we saw that liquid water is a poor conductor of heat. The ice cube did not melt even though the water above it wasnot melt even though the water above it was boiling.

A piece of ice fixed (with gauze) at the bottom of the testA piece of ice fixed (with gauze) at the bottom of the test--tube will not tube will not melt even when the water is boiling at the top. Melting has to await melt even when the water is boiling at the top. Melting has to await conduction of energy through the water. conduction of energy through the water.

The hot water carries its own thermal energy with it when it moves. The hot water carries its own thermal energy with it when it moves. That is the process of convection. It happens in a fluid whether it is a That is the process of convection. It happens in a fluid whether it is a liquid or a gas On a large scale it happens in the oceans and in theliquid or a gas On a large scale it happens in the oceans and in theliquid or a gas. On a large scale it happens in the oceans and in the liquid or a gas. On a large scale it happens in the oceans and in the atmosphere, in hot water heating systems and in ventilation. Winds are atmosphere, in hot water heating systems and in ventilation. Winds are just convection currents.just convection currents.

Prepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 61: industrial chemical technology

ConductionConduction

Air is also a poor conductor of heat. This is how many types of house insulation and clothing keep us warm.

•Conduction and convection both need co vec o bo eedparticles to carry energy when heat is transferred

Prepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 62: industrial chemical technology

Applications of conductionApplications of conduction

Trapping air as insulationDifferent sensations from conductors andDifferent sensations from conductors and insulatorsUses of good conductors: cooking utensilsUses of good conductors: cooking utensilsUses of good insulators: table mats, h dlhandles

Prepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 63: industrial chemical technology

ConvectionConvection

Occurs in liquids and gasesDoes not occur in solids because theDoes not occur in solids because the molecules are not free to move around

Prepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 64: industrial chemical technology

What happens during convectionWhat happens during convection

Taking the example of heating waterWater at the bottom is heated firstHeated water expandsWhen water expands density decreasesHeated water of lower density starts to riseCooler water of higher density rushes in from sides to take its placesides to take its placeThe cooler water gets heated and the cycle repeatsrepeats.Convection currents are set up.

Prepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 65: industrial chemical technology

Convection AnimationConvection Animation

Refer to the animation on the right.The animation shows the process ofThe animation shows the process of convection taking place.The blue circles represent unheatedThe blue circles represent unheated molecules.Th dd h l l h hThe redder the molecules get the more heat they are absorbing.

Prepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 66: industrial chemical technology

Applications of convectionApplications of convection

Air con is usually placed at the top of a room.Heating coil of a kettle is usually at the bottombottomFormation of land and sea breezes

Prepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 67: industrial chemical technology

Convection

Words to use: expands, radiators, dense, heated, current, floatfloat

Prepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 68: industrial chemical technology

Heating iceTemp/Temp/OO

CC Heating ice150

CC

This flat line shows where energy

100is being used to push the particles further apart for evaporation

50

00

50

Time/sThis flat line shows where energy is being used to break bonds –-50 is being used to break bonds –this has to be done during melting

Prepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 69: industrial chemical technology

Particles gain energy and become less dense and rise. They pass theirThey pass their energy on and become more d d i kdense and sink. Heat up, less dense rise……

Current

Prepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 70: industrial chemical technology

A hot air balloon usesA hot air balloon uses…..

Explain.pWhen the air particles in the balloon are heated they move apart. The air y pexpands and becomes less dense. This causes the hot air to rise and the balloon does toothe balloon does too.

Prepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 71: industrial chemical technology

Why does the balloon float back down?

As it rises the warm air meets cooler air and passes the energy on. Having passed p gy g pon the energy it cools down and becomes denser which sinks.

This sets up a convection currentThis sets up a convection current.

Prepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 72: industrial chemical technology

RadiationRadiation

Radiation does not require a medium to transfer heat. (can occur in a vacuum)( )Sun releases electromagnetic waves (heat is contained in the waves as infra-red)is contained in the waves as infra red)Hotter objects radiates more heat.

Prepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 73: industrial chemical technology

Emitters and absorbersEmitters and absorbers

The Sun gives out the heat.It is known as an emitter / radiatorIt is known as an emitter / radiator

Th E h k i h hThe Earth takes in the heat.It is known as an absorber.

Prepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 74: industrial chemical technology

RadiationBlack ________ infrared radiation (i.e. heat) from the sun better than white does.

I’m very hot!I’m cool!

RadiationRadiation cancan happenhappen throughthroughpppp ggabsolutelyabsolutely ________________ becausebecause thethe heatheatisis movingmoving byby ____________.. ThisThis isis howhow heatheatreachesreaches usus fromfrom thethe ________..

Words – sun, absorbs, nothing, warmer, waves

Prepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 75: industrial chemical technology

Good and Bad Emitters/Absorbers

A good emitter would also be a good absorber.A poor emitter would be a poor absorber.

Good emitter/absorber Poor emitter/absorberGood emitter/absorber Poor emitter/absorber

Dull, black surface Shiny, silver surfaceRough surface Smooth surface

Prepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 76: industrial chemical technology

Factors affecting radiationFactors affecting radiation

Colour and texture of the surface (refer to previous slide)p )Surface temperatureHigher surface temperature higher rate ofHigher surface temperature, higher rate of transfer. S fSurface areaLarger surface area, higher rate of transfer

Prepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 77: industrial chemical technology

Applications of radiationApplications of radiation

TeapotsThe greenhouseThe greenhouseColour and texture of clothingsSkiSkin cancer

Prepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 78: industrial chemical technology

The vacuum flaskThe vacuum flask

The vacuum prevents conduction and convectionThe silvered surfaces

d di ireduces radiationCap and base are

d f dmade of good insulators to reduce conductionconduction

Prepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 79: industrial chemical technology

HEAT TRANSFER BY

RADIATIONRADIATION

INDUSTRIAL CHEMICAL TECHNOLOGY -2010MODULE-1

Heat Transfer Operationp

KARTIK R. DESAISr Lecturer Chemical Engineering DepartmentSr. Lecturer, Chemical Engineering Department,

N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Isroli-Afwa

Prepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 80: industrial chemical technology

OUTLINE

Introduction

Electromagnetic Waves

Thermal Radiation

Terms involved

Basic Law’s of Radiation

Prepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 81: industrial chemical technology

INTRODUCTION

HEAT is a form of energy which flow as a result of temperature gradient.

Prepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 82: industrial chemical technology

INTRODUCTION

HEAT TRANSFER is the science which deals with the rates of exchangeof heat between hot and cold bodies called the SOURCE and theRECIEVERRECIEVER.

© Copy Rights, www.cctech.co.in

Prepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 83: industrial chemical technology

INTRODUCTION

Heat is transferred by three primary modes:

1) CONDUCTION: It is the primary mode of heat transfer through solid. Conduction occurs by two h imechanisms:

i) Molecular Motion - Molecules of higher energy (motion) impart that energy to adjacent molecules of lesser energy.ii) Migration of free electrons - This is primarily associated with pure metals.) g p y p

Mathematically conduction is describe by Fourier's Law:Mathematically, conduction is describe by Fourier s Law:

Where A is the cross-sectional area that the heat is flowing through the solid, ∆T is the temperature gradient in the solid. (k) is the thermal conductivity of the material.

The thermal conductivity is a physical property of the solid. It the a measure of the materials ability to conduct heat.

Q: Why the negative sign appears in Fourier's law of heat conduction?

Prepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 84: industrial chemical technology

INTRODUCTION

2) CONVECTION: It occurs when a fluid exchanges energy with an adjacent solid. The fluid motion adjacent to the solid surface assists in the transfer of energy.

There are two types of convection heat transfer:There are two types of convection heat transfer: i) Forced convection - Fluid motion is induced by an external source such as a fan or pump.ii) Natural convection - Heating a fluid results in natural convective heating, Air willcirculate due to natural convective heating.

The temperature gradient in the fluid creates variations in density within the fluid. The colder fluid(heavier) will sink, and the hotter fluid (lighter) will rise.

Newton's law of cooling describes the rate of heat transfer from a solid surface into a fluid medium:Newton s law of cooling describes the rate of heat transfer from a solid surface into a fluid medium:This relationship is valid for both forced and natural convection.

(Tamb) is the ambient fluid temperature, (h) is defined as the convective heat transfercoefficient. This proportionality constant contains all the nonlinearities associated with convection.Q: A sealed cube containing argon floating in deep space is heated on one side by a nearby

star. Will there be any heat transfer due to natural convection?

Prepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 85: industrial chemical technology

INTRODUCTION

3) RADIATION: It is the energy transferred in the form of electromagnetic waves as a result of thechanges in the “electronic configuration” of the atoms or molecules of matter. Whenever a chargedparticle undergoes acceleration , energy possessed by the particle is converted into a form of energyknown as electromagnetic radiation .THERMAL RADIATION: It is the form of radiation emitted by bodies because of theirtemperature. i) Converting internal energy into out-flowing electromagnetic waves, ii) Absorbingincoming electromagnetic waves which are converted to internal energy.g g gy

The rate of radiant thermal energy transfer between two bodies is described by the Stefan-Boltzmann Law: “The emission of thermal radiative energy is proportional to the fourth power ofthe absolute temperature (Kelvin or Rankine)”.

Where E is the emissive power flux of the surface (W/m2) (σ) is the Stefan BoltzmannWhere E, is the emissive power flux of the surface (W/m2), (σ) is the Stefan-Boltzmann constant, and (ε) is the emissivity of the surface.

The rate of radiative heat transfer between two surfaces, a and b is:

Stefan-Boltzmann constant, (σ) = 5.6703 x10-8 (W/m2K4)

Prepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 86: industrial chemical technology

INTRODUCTION

Three modes of heat transfer:

Prepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 87: industrial chemical technology

ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES

The theoretical foundation was established by physicist James Clerk Maxwell in1864. El t ti di ti i th ti fElectromagnetic radiation is the propagation of a collection of discrete packets of energy called “photons” or “quanta”.

where, h : Plank’s constant (=6.625*10-34 J.s)All Electromagnetic waves travel at the speed

e = h ν

of light (=2.99*108m/s) in a vacuum.Electromagnetic waves are characterized by their frequency (ν) or wavelength (λ).

where C is the speed of propagation of a wave in that media.

λ = C/ ν

The Electromagnetic wave spectrum

Prepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 88: industrial chemical technology

Electromagnetic Waves

Earth’s energy budget:

Prepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 89: industrial chemical technology

Electromagnetic Waves

Electromagnetic wave spectrum:

Prepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 90: industrial chemical technology

Electromagnetic Waves

Electromagnetic spectrum:

Prepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 91: industrial chemical technology

RADIATION

Types of radiation:

Prepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 92: industrial chemical technology

THERMAL RADIATION

Every object emits thermal radiation from its surface due to its temperature.Thermal radiation is continuously emitted by all matter whose temperature isabove absolute zero (0 K).above absolute zero (0 K).Thermal radiation is electromagnetic radiation that is transmitted by theelectrons in the atoms of the radiating object. Everyday objects emit thermalradiation that is in the infrared region of the electromagnetic spectrum.radiation that is in the infrared region of the electromagnetic spectrum.A hot object, like the filament of a light bulb, emits infrared and visible thermalradiation.Thermal radiation is transmitted through air or through the vacuum of spaceThermal radiation is transmitted through air or through the vacuum of space.Thermal radiation transports heat from a hotter surface to a cooler surface, e.g.light from the surface of the Sun to the Earth.Th th l di ti i id l d i t ilib i b ll thThe thermal radiation inside an enclosed oven is at equilibrium, because all thewalls are at the same temperature.In heat transfer studies, we are interested in the energy emitted by bodiesbeca se of their temperat re onl

© Copy Rights, www.cctech.co.in14

because of their temperature only.

Prepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 93: industrial chemical technology

THERMAL RADIATION

How radiation differs from other phenomenon?

It does not require the presence of a material media (solid/liquid/gas) to take place.

Energy transfer by radiation is fastest (at the speed of light) and it suffers nott ti iattenuation in a vacuum.

Heat transfer through an evacuated space can occur only by radiation.E S l di i (0 3 3 )Ex: Solar radiation (0.3-3μm).

Radiation heat transfer can occur between two bodies which are separated by amedium colder than both the bodiesmedium colder than both the bodies.

Radiation is a volumetric phenomenon, except for opaque bodies (τ=0).

© Copy Rights, www.cctech.co.in15

Prepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 94: industrial chemical technology

TERMS INVOLVED

Radiation Intensity (Ie): The rate at which radiation energy is emitted in the (θ,Φ ) di ti it l t thi di tidirection per unit area normal to this direction and per unit solid angle about this direction.

I (θ,Φ) = dQ /(dA*cosθ*dω)Ie (θ,Φ) dQe/(dA cosθ dω)

Solid Angle (ω): It is the two- dimensional angle in three-dimensional space thatthree dimensional space that an object subtends at a point.

dω =ds/r2

Prepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 95: industrial chemical technology

Terms Involved

Black Body Radiation:• Thermal radiation from a black body is

termed as black body radiation.• A black body is an idealized object that

absorbs all e.m.radiation that falls on it.

Irradiation (G): • The radiation flux incident on a surface

from all directions.

Radiosity (J):• The rate at which radiation energyThe rate at which radiation energy

leaves a unit area of a surface in all directions.

Prepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 96: industrial chemical technology

Radiative properties

Emissivity (ε): The ratio of the radiation emitted by the surface at a given temperature to the radiation emitted by a black body at the same temperature.by a black body at the same temperature.

Monochromatic emissivity (ελ): The ratio of the monochromatic emissive power of the surface to the monochromatic emissive power of a black surface atmonochromatic emissive power of a black surface at the same temperature and wavelength.

ελ = Eλ/Ebλ

Absorptivity (α): The fraction of irradiation absorbedAbsorptivity (α): The fraction of irradiation absorbed by the surface.

• It depends strongly on the temperature of the source at which the incident radiation is originatingat which the incident radiation is originating.

Reflectivity (ρ): The fraction of irradiation reflected by the surface

Transmissi it ( ): The fraction of irradiationTransmissivity (τ): The fraction of irradiation transmitted by the surface.

Prepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 97: industrial chemical technology

Terms Involved

Properties of Opaque Surfaces :Ii = Ir+Iaρ+α =1

Semi-transparent surfaces:• The region into which the radiation is transmitted may orρ α 1

τ=0radiation is transmitted may or may not be part of the computational domain.

Ii = Ir+Ia+Iti r a tρ+α+τ=1

Types of diffusion :

The Gray body : The gray body is defined such that the monochromatic emissivity(ε ) of the body is independent of wavelength(ελ) of the body is independent of wavelength.

Prepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 98: industrial chemical technology

Terms Involved

View factor : The view factor from a surface i to j is (Fij) defined as the fraction of radiation energy leaving surface i that strikes surface j directly.j yIt is a purely geometric quantity and is independent of surface properties and temperature.Radiation analysis on an enclosure consisting of NRadiation analysis on an enclosure consisting of N surfaces requires the evaluation of N2 view factors.

Reciprocity relation : Ai*Fij = Aj*Fji

Summation rule : ΣF =1 for j=1 to NSummation rule : ΣFij =1 , for j=1 to NOptical Thickness : An important dimensionless number

in radiation.O i l hi k i di h l di i iOptical thickness indicates how strongly radiation is absorbed (and scattered).

Optical thickness = (α + σs) LL = Mean beam length(typically distanceL = Mean beam length(typically distance

between two opposing walls)

Prepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 99: industrial chemical technology

BASIC LAW’S OF RADIATION

Stefan-Boltzmann law: The total radiation energy emitted by a black body per unit time and per

it f i bunit surface area was given by ,Total blackbody emissive power, Eb = σ *T4

where, σ =5.67 x10-8 W/(m2 · K4)

Spectral(or Monochromatic) blackbody emissive power (Ebλ) :The amount of radiation energy emitted by a blackbody at a

th d i t t (T) it ti it f dthermodynamic temperature (T) per unit time, per unit surface area, and per unit wavelength(λ).

Ebλ(λ,T) = C1/[λ5*(exp(C2/λ*T)-1)] ……..Plank’s lawwhere C = 2Π*h*c 2where, C1 = 2Π h c0

C2 = h*c0/kh : Plank’s constant k : Boltzmann’s constant

Prepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 100: industrial chemical technology

Variation of Ebλ with wavelength

•The emitted radiation is a continuous function of wavelength.g

•At any wavelength , the amount of emitted radiation increases with increasing temperaturetemperature.

•As temperature increases , the curves shift to the left to the shorter wavelength region.

•The radiation emitted by sun, at (5800K) reaches its peak in the visible region of the spectrumspectrum.

Prepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 101: industrial chemical technology

Continued…

Wien’s displacement law: The wavelength at which the peak spectral blackbody emissive powerThe wavelength at which the peak spectral blackbody emissive power

occurs for a specified temperature is given by Wien’s displacement law.(λ*T)max power =2897 μm*K

Kirchhoff’s law:The total hemispherical emissivity of a surface at temperature T is equal toThe total hemispherical emissivity of a surface at temperature T is equal to

its total hemispherical absorptivity for radiation coming from a blackbody atsame temperature.

ε(T) = α(T)ε(T) = α(T)

Prepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 102: industrial chemical technology

Radiative transfer equation (RTE) :

Radiation intensity along an incremental step in any direction is decreased by absorption and out-scattering, and increased by emission and in-scattering.

Prepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 103: industrial chemical technology

QUESTIONSPrepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 104: industrial chemical technology

Prepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 105: industrial chemical technology

I d i l Ch i l T h lIndustrial Chemical TechnologyModule – I

Heat Transfer TechnologyHeat Transfer Technology05/12/2010

By:yHimanshu S. Desai

Lecturer, Chemical Engineering DepartmentN  G  P t l P l t h iN. G. Patel PolytechnicIsroli – Afwa, Bardoli

Prepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 106: industrial chemical technology

CondensersA condenser is a device or unit used to condense asubstance from its gaseous to its liquid state, typically bycooling itcooling it.Condensers are typically heat exchangers which havevarious designs and come in many sizes.g yCondensers are used in air conditioning,industrial chemical processes such as distillation,

l d h h hsteam power plants and other heat‐exchange systems.Use of cooling water or surrounding air as the coolant iscommon in many condenserscommon in many condensers.

Prepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 107: industrial chemical technology

Types of CondensersSurface condenser is the commonly used term for awater‐cooled shell and tube heat exchanger.Th d h h hi hThese condensers are heat exchangers which convertsteam from its gaseous to its liquid state.When cooling water is in short supply an air‐cooledWhen cooling water is in short supply, an air cooledcondenser is often used.

Prepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 108: industrial chemical technology

Types of CondensersContact condenser is a device in which a vapor isbrought into direct contact with a cooling liquid andcondensed by giving up its latent heat to the liquidcondensed by giving up its latent heat to the liquid.In almost all cases the cooling liquid is water, and thecondensing vapor is steamcondensing vapor is steam.In this type of condenser the steam and cooling waterare mixed in a condensing chamber and withdrawngtogether.

Prepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 109: industrial chemical technology

PurposeSteam traps exist to discharge air and condensate whilenot permitting the escape of live steamTheir goal is to:Improve efficiency (Excess water or air in the system preventsit f hi ti t t i kl d i t t )it from reaching operating temperature quickly during start‐up)

Protect system (Inadequate steam trapping can lead to waterhammer, corrosion, leakage, and high maintenance costs)

Provide maximum heat transfer (‘dry’ steam has best heattransfer properties in equipment like a heat exchanger)

Prepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 110: industrial chemical technology

TypesTypes1. Mechanical steam traps ‐ Have a float that rises and falls in

relation to condensate level and this usually has a mechanical linkageattached that opens and closes the valve. Operate in directrelationship to condensate levels present in the body of the steamtraptrap.

Prepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 111: industrial chemical technology

TypesTypes2. Temperature steam traps ‐ Have a valve that moves in/out of

position by either expansion/contraction caused by temperaturechange. Some condensate builds up as it cools sufficiently to allow thevalve to open. In most circumstances this is not desirable ascondensate needs to be removed as soon as it is formedcondensate needs to be removed as soon as it is formed.

Prepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 112: industrial chemical technology

TypesTypes3. Thermodynamic steam traps ‐ Work on the difference

in response to velocity change in flow of compressible andincompressible fluids. As steam enters, static pressure abovethe disk forces the disk against the valve seat. The staticpressure over a large area overcomes the high inlet pressure ofthe steam. As the steam starts to condense, the pressureagainst the disk lessens and the trap opens to allow condensateg p pout.

Prepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 113: industrial chemical technology

Thank You

Prepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 114: industrial chemical technology

Industrial Chemical TechnologyModule IModule ‐ I

Heat Transfer Technology

Thermal Conductivity & Its 

Heat Transfer Technology

yMeasurement

By

21st November, 2010By

Prof. Latesh B. ChaudhariAsst. Prof. & I/C Head

Chemical Engineering Department,Faculty of Engineering, Technology & Research

Isroli – Afwa, Bardoli

Prepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 115: industrial chemical technology

Contents:Contents:

• Conduction mode of heat transfer

• Fourier’s Law

• Thermal Conductivity

Cl ifi i f i l b d h l C d i i• Classification of Materials based on Thermal Conductivity

• Effect of Temperature on Thermal Conductivity.

Prepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 116: industrial chemical technology

Conduction:Conduction:

• Transfer of heat from one part of a body to anotherp ypart of a same body or from on body to another bodywhich is in physical contact with it, without

i bl di l t f ti l f b dappreciable displacement of particles of a body.

Prepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 117: industrial chemical technology

Fourier’s Law:Fourier s Law:Q ∝ A x [ ­ dT / dx] 

Q = k x A x [ ­ dT / dx]Q = k x A x [ ­ dT / dx]Where,Q = Rate of heat transfer (Watts)

2A = Area of heat Transfer (m2)k = Thermal Conductivity (W/moC)dT/dx = Rate of change of temperature with distance in the

direction of heat flow, oC/m

“The rate of heat flow by conduction through uniformThe rate of heat flow by conduction through uniformmaterial is directly proportional to the area normal tothe direction of heat flow and temperature gradient inthe direction of heat flow”

Prepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 118: industrial chemical technology

Conduction Of Heat Through AConduction Of Heat Through A Material

Prepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 119: industrial chemical technology

Thermal Conductivity:Thermal Conductivity:

Q = ­ k x A x [dT / dx]k = (­ Q x dx) / (A x dT)

“The quantity of heat passing through a quantity of material of unith k h h fl hthickness with unit heat flow area in unit time when unit temperaturedifference is maintained across the opposite face of material”

OR“The ability of material to conduct heat through itself is known asthermal conductivity”.

• Thermal conductivity depends on the nature of material and itstemperature.

• Thermal conductivity of solids is higher then that of liquids andy g qliquids is higher then that of gases.

Prepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 120: industrial chemical technology

Thermal Conductivities of different materials:

State of Matter Solids Liquids GasesState of Matter Solids Liquids Gases

Thermal Conductivity (W/mK) 2.3 to 420 0.09 to 0.7 0.006 to 0.6

M i lThermal Conductivity

M i lThermal Conductivity

Thermal Conductivities of different materials  at Room Temperature

Materialy

W/m°CMaterial

yW/m°C

Diamond 2300 Brick 0.72Silver 429 Water (l) 0 613Silver 429 Water (l) 0.613Copper 401 Human skin 0.37Gold 317 Wood (oak) 0.17

Al i 237 H li ( ) 0 152Aluminum 237 Helium (g) 0.152Iron 80.2 Soft rubber 0.13

Mercury (l) 8.54 Glass fiber 0.043Glass 0.78 Air (g) 0.026

Prepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 121: industrial chemical technology

The range of thermal conductivity of various materials at room temperature

Prepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 122: industrial chemical technology

Classification of Materials based on Thermal C d i iConductivity:

HEAT CONDUCTORS:The materials having higher value of thermalconductivity are referred to as heat conductors. Eg. Silver

t l (k 420W/ K) R d C (k 395W/ K) G ldmetal (k = 420W/mK), Red Copper (k = 395W/mK), Gold(k = 302W/mK), Aluminums (k = 210W/mK)

HEAT INSULATORS:The materials having low value of thermal conductivityare referred to as heat insulators. Eg. Cork (k = 0.025W/mK), Glass Wool (k = 0.10 W/mK), Asbestos (k = 0.024W/mK), 85%magnesia (k = 0.04W/mK)W/mK), 85%magnesia (k 0.04 W/mK)

Prepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 123: industrial chemical technology

Thermal Insulation:Thermal Insulation:

• Process equipments such as reaction vessels, Reboilers,distillation column, evaporators etc or steam pipe will lose heat tothe atmosphere by conduction, convection and radiation.

• Thus to overcome this heat loss, some form of lagging is applied tothe hot surfaces. Eg. In a furnace surface temperature is reducedby making use of series of insulating bricks that are poorconductor of heat (Heat Insulators).

Requirement of lagging materials:

• It should have low thermal conductivity and• It should suppress convection currents.

Prepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 124: industrial chemical technology

Optimum Thickness of Insulation:Optimum Thickness of Insulation:

Increasing the thickness ofginsulation will decreasethe heat loss but at the

ti it ill isame time it will increasethe fixed cost. Thus,optimum thickness whichpwill help in minimum heatloss and minimum cost iscalculatedcalculated.

Prepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 125: industrial chemical technology

Variation of the thermal conductivity with temperature

Prepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 126: industrial chemical technology

Effect on Thermal Conductivity of Cu & Al with temperature

T  K C Al i

Effect on Thermal Conductivity of Cu & Al with temperature

Temperature, K Copper Aluminum100 482 302200 413 237200 413 237300 401 237400 393 240600 379 231800 366 218

Prepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 127: industrial chemical technology

THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY OF INSULATING POWDER

• Objective: To determine thermal conductivity of insulating powder.

• Theory: Consider the transfer of heat by conduction through the wall of hollow sphere form by the insulating powder layer packed between two thin copper spheres. Let ri = radius of inner sphere (m), ro = radius of outer sphere (m), Ti = avg. temperature of the inner surface (C) where,

• Ti = (T1+T2+T3+T4) / 4 ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ (1)

• Similarly,

• To = (T5+T6+T7+T8+T9+T10) / 6 ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ (2) 

• From the experimental value of q, Ti the unknown thermal conductivity K can be determine as,

• K = [Q x (ro ‐ ri)] / [4 xΠ x ri x ro x (Ti – To)] ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ (3)K = [Q x (ro  ri)] / [4 x Π x ri x ro x (Ti  To)] (3)

Prepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 128: industrial chemical technology

• Procedure:• Connect the equipment with electrical supply.q p pp y• Adjust input equal to any value between 20 to 60 watt maximum by volt & 

ammeter.• Take thermocouple readings at frequent intervals till consecutive readings are 

same indicating that steady state has been reached.g y

• OBSERVATION:– Radius of inner sphere, ri = ___________ mm– Radius of outer sphere ro = mmRadius of outer sphere, ro = ___________ mm– Voltmeter reading, V  = ___________ volts– Ammeter reading, I  = ___________ ampere– Heater input (Q) = V x I  = ___________ watts

••

• CALCULATION:• K  = [Q x (ro ‐ ri)] / [4 x π x ri x ro x (Ti – To)]• =• = 

•RESULT: Thermal Conductivity of the insulating powder is_____________W / moC.

Prepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 129: industrial chemical technology

Thank You

Prepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 130: industrial chemical technology

INDUSTRIAL CHEMICAL TECHNOLOGY MODULE – I 

HEAT TRANSFER TECHNOLOGY Date: 21/11/2010                By: L. B. Chaudhari 

 THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY OF INSULATING POWDER 

 Objective: To determine thermal conductivity of insulating powder. 

 Theory: Consider  the  transfer  of  heat  by  conduction  through  the wall  of  hollow  sphere 

form  by  the  insulating  powder  layer  packed  between  two  thin  copper  spheres.  Let  ri  = 

radius of  inner  sphere  (m),  ro =  radius of outer  sphere  (m), Ti = avg.  temperature of  the 

inner surface (C) where, 

Ti = (T1+T2+T3+T4) / 4  ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐  (1) 

Similarly, 

To = (T5+T6+T7+T8+T9+T10) / 6  ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐  (2)  

From the experimental value of q, Ti the unknown thermal conductivity K can be determine 

as, 

K = [Q x (ro ‐ ri)] / [4 x Π x ri x ro x (Ti – To)]  ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐  (3) 

 Procedure: 1. Connect the equipment with electrical supply. 

2. Adjust input equal to any value between 20 to 60 watt maximum by volt & ammeter. 

3. Take  thermocouple  readings  at  frequent  intervals  till  consecutive  readings  are  same 

indicating that steady state has been reached. 

 OBSERVATION:  1) Radius of inner sphere, ri  = ___________ mm 

2) Radius of outer sphere, ro  = ___________ mm 

3) Voltmeter reading, V     = ___________ volts 

4) Ammeter reading, I     = ___________ ampere 

5) Heater input (Q) = V x I     = ___________ watts 

 

Prepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 131: industrial chemical technology

 

OBSERVATION TABLE:  For Inner Sphere:  

Thermocouple No. 

T1  T2  T3  T4 Mean temperature Ti = (T1+T2+T3+T4) / 4 

Temperature (oC) 

         

 For Outer Sphere:  

Thermocouple No. 

T5  T6  T7  T8  T9  T10 Mean temperature 

To = (T5+T6+T7+T8 + T9 + T10) / 6 Temperature 

(oC)              

 CALCULATION:  K   = [Q x (ro ­ ri)] / [4 x π x ri x ro x (Ti – To)]    =    =   RESULT: Thermal Conductivity of the insulating powder is __________________W / moC.  CONCLUSION:   ______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

Prepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 132: industrial chemical technology

EXPERIMENT NO:              DATE: 

STEFAN BOLTZMAN APPARATUS 

AIM: To determine the Stefan Boltzman constant for a given apparatus. 

 

THEORY: 

The most  commonly  used  law  of  thermal  radiation  is  the  Stefan Boltzman  law which  state 

that the thermal radiation heat flux for emissive power of a black surface is promotional to the 

fourth power of absolute temp. of the surface & is given by, 

 

  (Q / A) = e x b =  σ x T4   ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­   (1) 

 

Where constant of proportionality σ is called Stefan Boltzman constant & has the value of 4.88 

x 10‐8 Kcal / hr x m2 x K4. 

 

PROCEDURE: 1. Heat the water in the tank by the immersion heater up to a temperature of above 90oC. 

2. The disc D is removed before pouring the hot water in the jacket. 

3. The hot water is poured in the water jacket. 

4. The hemispherical enclosure B & A will come to some uniform temperature in short time 

after filling the hot water in the jacket. 

5. The enclosure will soon come to thermal equilibrium conditions. 

6. The disc D is now inserted in A at a time when its temperature is TD. 

7. The radiation energy falling on the disc D from the enclosure is given by:  

E   = σ x AD x (T4)  ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­   (2)  

Where, 

AD   = area of disc D. 

T    = temperature of enclosure. 

 

8. The emmisivity of  the D  is assume to be unity  the radiant energy disc   D  is emitting  into 

enclosure will be:  

E1     = σ x AD x (TD4)  ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­  (3)  

Where, 

TD   = Temperature of disc D. 

Prepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 133: industrial chemical technology

 

9. Net heat input to disc D per unit time is given by equation (2) – (3), 

 

E – E1  = σ x AD x (T4 – TD4) ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­  (4)  

10. If the disc D has a mass m & Specific Heat S then a short time after Disc D is inserted in A,  

  m x s (dT / dt) t = 0    = σ x AD x (T4 – TD4) ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­  (5) 

 

σ     = (m x s (dT / dt) t = 0) / AD x (T4 – TD4)  ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­  (6)  

In  this  equation  (dT / dt) t = 0 denotes  the  rate of  rise of  temperature of  the disc D.  It  is  clear 

measure at time t=0 before heat conducted from A to D begins to have any significant effects. 

This is obtaining from plot of temperature rise of disc D with respect to time and obtaining it 

slop at t=0 when temperature is TD.  The temperature sensor mounted on disc is to be use for 

this  purpose.  Note  that  the  disc  D  with  its  sleeve  is  placed  quickly  in  a  position  &  start 

recording the Temperature at fixed time interval. The whole process must be completed in 30 

seconds of time. 

 

OBSERVATION: 

1. Mass of disc D, (m)      = __________ Kg. 

2. Specific Heat of disc materials (S)  = __________ Kcal/Kg x oC 

3. Diameter of disc D       = __________ mm = __________ m. 

4. Area of disc D, AD       = (Π / 4) x D2 

       

                  = 

 

          = __________ m2 

 

5. Temperature of enclosure, (T)   = __________ oC    = ____________ K 

 

6. Temperature of disc D at instant when it is inserted: 

  

TD   = __________ oC    = ____________ K 

 

 

 

Prepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 134: industrial chemical technology

7. Temperature of disc D at time interval of 5 sec. 

  Time (t)

(sec) 

Temperature of disc, (TD)

(oC) 5

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

 

8. Obtain slop from graph of temperature (TD) versus time (t) 

 

dT/dt    = __________ oC/sec 

 

dT/dt    = __________ oC/hr 

 

9. T4       = ( __________ )4  = __________ K4 

 

10. TD4     = ( __________ )4  = __________ K4 

  

11. T4 – TD4  = ( __________ )4 – ( __________ )4 

  

 

12. Value of Stephen Boltzman Constant (σ) can be obtain by using  

 

σ     = (m x s (dT / dt) t = 0) / AD x (T4 – TD4) 

 

    = 

 

    = 

Prepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 135: industrial chemical technology

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

RESULT: 

 

The value of Stefan Boltzman constant σ is ________________ Kcal/m2K4. 

 

CONCLUSION: ____________________________________________________________________________ 

_____________________________________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________________________________ 

 

 

 

                                                   

     

   

 

 

 

 

 

Prepared By: Prof.Latesh Chaudhari, Asst. Prof.,F.E.T.R., Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 136: industrial chemical technology

INDUSTRIAL CHEMICAL TECHNOLOGY MODULE – I 

PROCESS HEAT TRANSFER Date: 05/12/2010                           By: H. S. Desai  

DOUBLE PIPE HEAT EXCHANGER  AIM:  To determine log mean temperature difference (LMTD) for Horizontal double pipe 

heat exchanger, vertical double pipe heat exchanger using co‐current and counter current 

flow. 

APPARATUS: Horizontal double pipe heat exchanger, Vertical double pipe heat exchanger, 

Bare & lagged pipe apparatus, stop watch, measuring cylinder, etc. 

 

PROCEDURE:  

1) Allow the cold water to flow through pipe of exchanger and maintain the steady flow of 

water. 

2) Allow the steam to flow through Heat Exchanger at constant pressure. 

3) Note  down  the  inlet  &  outlet  temperature  &  flow  rate  of  water  at  the  steady  state 

condition. 

4) Also note down the flow rate & temperature of condensate at steady state condition. 

5) Perform the experiment in co‐current and counter current flow. 

 

OBSERVATION: 

1. Inner diameter of annulus (Di)     = __________ inch  = __________ meter 

2. Outer diameter of annulus (Do)     = __________ inch  = __________ meter 

3. Length of pipe         = __________ inch  = __________ meter 

Prepared By: Prof.Himanshu Desai, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 137: industrial chemical technology

OBSERVATION TABLE: 

Sr. No. 

Type of Flow 

STEAM  COLD WATER 

Pressure (Kg/cm2) 

Inlet Temp. (oC) 

Outlet Temp. (oC) 

Flow Rate (Kg/S) 

Inlet Temp. (oC) 

Outlet Temp. (oC) 

Flow Rate (Kg/S) 

FOR HORIZONTAL DOUBLE PIPE HEAT EXCHANGER: 1  Co current Flow               

2  Counter Current               

FOR VERTICA DOUBLE PIPE HEAT EXCHANGER: 

1  Co current Flow               

2  Counter Current               

 

CALCULATION: 

LOGERATHMIC MEAN TEMPERATURE DIFFERENCE: 

FOR HORIZONTAL DOUBLE PIPE HEAT EXCHANGER: 

• FOR CO­CURRENT FLOW: 

LMTD  = (∆T2 ­ ∆T1) / ln (∆T2/∆T1) 

 

 

 

•  FOR COUNTER CURRENT FLOW: 

LMTD  = (∆T2 ­ ∆T1) / ln (∆T2/∆T1) 

 

 

 

Prepared By: Prof.Himanshu Desai, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 138: industrial chemical technology

FOR VERTICAL DOUBLE PIPE HEAT EXCHANGER: 

• FOR CO­CURRENT FLOW: 

LMTD  = (∆T2 ­ ∆T1) / ln (∆T2/∆T1) 

 

 

 

•  FOR COUNTER CURRENT FLOW: 

LMTD  = (∆T2 ­ ∆T1) / ln (∆T2/∆T1) 

 

 

 

RESULT: 

 

Type of Heat Exchanger  Type of Flow  LMTD 

Horizontal Double Pipe H.E. Co‐current Flow   

Counter Current Flow   

Vertical Double Pipe H.E. Co‐current Flow   

Counter Current Flow   

 

CONCLUSION: _______________________________________________________________________________________ 

_________________________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

 

 

Prepared By: Prof.Himanshu Desai, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 139: industrial chemical technology

INDUSTRIAL CHEMICAL TECHNOLOGY MODULE – I 

PROCESS HEAT TRANSFER Date: 05/12/2010                           By: H. S. Desai  

BARE & LAGGED PIPE 

AIM:  To determine heat losses through the bare and lagged pipe  APPARATUS: Measuring cylinder, stop watch, Bare & lagged pipe, thermometer, etc.  PROCEDURE: 1. Allow the steam to flow through bare pipe at constant pressure & measure the outlet 

temperature of condensate & flow rate of condensate by using the measuring cylinder & stop watch. 

2. Allow the steam to flow through lagged pipe by operating the valve & after sometimes measure the temp. & flow rate of condensate. 

3. Measure the outside diameter of pipe by vernier caliper. 4. Calculate heat losses by radiation through bare & lagged pipe & compare the result. 

 OBSERVATION: 1. Outer diameter of bare pipe         = __________ cm 2. Thickness of bare pipe           = __________ cm 3. Inner diameter of bare pipe        = __________ cm 4. Inlet Temperature of steam in bare & lagged pipe  = __________ oC 5. Specific Heat at steam at pressure _________ Kg/cm2   = __________ J/kg. k  OBSERVATION TABLE:  

BARE PIPE  LAGGED PIPE 

Pressure (Kg / cm2) 

Inlet Temp. (oC) 

Outlet Temp. (oC) 

Flow Rate (LPM) 

Pressure (Kg / cm2) 

Inlet Temp. (oC) 

Outlet Temp. (oC) 

Flow Rate (LPM) 

               

               

               

  

Prepared By: Prof.Himanshu Desai, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 140: industrial chemical technology

CALCULATION: [A] FOR BARE PIPE:  

Heat loss from bare pipe :  

QB  = mB x Cp x ∆T  

Where, mB  = Mass flow rate of condensate for bare pipe Cp  = Specific heat of steam for bare pipe  QB  =    = 

 [B] FOR LAGGED PIPE:  

Heat loss from lagged pipe:  

QL   = mL x CP x ∆T  Where, mL     = Mass flow rate of condensate for lagged pipe Cp  = Specific heat of steam for lagged pipe  QL  =    = 

 RESULT:  

• Heat loss through Bare pipe   = ____________________ J/sec. • Heat loss through Lagged pipe  = ____________________ J/sec. 

 CONCLUSION: _______________________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

Prepared By: Prof.Himanshu Desai, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 141: industrial chemical technology

Long Term Training Programme on “Industrial Chemical Technology’ Chemical Engineering Department 

N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Isroli  Experiment: Mechanically Agitated Jacketed Vessel with Coil Staff: Mr. T.C. Padhiyar, I/c Head, CHED   Objective:   To study the effect of agitation, inlet temp., Flow rate of heating medium, flow rate of cooling medium on the heat transfer characteristics when using either jacket or coil.    Theory:   Mechanically  agitated  vessels,  equipped  with  cooling  coils  or  heating  jackets  are  in  common  use throughout the chemical process  industry. Heat transfer rates agitated vessel  is vertical cylinder vessel incorporation suitable type of agitator that brings even distribution of the liquid in the vessel. Agitated vessels  are  commonly  employed  in  chemical  industries  for  different  proposes  such  as  mixing, dissolution,  dilution,  neutralization,  adsorption,  crystallization.  To  done  by  providing  a  heat  transfer surface, which may be  in the form of a  jacket fitted outside the vessel or a coil fitted  inside the vessel depending upon the situation.  Procedure:  1. Fill the agitated vessel with predetermined amount of liquid.  2. Note down the inlet temperature of liquid. 3. Start the supply of hot water either in a coil or jacketed by switching on the pump& by setting a 

derived flow rate using the given valve. 4. Note down the change in temp. 5. Change the inlet temperature of liquid with flow rate and note down the similar   sets of result. 6. Perform the scheme experiment with agitation and note down the reading.  

Prepared By: Prof.Tarak Padhiyar, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 142: industrial chemical technology

Observation:   1) For vessel: 1. Volume of liquid in vessel: 5lit. 2. Material of construction: SS‐316 3. Inside dia. of vessel: 213 mm 4. Height of vessel: 250 mm 5. Thickness of wall: 1.5 mm  2) For Jacket: 1. Material of construction: SS‐316. 2. Inner dia. of jacket: 260mm 3. Outer dia. of jacket: 310mm  3) For Coil: 1. Material of construction: copper 2. Coil length: 915 mm 3. Inner diameter of coil: 7 mm 4. Outer diameter of coil: 9 mm 5. Outer diameter of Spiral: 130 mm  Observation Table:  (A) Without agitation:  (1) Using Jacket:     

Sr. No. 

Inlet temp. of liquid in vessel, Tc1 

Outlet temp. of liquid in vessel, Tc2

Inlet temp. of liquid in jacket, 

Th1 

Outlet temp. of liquid in jacket, Th2 

Flow rate 

1           2           

 (2) Using Coil:     

Sr. No. 

Inlet temp. of liquid in vessel, Tc1 

Outlet temp. of liquid in vessel, Tc2

Inlet temp. of liquid in jacket, 

Th1 

Outlet temp. of liquid in jacket, Th2 

Flow rate 

1           2           

    

Prepared By: Prof.Tarak Padhiyar, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 143: industrial chemical technology

(B) With agitation:  (1) Using Jacket:     

Sr. No. 

Inlet temp. of liquid in vessel, Tc1 

Outlet temp. of liquid in vessel, Tc2

Inlet temp. of liquid in jacket, 

Th1 

Outlet temp. of liquid in jacket, Th2 

Flow rate 

RPM

1             2             

 (2) Using Coil:     

Sr. No. 

Inlet temp. of liquid in vessel, Tc1 

Outlet temp. of liquid in vessel, Tc2

Inlet temp. of liquid in jacket, 

Th1 

Outlet temp. of liquid in jacket, Th2 

Flow rate 

RPM

1             2             

  Calculation:  (A) Without agitation:  1)  Using Jacket:                      ∆T1 = Th1 – Tc1     ∆T2 = Th2 – Tc2                                               =                =                  = ___________                       =___________                    LMTD   ∆Tlm  =   (∆T2 – ∆T1)                  ln   ∆T2                                                            ∆T1              

Prepared By: Prof.Tarak Padhiyar, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 144: industrial chemical technology

2)  Using Coil:                      ∆T1 = Th1 – Tc1     ∆T2 = Th2 – Tc2                                               =                =                  = ___________                       =___________                    LMTD   ∆Tlm  =   (∆T2 – ∆T1)                  ln     ∆T2                                                                        ∆T1  (A) With agitation:  1)  Using Jacket:                      ∆T1 = Th1 – Tc1     ∆T2 = Th2 – Tc2                                               =                =                  = ___________                       =___________                    LMTD   ∆Tlm  =   (∆T2 – ∆T1)                  ln   ∆T2                                                                              ∆T1        2)  Using Coil:             ∆T1 = Th1 – Tc1     ∆T2 = Th2 – Tc2                                               =                =                  = ___________                       =___________ 

Prepared By: Prof.Tarak Padhiyar, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 145: industrial chemical technology

                   LMTD   ∆Tlm  =   (∆T2 – ∆T1)                  ln     ∆T2                                                                                ∆T1   Result:  

• LMTD using Jacket without agitation   = ______________ • LMTD using Coil without agitation   = ______________ • LMTD using Jacket with agitation   = ______________ • LMTD using Coil with agitation     = ______________ 

  Conclusion:  ______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

Prepared By: Prof.Tarak Padhiyar, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 146: industrial chemical technology

Compiled by:  JJPandya 

Module 1

Chapter 1 : Introduction to fluid and Fundamental Concepts

The chapter contains

Lecture 1

Definition of Stress Definition of Fluid Concept of Continum Fluid Properties

Lecture 2

Distinction between Newtonian and Non-Newtonian Fluid Compressibility Surface Tension of Liquids

Definition of Stress

Consider a small area δA on the surface of a body (Fig. 1.1). The force acting on this area is δF This force can be resolved into two perpendicular components

The component of force acting normal to the area called normal force and is denoted by δFn The component of force acting along the plane of area is called tangential force and is denoted

by δFt

Fig 1.1 Normal and Tangential Forces on a surface

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 147: industrial chemical technology

When they are expressed as force per unit area they are called as normal stress and tangential stress respectively. The tangential stress is also called shear stress

The normal stress

(1.1)

And shear stress

(1.2)

 

Definition of Fluid

A fluid is a substance that deforms continuously in the face of tangential or shear stress, irrespective of the magnitude of shear stress .This continuous deformation under the application of shear stress constitutes a flow.

In this connection fluid can also be defined as the state of matter that cannot sustain any shear stress.

Example : Consider Fig 1.2

Fig 1.2 Shear stress on a fluid body

If a shear stress τ is applied at any location in a fluid, the element 011' which is initially at rest, will move to 022', then to 033'. Further, it moves to 044' and continues to move in a similar fashion.

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 148: industrial chemical technology

In other words, the tangential stress in a fluid body depends on velocity of deformation and vanishes as this velocity approaches zero. A good example is Newton's parallel plate experiment where dependence of shear force on the velocity of deformation was established.

Distinction Between Solid and Fluid

Solid Fluid

More Compact Structure

Attractive Forces between the moleculesare larger therefore more closely packed

Solids can resist tangential stresses instatic condition

Whenever a solid is subjected to shearstress

a. It undergoes a definitedeformation α or breaks

b. α is proportional to shear stressupto some limiting condition

Solid may regain partly or fully itsoriginal shape when the tangentialstress is removed

Less Compact Structure

Attractive Forces between the molecules are smaller therefore more loosely packed

Fluids cannot resist tangential stresses in static condition.

Whenever a fluid is subjected to shear stress

a. No fixed deformation b. Continious deformation takes

place until the shear stress is applied

A fluid can never regain its original shape, once it has been distorded by the shear stress

Fig 1.3 Deformation of a Solid Body  

Concept of Continuum

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 149: industrial chemical technology

The concept of continuum is a kind of idealization of the continuous description of matter where the properties of the matter are considered as continuous functions of space variables. Although any matter is composed of several molecules, the concept of continuum assumes a continuous distribution of mass within the matter or system with no empty space, instead of the actual conglomeration of separate molecules.

Describing a fluid flow quantitatively makes it necessary to assume that flow variables (pressure , velocity etc.) and fluid properties vary continuously from one point to another. Mathematical description of flow on this basis have proved to be reliable and treatment of fluid medium as a continuum has firmly become established. For example density at a point is normally defined as

In continuum approach, fluid properties such as density, viscosity, thermal conductivity, temperature, etc. can be expressed as continuous functions of space and time.

Fluid Properties :

Characteristics of a continuous fluid which are independent of the motion of the fluid are called basic properties of the fluid. Some of the basic properties are as discussed below.

Property Symbol Definition Unit

Density ρ

The density p of a fluid is its mass per unit volume . If a fluid element enclosing apoint P has a volume Δ and mass Δm (Fig. 1.4), then density (ρ)at point P is written as

However, in a medium where continuum model is valid one can write -

(1.3)

kg/m3

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 150: industrial chemical technology

Fig 1.4 A fluid element enclosing point P

Specific Weight γ

The specific weight is the weight of fluid per unit volume. The specific weight is given

by γ= ρg (1.4)

Where g is the gravitational acceleration. Just as weight must be clearly distinguished from mass, so must the specific weight be distinguished from density.

N/m3

Specific Volume v

The specific volume of a fluid is the volume occupied by unit mass of fluid.

Thus

(1.5)

m3 /kg

Specific Gravity s

For liquids, it is the ratio of density of a liquid at actual conditions to the density ofpure water at 101 kN/m2 , and at 4°C.

The specific gravity of a gas is the ratio of its density to that of either hydrogen orair at some specified temperature or pressure.

However, there is no general standard; so the conditions must be statedwhile referring to the specific gravity of a gas.

-

Viscosity ( μ ) :

Viscosity is a fluid property whose effect is understood when the fluid is in motion. In a flow of fluid, when the fluid elements move with different velocities, each element will feel

some resistance due to fluid friction within the elements. Therefore, shear stresses can be identified between the fluid elements with different velocities.

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 151: industrial chemical technology

The relationship between the shear stress and the velocity field was given by Sir Isaac Newton.

Consider a flow (Fig. 1.5) in which all fluid particles are moving in the same direction in such a way that the fluid layers move parallel with different velocities.

Fig 1.5 Parallel flow of a fluid Fig 1.6 Two adjacent layers of a moving fluid.

The upper layer, which is moving faster, tries to draw the lower slowly moving layer along with it by means of a force F along the direction of flow on this layer. Similarly, the lower layer tries to retard the upper one, according to Newton's third law, with an equal and opposite force F on it (Figure 1.6).

Such a fluid flow where x-direction velocities, for example, change with y-coordinate is called shear flow of the fluid.

Thus, the dragging effect of one layer on the other is experienced by a tangential force F on the respective layers. If F acts over an area of contact A, then the shear stress τ is defined as

τ = F/A

Viscosity ( μ ) :

Newton postulated that τ is proportional to the quantity Δu/ Δy where Δy is the distance of separation of the two layers and Δu is the difference in their velocities.

In the limiting case of , Δu / Δy equals du/dy, the velocity gradient at a point in a direction perpendicular to the direction of the motion of the layer.

According to Newton τ and du/dy bears the relation

 

(1.7)

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 152: industrial chemical technology

where, the constant of proportionality μ is known as the coefficient of viscosity or simply viscosity which is a property of the fluid and depends on its state. Sign of τ depends upon the sign of du/dy. For the profile shown in Fig. 1.5, du/dy is positive everywhere and hence, τ is positive. Both the velocity and stress are considered positive in the positive direction of the coordinate parallel to them. Equation

 

  

defining the viscosity of a fluid, is known as Newton's law of viscosity. Common fluids, viz. water, air, mercury obey Newton's law of viscosity and are known as Newtonian fluids.

Other classes of fluids, viz. paints, different polymer solution, blood do not obey the typical linear relationship, of τ and du/dy and are known as non-Newtonian fluids. In non-newtonian fluids viscosity itself may be a function of deformation rate as you will study in the next lecture.

Causes of Viscosity

The causes of viscosity in a fluid are possibly attributed to two factors:

(i) intermolecular force of cohesion (ii) molecular momentum exchange

Due to strong cohesive forces between the molecules, any layer in a moving fluid tries to drag the adjacent layer to move with an equal speed and thus produces the effect of viscosity as discussed earlier. Since cohesion decreases with temperature, the liquid viscosity does likewise.

Fig 1.7 Movement of fluid molecules between two adjacent

moving layers

Molecules from layer aa in course of continous thermal agitation migrate into layer bb

Momentum from the migrant molecules from layer aa is stored by molecules of layer bb by way of collision

Thus layer bb as a whole is speeded up

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 153: industrial chemical technology

Molecules from the lower layer bb arrive at aa and tend to retard the layer aa

Every such migration of molecules causes forces of acceleration or deceleration to drag the layers so as to oppose the differences in velocity between the layers and produce the effect of viscosity.

As the random molecular motion increases with a rise in temperature, the viscosity also increases accordingly. Except for very special cases (e.g., at very high pressure) the viscosity of both liquids and gases ceases to be a function of pressure.

For Newtonian fluids, the coefficient of viscosity depends strongly on temperature but varies very little with pressure.

For liquids, molecular motion is less significant than the forces of cohesion, thus viscosity of liquids decrease with increase in temperature.

For gases,molecular motion is more significant than the cohesive forces, thus viscosity of gases increase with increase in temperature.

Fig 1.8: Change of Viscosity of Water and Air under 1 atm

No-slip Condition of Viscous Fluids

It has been established through experimental observations that the relative velocity between the solid surface and the adjacent fluid particles is zero whenever a viscous fluid flows over a solid surface. This is known as no-slip condition.

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 154: industrial chemical technology

This behavior of no-slip at the solid surface is not same as the wetting of surfaces by the fluids. For example, mercury flowing in a stationary glass tube will not wet the surface, but will have zero velocity at the wall of the tube.

The wetting property results from surface tension, whereas the no-slip condition is a consequence of fluid viscosity.

Ideal Fluid

Consider a hypothetical fluid having a zero viscosity ( μ = 0). Such a fluid is called an ideal fluid and the resulting motion is called as ideal or inviscid flow.  In an ideal flow, there is no existence of shear force because of vanishing viscosity.

All the fluids in reality have viscosity (μ > 0) and hence they are termed as real fluid and their motion is known as viscous flow.

Under certain situations of very high velocity flow of viscous fluids, an accurate analysis of flow field away from a solid surface can be made from the ideal flow theory.

Non-Newtonian Fluids

There are certain fluids where the linear relationship between the shear stress and the

deformation rate (velocity gradient in parallel flow) as expressed by the is not valid. For these fluids the viscosity varies with rate of deformation.

Due to the deviation from Newton's law of viscosity they are commonly termed as non-Newtonian fluids. Figure 2.1 shows the class of fluid for which this relationship is nonlinear.  

Figure 2.1 Shear stress and deformation rate relationship of different fluids  

The abscissa in Fig. 2.1 represents the behaviour of ideal fluids since for the ideal fluids the resistance to shearing deformation rate is always zero, and hence they exhibit zero shear stress under any condition of flow.

The ordinate represents the ideal solid for there is no deformation rate under any loading condition.

The Newtonian fluids behave according to the law that shear stress is linearly proportional to

velocity gradient or rate of shear strain . Thus for these fluids, the plot of shear stress against velocity gradient is a straight line through the origin. The slope of the line determines the viscosity.

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 155: industrial chemical technology

The non-Newtonian fluids are further classified as pseudo-plastic, dilatant and Bingham plastic.  

Classification of non-Newtonian fluids

Many mathematical models are available to describe the nonlinear "shear-stress vs deformation-rate" relationship of non Newtonian fluids. But no general model can describe the constitutive equation ("shear stress vs rate of deformation" relationship) of all kinds of non-Newtonian fluids. However, the mathematical model for describing the mechanistic behaviour of a variety of commonly used non-Newtonian fluids is the Power-Law model which is also known as Ostwald-de Waele model (the name is after the scientist who proposed it). According to Ostwald-de Waele model

(2.1)

where m is known as the flow consistency index and n is the flow behavior index.

When n = 1, m equals , the model identically satisfies Newtonian model as a special case. When n < 1, the model is valid for pseudoplastic fluids, such as gelatine, blood, milk etc. When n > 1, the model is valid for dilatant fluids, such as sugar in water, aqueous suspension of rice starch etc.

There are some substances which require a yield stress for the deformation rate (i.e. the flow) to be established, and hence their constitutive equations do not pass through the origin thus violating the basic definition of a fluid. They are termed as Bingham plastic. For an ideal Bingham plastic, the shear stress- deformation rate relationship is linear.

Compressibility

Compressibility of any substance is the measure of its change in volume under the action of external forces.

The normal compressive stress on any fluid element at rest is known as hydrostatic pressure p and arises as a result of innumerable molecular collisions in the entire fluid.

The degree of compressibility of a substance is characterized by the bulk modulus of elasticity E defined as

 

(2.3)

Where Δ and Δp are the changes in the volume and pressure respectively, and is the initial volume. The negative sign (-sign) is included to make E positive, since increase in pressure would decrease the volume i.e for Δp>0 , Δ <0) in volume.

For a given mass of a substance, the change in its volume and density satisfies the relation

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 156: industrial chemical technology

Δm = 0, Δ( ρ ) = 0

 

(2.4)

 

using    

we get

 

(2.5)

Values of E for liquids are very high as compared with those of gases (except at very high pressures). Therefore, liquids are usually termed as incompressible fluids though, in fact, no substance is theoretically incompressible with a value of E as . 

For example, the bulk modulus of elasticity for water and air at atmospheric pressure are approximately 2 x 106 kN/m 2 and 101 kN/m 2 respectively. It indicates that air is about 20,000 times more compressible than water. Hence water can be treated as incompressible.   

For gases another characteristic parameter, known as compressibility K, is usually defined , it is the reciprocal of E 

 

(2.6)

K is often expressed in terms of specific volume . For any gaseous substance, a change in pressure is generally associated with a change in

volume and a change in temperature simultaneously. A functional relationship between the pressure, volume and temperature at any equilibrium state is known as thermodynamic equation of state for the gas.   For an ideal gas, the thermodynamic equation of state is given by 

p = ρRT (2.7)

where T is the temperature in absolute thermodynamic or gas temperature scale (which are, in fact, identical), and R is known as the characteristic gas constant, the value of which depends

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 157: industrial chemical technology

upon a particular gas. However, this equation is also valid for the real gases which are thermodynamically far from their liquid phase. For air, the value of R is 287 J/kg K.  

K and E generally depend on the nature of process  

 

Distinction between an Incompressible and a Compressible Flow

In order to know, if it is necessary to take into account the compressibility of gases in fluid flow problems, we need to consider whether the change in pressure brought about by the fluid motion causes large change in volume or density. Using Bernoulli's equation p + (1/2)ρV2= constant (V being the velocity of flow), change in pressure, Δp, in a flow field, is of the order of (1/2)ρV2 (dynamic head). Invoking this relationship into

we get ,

(2.12)

So if Δρ/ρ is very small, the flow of gases can be treated as incompressible with a good degree of approximation.

For compressible fluid, if the flow velocity is small as compared to the local acoustic velocity, compressibility of gases can be neglected. Considering a maximum relative change in density of 5 per cent as the criterion of an incompressible flow, the upper limit of Mach number becomes approximately 0.33. In the case of air at standard pressure and temperature, the acoustic velocity is about 335.28 m/s. Hence a Mach number of 0.33 corresponds to a velocity of about 110 m/s. Therefore flow of air up to a velocity of 110 m/s under standard condition can be considered as incompressible flow.

Surface Tension of Liquids

The phenomenon of surface tension arises due to the two kinds of intermolecular forces (i) Cohesion : The force of attraction between the molecules of a liquid by virtue of which they are bound to each other to remain as one assemblage of particles is known as the force of cohesion. This property enables the liquid to resist tensile stress.

(ii) Adhesion : The force of attraction between unlike molecules, i.e. between the molecules of different liquids or between the molecules of a liquid and those of a solid body when they are in contact with each other, is known as the force of adhesion. This force enables two different liquids to adhere to each other or a liquid to adhere to a solid body or surface.

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 158: industrial chemical technology

Work is done on each molecule arriving at surface against the action of an inward force. Thus mechanical work is performed in creating a free surface or in increasing the area of the surface. Therefore, a surface requires mechanical energy for its formation and the existence of a free surface implies the presence of stored mechanical energy known as free surface energy. Any system tries to attain the condition of stable equilibrium with its potential energy as minimum. Thus a quantity of liquid will adjust its shape until its surface area and consequently its free surface energy is a minimum.

The magnitude of surface tension is defined as the tensile force acting across imaginary short and straight elemental line divided by the length of the line.

The dimensional formula is F/L or MT-2 . It is usually expressed in N/m in SI units.

Surface tension is a binary property of the liquid and gas or two liquids which are in contact with each other and defines the interface. It decreases slightly with increasing temperature. The surface tension of water in contact with air at 20°C is about 0.073 N/m.

It is due to surface tension that a curved liquid interface in equilibrium results in a greater pressure at the concave side of the surface than that at its convex side.

 

Capillarity

The interplay of the forces of cohesion and adhesion explains the phenomenon of capillarity. When a liquid is in contact with a solid, if the forces of adhesion between the molecules of the liquid and the solid are greater than the forces of cohesion among the liquid molecules themselves, the liquid molecules crowd towards the solid surface. The area of contact between the liquid and solid increases and the liquid thus wets the solid surface.

The reverse phenomenon takes place when the force of cohesion is greater than the force of adhesion. These adhesion and cohesion properties result in the phenomenon of capillarity by which a liquid either rises or falls in a tube dipped into the liquid depending upon whether the force of adhesion is more than that of cohesion or not (Fig.2.4).

The angle θ as shown in Fig. 2.4, is the area wetting contact angle made by the interface with the solid surface.

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 159: industrial chemical technology

Fig 2.4 Phenomenon of Capillarity

For pure water in contact with air in a clean glass tube, the capillary rise takes place with θ = 0 . Mercury causes capillary depression with an angle of contact of about 1300 in a clean glass in

contact with air. Since h varies inversely with D as found from Eq. ( ), an appreciable capillary rise or depression is observed in tubes of small diameter only.

Vapour pressure

All liquids have a tendency to evaporate when exposed to a gaseous atmosphere. The rate of

evaporation depends upon the molecular energy of the liquid which in turn depends upon the type of liquid and its temperature. The vapour molecules exert a partial pressure in the space above the liquid, known as vapour pressure. If the space above the liquid is confined (Fig. 2.5) and the liquid is maintained at constant temperature, after sufficient time, the confined space above the liquid will contain vapour molecules to the extent that some of them will be forced to enter the liquid. Eventually an equilibrium condition will evolve when the rate at which the number of vapour molecules striking back the liquid surface and condensing is just equal to the rate at which they leave from the surface. The space above the liquid then becomes saturated with vapour. The vapour pressure of a given liquid is a function of temperature only and is equal to the saturation pressure for boiling corresponding to that temperature. Hence, the vapour pressure increases with the increase in temperature. Therefore the phenomenon of boiling of a liquid is closely related to the vapour pressure. In fact, when the vapour pressure of a liquid becomes equal to the total pressure impressed on its surface, the liquid starts boiling. This concludes that boiling can be achieved either by raising the temperature of the liquid, so that its vapour pressure is elevated to the ambient pressure, or by lowering the pressure of the ambience (surrounding gas) to the liquid's vapour pressure at the existing temperature.

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 160: industrial chemical technology

Figure 2.5 To and fro movement of liquid molecules from an interface in a

confined space as a closed surrounding Exercise Problems - Chapter 1 1. A thin film of liquid flows down an inclined channel. The velocity distribution in the flow is given

by

where, h = depth of flow, α = angle of inclination of the channel to the horizontal, u = velocity at a

depth h below the free surface, ρ = density of liquid, μ = dynamic viscosity of the fluid. Calculate the shear stress: (a) at the bottom of the channel (b) at mid-depth and (c) at the free surface. The coordinate y is measured from the free surface along its normal

[(a) α, (b) α , (c) 0]

2. Two discs of 250 mm diameter are placed 1.5 mm apart and the gap is filled with an oil. A power of 500 W is required to rotate the upper disc at 500 rpm while keeping the lower one stationary. Determine the viscosity of the oil.

[ 0. 71 kg/ms] [ 5.95]

Recap In this chapter you have learnt the following

A fluid is a substance that deforms continuously when subjected to even an infinitesimalshear stress. Solids can resist tangential stress at static conditions undergoing a definitedeformation while a fluid can do it only at dynamic conditions undergoing a continuousdeformation as long as the shear stress is applied.

The concept of continuum assumes a continuous distribution of mass within the matter

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 161: industrial chemical technology

or system with no empty space. In the continuum approach, properties of a system canbe expressed as continuous functions of space and time. A dimensionless parameter

known as Knudsen number where λ is the mean free path and L is the characteristic length, aptly describes the degree of departure from continuum. Theconcept of continuum usually holds good when Kn< 0.01.

Viscosity is a property of a fluid by virtue of which it offers resistance to flow. The shear

stress at a point in a moving fluid is directly proportional to the rate of shear strain. For a

one dimensional flow, . The constant of proportionality μ is known as coefficient of viscosity or simply the viscosity. The relationship is known as the Newton's law of viscosity and the fluids which obey this law are known as Newtonian fluids.

The relationship between the shear stress and the rate of shear strain is known as the

constitutive equation. The fluids whose constitutive equations are not linear through origin (do not obey the Newton's law of viscosity) are known as non-Newtonian fluids. For a Newtonian fluid, viscosity is a function of temperature only. With an increase in temperature, the viscosity of a liquid decreases, while that of a gas increases. For non-Newtonian fluid, the viscosity depends not only on temperature but also on the

deformation rate of the fluid. Kinematic viscosity v is defined as .

Compressibility of a substance is the measure of its change in volume or density underthe action of external forces. It is usually characterized by the bulk modulus of elasticity

A flow is said to be incompressible when the change in its density due to the change in

pressure brought about by the fluid motion is negligibly small. When the flow velocity isequal to or less than 0.33 times of the local acoustic speed, the relative change indensity of the fluid, due to flow, becomes equal to or less than 5 per cent respectively, and hence the flow is considered to be incompressible

The force of attraction between the molecules of a fluid is known as cohesion, while that

between the molecules of a fluid and of a solid is known as adhesion. The interplay of these two intermolecular forces explains the phenomena of surface tension and capillaryrise or depression. A free surface of the liquid is always under stretched conditionimplying the existence of a tensile force on the surface. The magnitude of this force per unit length of an imaginary line drawn along the liquid surface is known as the surfacetension coefficient or simply the surface tension.

 

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 162: industrial chemical technology

Compiled by:  JJPandya 

Module 1

Chapter 1 : Introduction to fluid and Fundamental Concepts

The chapter contains

Lecture 1

Definition of Stress Definition of Fluid Concept of Continum Fluid Properties

Lecture 2

Distinction between Newtonian and Non-Newtonian Fluid Compressibility Surface Tension of Liquids

Definition of Stress

Consider a small area δA on the surface of a body (Fig. 1.1). The force acting on this area is δF This force can be resolved into two perpendicular components

The component of force acting normal to the area called normal force and is denoted by δFn The component of force acting along the plane of area is called tangential force and is denoted

by δFt

Fig 1.1 Normal and Tangential Forces on a surface

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 163: industrial chemical technology

When they are expressed as force per unit area they are called as normal stress and tangential stress respectively. The tangential stress is also called shear stress

The normal stress

(1.1)

And shear stress

(1.2)

 

Definition of Fluid

A fluid is a substance that deforms continuously in the face of tangential or shear stress, irrespective of the magnitude of shear stress .This continuous deformation under the application of shear stress constitutes a flow.

In this connection fluid can also be defined as the state of matter that cannot sustain any shear stress.

Example : Consider Fig 1.2

Fig 1.2 Shear stress on a fluid body

If a shear stress τ is applied at any location in a fluid, the element 011' which is initially at rest, will move to 022', then to 033'. Further, it moves to 044' and continues to move in a similar fashion.

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 164: industrial chemical technology

In other words, the tangential stress in a fluid body depends on velocity of deformation and vanishes as this velocity approaches zero. A good example is Newton's parallel plate experiment where dependence of shear force on the velocity of deformation was established.

Distinction Between Solid and Fluid

Solid Fluid

More Compact Structure

Attractive Forces between the moleculesare larger therefore more closely packed

Solids can resist tangential stresses instatic condition

Whenever a solid is subjected to shearstress

a. It undergoes a definitedeformation α or breaks

b. α is proportional to shear stressupto some limiting condition

Solid may regain partly or fully itsoriginal shape when the tangentialstress is removed

Less Compact Structure

Attractive Forces between the molecules are smaller therefore more loosely packed

Fluids cannot resist tangential stresses in static condition.

Whenever a fluid is subjected to shear stress

a. No fixed deformation b. Continious deformation takes

place until the shear stress is applied

A fluid can never regain its original shape, once it has been distorded by the shear stress

Fig 1.3 Deformation of a Solid Body  

Concept of Continuum

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 165: industrial chemical technology

The concept of continuum is a kind of idealization of the continuous description of matter where the properties of the matter are considered as continuous functions of space variables. Although any matter is composed of several molecules, the concept of continuum assumes a continuous distribution of mass within the matter or system with no empty space, instead of the actual conglomeration of separate molecules.

Describing a fluid flow quantitatively makes it necessary to assume that flow variables (pressure , velocity etc.) and fluid properties vary continuously from one point to another. Mathematical description of flow on this basis have proved to be reliable and treatment of fluid medium as a continuum has firmly become established. For example density at a point is normally defined as

In continuum approach, fluid properties such as density, viscosity, thermal conductivity, temperature, etc. can be expressed as continuous functions of space and time.

Fluid Properties :

Characteristics of a continuous fluid which are independent of the motion of the fluid are called basic properties of the fluid. Some of the basic properties are as discussed below.

Property Symbol Definition Unit

Density ρ

The density p of a fluid is its mass per unit volume . If a fluid element enclosing apoint P has a volume Δ and mass Δm (Fig. 1.4), then density (ρ)at point P is written as

However, in a medium where continuum model is valid one can write -

(1.3)

kg/m3

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 166: industrial chemical technology

Fig 1.4 A fluid element enclosing point P

Specific Weight γ

The specific weight is the weight of fluid per unit volume. The specific weight is given

by γ= ρg (1.4)

Where g is the gravitational acceleration. Just as weight must be clearly distinguished from mass, so must the specific weight be distinguished from density.

N/m3

Specific Volume v

The specific volume of a fluid is the volume occupied by unit mass of fluid.

Thus

(1.5)

m3 /kg

Specific Gravity s

For liquids, it is the ratio of density of a liquid at actual conditions to the density ofpure water at 101 kN/m2 , and at 4°C.

The specific gravity of a gas is the ratio of its density to that of either hydrogen orair at some specified temperature or pressure.

However, there is no general standard; so the conditions must be statedwhile referring to the specific gravity of a gas.

-

Viscosity ( μ ) :

Viscosity is a fluid property whose effect is understood when the fluid is in motion. In a flow of fluid, when the fluid elements move with different velocities, each element will feel

some resistance due to fluid friction within the elements. Therefore, shear stresses can be identified between the fluid elements with different velocities.

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 167: industrial chemical technology

The relationship between the shear stress and the velocity field was given by Sir Isaac Newton.

Consider a flow (Fig. 1.5) in which all fluid particles are moving in the same direction in such a way that the fluid layers move parallel with different velocities.

Fig 1.5 Parallel flow of a fluid Fig 1.6 Two adjacent layers of a moving fluid.

The upper layer, which is moving faster, tries to draw the lower slowly moving layer along with it by means of a force F along the direction of flow on this layer. Similarly, the lower layer tries to retard the upper one, according to Newton's third law, with an equal and opposite force F on it (Figure 1.6).

Such a fluid flow where x-direction velocities, for example, change with y-coordinate is called shear flow of the fluid.

Thus, the dragging effect of one layer on the other is experienced by a tangential force F on the respective layers. If F acts over an area of contact A, then the shear stress τ is defined as

τ = F/A

Viscosity ( μ ) :

Newton postulated that τ is proportional to the quantity Δu/ Δy where Δy is the distance of separation of the two layers and Δu is the difference in their velocities.

In the limiting case of , Δu / Δy equals du/dy, the velocity gradient at a point in a direction perpendicular to the direction of the motion of the layer.

According to Newton τ and du/dy bears the relation

 

(1.7)

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 168: industrial chemical technology

where, the constant of proportionality μ is known as the coefficient of viscosity or simply viscosity which is a property of the fluid and depends on its state. Sign of τ depends upon the sign of du/dy. For the profile shown in Fig. 1.5, du/dy is positive everywhere and hence, τ is positive. Both the velocity and stress are considered positive in the positive direction of the coordinate parallel to them. Equation

 

  

defining the viscosity of a fluid, is known as Newton's law of viscosity. Common fluids, viz. water, air, mercury obey Newton's law of viscosity and are known as Newtonian fluids.

Other classes of fluids, viz. paints, different polymer solution, blood do not obey the typical linear relationship, of τ and du/dy and are known as non-Newtonian fluids. In non-newtonian fluids viscosity itself may be a function of deformation rate as you will study in the next lecture.

Causes of Viscosity

The causes of viscosity in a fluid are possibly attributed to two factors:

(i) intermolecular force of cohesion (ii) molecular momentum exchange

Due to strong cohesive forces between the molecules, any layer in a moving fluid tries to drag the adjacent layer to move with an equal speed and thus produces the effect of viscosity as discussed earlier. Since cohesion decreases with temperature, the liquid viscosity does likewise.

Fig 1.7 Movement of fluid molecules between two adjacent

moving layers

Molecules from layer aa in course of continous thermal agitation migrate into layer bb

Momentum from the migrant molecules from layer aa is stored by molecules of layer bb by way of collision

Thus layer bb as a whole is speeded up

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 169: industrial chemical technology

Molecules from the lower layer bb arrive at aa and tend to retard the layer aa

Every such migration of molecules causes forces of acceleration or deceleration to drag the layers so as to oppose the differences in velocity between the layers and produce the effect of viscosity.

As the random molecular motion increases with a rise in temperature, the viscosity also increases accordingly. Except for very special cases (e.g., at very high pressure) the viscosity of both liquids and gases ceases to be a function of pressure.

For Newtonian fluids, the coefficient of viscosity depends strongly on temperature but varies very little with pressure.

For liquids, molecular motion is less significant than the forces of cohesion, thus viscosity of liquids decrease with increase in temperature.

For gases,molecular motion is more significant than the cohesive forces, thus viscosity of gases increase with increase in temperature.

Fig 1.8: Change of Viscosity of Water and Air under 1 atm

No-slip Condition of Viscous Fluids

It has been established through experimental observations that the relative velocity between the solid surface and the adjacent fluid particles is zero whenever a viscous fluid flows over a solid surface. This is known as no-slip condition.

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 170: industrial chemical technology

This behavior of no-slip at the solid surface is not same as the wetting of surfaces by the fluids. For example, mercury flowing in a stationary glass tube will not wet the surface, but will have zero velocity at the wall of the tube.

The wetting property results from surface tension, whereas the no-slip condition is a consequence of fluid viscosity.

Ideal Fluid

Consider a hypothetical fluid having a zero viscosity ( μ = 0). Such a fluid is called an ideal fluid and the resulting motion is called as ideal or inviscid flow.  In an ideal flow, there is no existence of shear force because of vanishing viscosity.

All the fluids in reality have viscosity (μ > 0) and hence they are termed as real fluid and their motion is known as viscous flow.

Under certain situations of very high velocity flow of viscous fluids, an accurate analysis of flow field away from a solid surface can be made from the ideal flow theory.

Non-Newtonian Fluids

There are certain fluids where the linear relationship between the shear stress and the

deformation rate (velocity gradient in parallel flow) as expressed by the is not valid. For these fluids the viscosity varies with rate of deformation.

Due to the deviation from Newton's law of viscosity they are commonly termed as non-Newtonian fluids. Figure 2.1 shows the class of fluid for which this relationship is nonlinear.  

Figure 2.1 Shear stress and deformation rate relationship of different fluids  

The abscissa in Fig. 2.1 represents the behaviour of ideal fluids since for the ideal fluids the resistance to shearing deformation rate is always zero, and hence they exhibit zero shear stress under any condition of flow.

The ordinate represents the ideal solid for there is no deformation rate under any loading condition.

The Newtonian fluids behave according to the law that shear stress is linearly proportional to

velocity gradient or rate of shear strain . Thus for these fluids, the plot of shear stress against velocity gradient is a straight line through the origin. The slope of the line determines the viscosity.

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 171: industrial chemical technology

The non-Newtonian fluids are further classified as pseudo-plastic, dilatant and Bingham plastic.  

Classification of non-Newtonian fluids

Many mathematical models are available to describe the nonlinear "shear-stress vs deformation-rate" relationship of non Newtonian fluids. But no general model can describe the constitutive equation ("shear stress vs rate of deformation" relationship) of all kinds of non-Newtonian fluids. However, the mathematical model for describing the mechanistic behaviour of a variety of commonly used non-Newtonian fluids is the Power-Law model which is also known as Ostwald-de Waele model (the name is after the scientist who proposed it). According to Ostwald-de Waele model

(2.1)

where m is known as the flow consistency index and n is the flow behavior index.

When n = 1, m equals , the model identically satisfies Newtonian model as a special case. When n < 1, the model is valid for pseudoplastic fluids, such as gelatine, blood, milk etc. When n > 1, the model is valid for dilatant fluids, such as sugar in water, aqueous suspension of rice starch etc.

There are some substances which require a yield stress for the deformation rate (i.e. the flow) to be established, and hence their constitutive equations do not pass through the origin thus violating the basic definition of a fluid. They are termed as Bingham plastic. For an ideal Bingham plastic, the shear stress- deformation rate relationship is linear.

Compressibility

Compressibility of any substance is the measure of its change in volume under the action of external forces.

The normal compressive stress on any fluid element at rest is known as hydrostatic pressure p and arises as a result of innumerable molecular collisions in the entire fluid.

The degree of compressibility of a substance is characterized by the bulk modulus of elasticity E defined as

 

(2.3)

Where Δ and Δp are the changes in the volume and pressure respectively, and is the initial volume. The negative sign (-sign) is included to make E positive, since increase in pressure would decrease the volume i.e for Δp>0 , Δ <0) in volume.

For a given mass of a substance, the change in its volume and density satisfies the relation

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 172: industrial chemical technology

Δm = 0, Δ( ρ ) = 0

 

(2.4)

 

using    

we get

 

(2.5)

Values of E for liquids are very high as compared with those of gases (except at very high pressures). Therefore, liquids are usually termed as incompressible fluids though, in fact, no substance is theoretically incompressible with a value of E as . 

For example, the bulk modulus of elasticity for water and air at atmospheric pressure are approximately 2 x 106 kN/m 2 and 101 kN/m 2 respectively. It indicates that air is about 20,000 times more compressible than water. Hence water can be treated as incompressible.   

For gases another characteristic parameter, known as compressibility K, is usually defined , it is the reciprocal of E 

 

(2.6)

K is often expressed in terms of specific volume . For any gaseous substance, a change in pressure is generally associated with a change in

volume and a change in temperature simultaneously. A functional relationship between the pressure, volume and temperature at any equilibrium state is known as thermodynamic equation of state for the gas.   For an ideal gas, the thermodynamic equation of state is given by 

p = ρRT (2.7)

where T is the temperature in absolute thermodynamic or gas temperature scale (which are, in fact, identical), and R is known as the characteristic gas constant, the value of which depends

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 173: industrial chemical technology

upon a particular gas. However, this equation is also valid for the real gases which are thermodynamically far from their liquid phase. For air, the value of R is 287 J/kg K.  

K and E generally depend on the nature of process  

 

Distinction between an Incompressible and a Compressible Flow

In order to know, if it is necessary to take into account the compressibility of gases in fluid flow problems, we need to consider whether the change in pressure brought about by the fluid motion causes large change in volume or density. Using Bernoulli's equation p + (1/2)ρV2= constant (V being the velocity of flow), change in pressure, Δp, in a flow field, is of the order of (1/2)ρV2 (dynamic head). Invoking this relationship into

we get ,

(2.12)

So if Δρ/ρ is very small, the flow of gases can be treated as incompressible with a good degree of approximation.

For compressible fluid, if the flow velocity is small as compared to the local acoustic velocity, compressibility of gases can be neglected. Considering a maximum relative change in density of 5 per cent as the criterion of an incompressible flow, the upper limit of Mach number becomes approximately 0.33. In the case of air at standard pressure and temperature, the acoustic velocity is about 335.28 m/s. Hence a Mach number of 0.33 corresponds to a velocity of about 110 m/s. Therefore flow of air up to a velocity of 110 m/s under standard condition can be considered as incompressible flow.

Surface Tension of Liquids

The phenomenon of surface tension arises due to the two kinds of intermolecular forces (i) Cohesion : The force of attraction between the molecules of a liquid by virtue of which they are bound to each other to remain as one assemblage of particles is known as the force of cohesion. This property enables the liquid to resist tensile stress.

(ii) Adhesion : The force of attraction between unlike molecules, i.e. between the molecules of different liquids or between the molecules of a liquid and those of a solid body when they are in contact with each other, is known as the force of adhesion. This force enables two different liquids to adhere to each other or a liquid to adhere to a solid body or surface.

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 174: industrial chemical technology

Work is done on each molecule arriving at surface against the action of an inward force. Thus mechanical work is performed in creating a free surface or in increasing the area of the surface. Therefore, a surface requires mechanical energy for its formation and the existence of a free surface implies the presence of stored mechanical energy known as free surface energy. Any system tries to attain the condition of stable equilibrium with its potential energy as minimum. Thus a quantity of liquid will adjust its shape until its surface area and consequently its free surface energy is a minimum.

The magnitude of surface tension is defined as the tensile force acting across imaginary short and straight elemental line divided by the length of the line.

The dimensional formula is F/L or MT-2 . It is usually expressed in N/m in SI units.

Surface tension is a binary property of the liquid and gas or two liquids which are in contact with each other and defines the interface. It decreases slightly with increasing temperature. The surface tension of water in contact with air at 20°C is about 0.073 N/m.

It is due to surface tension that a curved liquid interface in equilibrium results in a greater pressure at the concave side of the surface than that at its convex side.

 

Capillarity

The interplay of the forces of cohesion and adhesion explains the phenomenon of capillarity. When a liquid is in contact with a solid, if the forces of adhesion between the molecules of the liquid and the solid are greater than the forces of cohesion among the liquid molecules themselves, the liquid molecules crowd towards the solid surface. The area of contact between the liquid and solid increases and the liquid thus wets the solid surface.

The reverse phenomenon takes place when the force of cohesion is greater than the force of adhesion. These adhesion and cohesion properties result in the phenomenon of capillarity by which a liquid either rises or falls in a tube dipped into the liquid depending upon whether the force of adhesion is more than that of cohesion or not (Fig.2.4).

The angle θ as shown in Fig. 2.4, is the area wetting contact angle made by the interface with the solid surface.

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 175: industrial chemical technology

Fig 2.4 Phenomenon of Capillarity

For pure water in contact with air in a clean glass tube, the capillary rise takes place with θ = 0 . Mercury causes capillary depression with an angle of contact of about 1300 in a clean glass in

contact with air. Since h varies inversely with D as found from Eq. ( ), an appreciable capillary rise or depression is observed in tubes of small diameter only.

Vapour pressure

All liquids have a tendency to evaporate when exposed to a gaseous atmosphere. The rate of

evaporation depends upon the molecular energy of the liquid which in turn depends upon the type of liquid and its temperature. The vapour molecules exert a partial pressure in the space above the liquid, known as vapour pressure. If the space above the liquid is confined (Fig. 2.5) and the liquid is maintained at constant temperature, after sufficient time, the confined space above the liquid will contain vapour molecules to the extent that some of them will be forced to enter the liquid. Eventually an equilibrium condition will evolve when the rate at which the number of vapour molecules striking back the liquid surface and condensing is just equal to the rate at which they leave from the surface. The space above the liquid then becomes saturated with vapour. The vapour pressure of a given liquid is a function of temperature only and is equal to the saturation pressure for boiling corresponding to that temperature. Hence, the vapour pressure increases with the increase in temperature. Therefore the phenomenon of boiling of a liquid is closely related to the vapour pressure. In fact, when the vapour pressure of a liquid becomes equal to the total pressure impressed on its surface, the liquid starts boiling. This concludes that boiling can be achieved either by raising the temperature of the liquid, so that its vapour pressure is elevated to the ambient pressure, or by lowering the pressure of the ambience (surrounding gas) to the liquid's vapour pressure at the existing temperature.

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 176: industrial chemical technology

Figure 2.5 To and fro movement of liquid molecules from an interface in a

confined space as a closed surrounding Exercise Problems - Chapter 1 1. A thin film of liquid flows down an inclined channel. The velocity distribution in the flow is given

by

where, h = depth of flow, α = angle of inclination of the channel to the horizontal, u = velocity at a

depth h below the free surface, ρ = density of liquid, μ = dynamic viscosity of the fluid. Calculate the shear stress: (a) at the bottom of the channel (b) at mid-depth and (c) at the free surface. The coordinate y is measured from the free surface along its normal

[(a) α, (b) α , (c) 0]

2. Two discs of 250 mm diameter are placed 1.5 mm apart and the gap is filled with an oil. A power of 500 W is required to rotate the upper disc at 500 rpm while keeping the lower one stationary. Determine the viscosity of the oil.

[ 0. 71 kg/ms] [ 5.95]

Recap In this chapter you have learnt the following

A fluid is a substance that deforms continuously when subjected to even an infinitesimalshear stress. Solids can resist tangential stress at static conditions undergoing a definitedeformation while a fluid can do it only at dynamic conditions undergoing a continuousdeformation as long as the shear stress is applied.

The concept of continuum assumes a continuous distribution of mass within the matter

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 177: industrial chemical technology

or system with no empty space. In the continuum approach, properties of a system canbe expressed as continuous functions of space and time. A dimensionless parameter

known as Knudsen number where λ is the mean free path and L is the characteristic length, aptly describes the degree of departure from continuum. Theconcept of continuum usually holds good when Kn< 0.01.

Viscosity is a property of a fluid by virtue of which it offers resistance to flow. The shear

stress at a point in a moving fluid is directly proportional to the rate of shear strain. For a

one dimensional flow, . The constant of proportionality μ is known as coefficient of viscosity or simply the viscosity. The relationship is known as the Newton's law of viscosity and the fluids which obey this law are known as Newtonian fluids.

The relationship between the shear stress and the rate of shear strain is known as the

constitutive equation. The fluids whose constitutive equations are not linear through origin (do not obey the Newton's law of viscosity) are known as non-Newtonian fluids. For a Newtonian fluid, viscosity is a function of temperature only. With an increase in temperature, the viscosity of a liquid decreases, while that of a gas increases. For non-Newtonian fluid, the viscosity depends not only on temperature but also on the

deformation rate of the fluid. Kinematic viscosity v is defined as .

Compressibility of a substance is the measure of its change in volume or density underthe action of external forces. It is usually characterized by the bulk modulus of elasticity

A flow is said to be incompressible when the change in its density due to the change in

pressure brought about by the fluid motion is negligibly small. When the flow velocity isequal to or less than 0.33 times of the local acoustic speed, the relative change indensity of the fluid, due to flow, becomes equal to or less than 5 per cent respectively, and hence the flow is considered to be incompressible

The force of attraction between the molecules of a fluid is known as cohesion, while that

between the molecules of a fluid and of a solid is known as adhesion. The interplay of these two intermolecular forces explains the phenomena of surface tension and capillaryrise or depression. A free surface of the liquid is always under stretched conditionimplying the existence of a tensile force on the surface. The magnitude of this force per unit length of an imaginary line drawn along the liquid surface is known as the surfacetension coefficient or simply the surface tension.

 

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 178: industrial chemical technology

11/13/2010

1

Faculty of Engineering andTechnical Studies

FLUID MECHANICSChapter 2: Fluid Statics

1

Compiled by: Janmeshkumar J Pandya

Faculty of Engineering andTechnical Studies

Introduction

Objectives

2.1 Pressure2 2 Ab l t d G P2.2 Absolute and Gauge Pressure2.3 Variation of Pressure with Elevation

2.3.1 Pressure and Head2.3.2 Equality of pressure at the same level in static fluid2.3.3 Pascal’s Paradox

2.4 Pressure Measurement2.5 Hydrostatic Force on Plane Surface2.6 Hydrostatic Buoyant Force

2

y ySummary

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 179: industrial chemical technology

11/13/2010

2

Faculty of Engineering andTechnical Studies

• Fluid static is the study of pressures throughout a fluid atrest and the pressure forces on finite surface.

Introduction

• The general rule applies to fluid at rest:1. No shears stress /force acting on it.

2. Any force between the fluid and the boundary must be acting atright angles to the boundary (normal to the surface).

F F

3

Figure 2.1 Pressure forces normal to the boundary

Faculty of Engineering andTechnical Studies

Objectives1. Define the relationship between absolute pressure, gauge

pressure and atmospheric pressure.

2. Define the relationship between change in elevation andchange in pressure.

3. Describe pressure measurements.

4. Compute the hydrostatic pressures and forces onsubmerged surfaces on static fluid.

5. Use the principle of static equilibrium to solve for the

4

5. Use the principle of static equilibrium to solve for theforces involves in buoyancy problems.

6. Define the condition for stability of submerged andfloating bodies.

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 180: industrial chemical technology

11/13/2010

3

Faculty of Engineering andTechnical Studies

2.1 PressureThe basic property of a static fluid is pressure.

Pressure is defined as the amount of surface force exertedby a fluid on any boundary it is in contact with. It can bewritten as:

)1.2(

Pr

AFP

appliedisforcethewhichofAreaForceessure

=

=

5

Unit: N / m2 or Pascal (Pa).(Also frequently used is bar, where 1 bar = 105 Pa).

Faculty of Engineering andTechnical Studies DamsArch Dam

Arch & Gravity Dam

Gravity Dam

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 181: industrial chemical technology

11/13/2010

4

Faculty of Engineering andTechnical StudiesDams (cont.)

Hydrostatic forc

Energy conversionBernoulli equation

TurbineHydrostatic uplift

Faculty of Engineering andTechnical StudiesFluid StaticsWhen a surface is submerged in a fluid at rest, hydrostatic forces develop on the surface due to the fluid pressure. These forces must be perpendicular to the surface since there is no shear action present. These forces can be determined by integrating the static pressure distribution y g g pover the area it is acting on.

Example: What is the force acting on the bottom of the tank shown?

Fluid with density ρ

h

Tank area A

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 182: industrial chemical technology

11/13/2010

5

Faculty of Engineering andTechnical Studies

2 (TWO) important principles about pressure;• Pressure acts uniformly in all directions on a small volume of

fluid.

• In a fluid confined by solid boundaries, pressure actsperpendicular to the boundary.

• These principles, called Pascal’s Law,

Fluid surfaces

9Figure 2.2Pressure acting uniformly in all directions

Figure 2.3:Direction of fluid pressures on boundaries

Faculty of Engineering andTechnical Studies

10

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 183: industrial chemical technology

11/13/2010

6

Faculty of Engineering andTechnical Studies

2.2 Absolute and Gauge Pressure• Pressure measurements are generally indicated as being either

absolute or gauge pressure.

G Gauge pressure• is the pressure measured above or below the atmospheric pressure

(i.e. taking the atmospheric as datum). • can be positive or negative. • A negative gauge pressure is also known as vacuum pressure.

Absolute pressure• uses absolute zero which is the lowest possible pressure

11

• uses absolute zero, which is the lowest possible pressure.• Therefore, an absolute pressure will always be positive. • A simple equation relating the two pressure measuring system can

be written as:Pabs = Pgauge + Patm (2.2)

Faculty of Engineering andTechnical Studies

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 184: industrial chemical technology

11/13/2010

7

Faculty of Engineering andTechnical Studies

Atmospheric pressure• refers to the prevailing pressure in the air around us• refers to the prevailing pressure in the air around us.

• It varies somewhat with changing weather conditions, and itdecreases with increasing altitude.

• At sea level, average atmospheric pressure is 101.3 kPa(abs), 14.7 psi (abs), or 1 atmosphere (1 bar = 1x105 Pa).

• This is commonly referred to as ‘standard atmosphericpressure’

13

pressure .

Faculty of Engineering andTechnical Studies

14

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 185: industrial chemical technology

11/13/2010

8

Faculty of Engineering andTechnical Studies

Example 2.1Express a pressure of 155 kPa (gauge) as an absolutepressure.

Express a pressure of –31 kPa (gauge) as an absolutepressure.

The local atmospheric pressure is 101 kPa (abs).

Solution:Pabs = Pgauge + Patm

P 155 + 101 256 kPa

15

Pabs = 155 + 101 = 256 kPa

Pabs = -31 + 101 = 70 kPa

Faculty of Engineering andTechnical Studies

2.3 Variations of Pressure with Elevation

P2, A

Fluid Density

ρ

Area, AP2, A

P1, AZ1

Z2

h

Reference/datum

Figure 2.4:Small cylindrical element of fluid

16

To find the variations of pressure with elevation, let’s consider asmall cylindrical element of fluid of cross-sectional area A, andheight (h = Z2 –Z1), surrounded by the same fluid of mass density, ρ.

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 186: industrial chemical technology

11/13/2010

9

Faculty of Engineering andTechnical Studies

The pressure at the bottom of the cylinder is P1 at level Z1,and at the top is P2 at level Z2. The fluid is at rest and inequilibrium so all the forces in the vertical direction sum tozero.

Force due to P1 (upward) = P1A1 ( p ) 1Force due to P2 (downward) = P2AForce due to weight of element = mg = ρgA(Z2-Z1)Taking the summation of forces (upward as positive);

(↑)∑F=0P1A – P2A - ρgA(Z2-Z1) = 0P1 – P2 = ρg (Z2-Z1) = ρgh (2.3)

or P2 – P1 = - ρg(Z2-Z1) = - ρgh (2.3a)

17

Thus, in any fluid under gravity,an increase in elevation causes a decrease in pressure.a decrease in elevation causes an increase in pressure.

Faculty of Engineering andTechnical Studies

2.3.1 Pressure and head

h

P2 = Patm

ya

Free surface

In a liquid with a free surface the pressure at any depth h measured from the free surface can be found by applying equation (2.3) to the figure.

From equation (2.3): P1 – P2= ρg (ya-y)

P1

y

18

q ( ) 1 2 ρg (ya y)But ya-y = h , and

P2 = Patm (atmospheric pressure since it is at free surface).Thus,

P1 – Patm= ρghor P1 = Patm + ρgh (abs) (2.4)or in terms of gauge pressure (Patm= 0),:

P1 = ρgh = γh (2.5)

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 187: industrial chemical technology

11/13/2010

10

Faculty of Engineering andTechnical Studies

From the above equations, it can be concluded that the change in pressureis directly proportional to the specific weight of the liquid, and pressurevaries linearly with the change of elevation or depth.

The linear variation with depth below the free surface is known ashydrostatic pressure distribution.

Hydrostatic pressure increases with the depth of fluid. Notice that inFigure 2.5 below, the reading on the pressure gauge of tank A is lowerthan the reading of tank B. The gauges show the pressure created by thedepth and specific weight of the liquid.

Tank A Tank B

19

liquidliquid

Figure 2.6:Different pressuredue to different depth

PA < PB

Faculty of Engineering andTechnical Studies

As g is assumed constant, the gauge pressure can begiven by stating the vertical height, h, of any fluiddensity ρ which would be necessary to produce thisdensity, ρ, which would be necessary to produce thispressure. This vertical height, h, is known as pressurehead or just head of fluid, and can be written as;

h = P/ρg (2.6)

Note that when pressures are expressed as head, thedensity of fluid must be given or the fluid is named.

20

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 188: industrial chemical technology

11/13/2010

11

Faculty of Engineering andTechnical Studies

2.3.2 Equality of Pressure at the Same Level in a Static Fluid

Fluid density, ρ

Consider the horizontal cylindrical element of fluid with cross sectional area, A, in a fluid of density ρ, pressure PL at the left end and PR at the right end. Fluid is at equilibrium so the sum of forces acting on the x-direction is

W = mg

PRPL

y, ρ

AA Figure 2.7Horizontal element cylinder of fluid

21

Fluid is at equilibrium, so the sum of forces acting on the x-direction is zero.

(→) ΣF =0.PLA – PRA = 0

∴ PL = PR (2.7)

This proof that pressure in the horizontal direction is constant.

Faculty of Engineering andTechnical Studies

Figure 2.8:Two tanks of different

Applying equation (2.4)PL = PP + ρgh ---------------- (1)

andPR = PQ + ρgh ---------------- (2)

E li h h th t P P ( f ti 2 6) th f

cross-section connected by a pipe

22

Earlier, we have shown that PL = PR (refer equation 2.6), therefore equating (1) and (2) will give

Pp + ρgh = PQ + ρghPP = PQ (2.8)

This shows that the pressures at two equal levels P & Q are the same. This is an important concept when dealing with manometers (see Section 2.4).

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 189: industrial chemical technology

11/13/2010

12

Faculty of Engineering andTechnical Studies

Faculty of Engineering andTechnical Studies

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 190: industrial chemical technology

11/13/2010

13

Faculty of Engineering andTechnical Studies

2.3.3 Pascal’s ParadoxEarlier we have shown that the change in pressure dependsonly on the change of elevation and the type of fluid, not onthe weight of the fluid presentthe weight of the fluid present.

Therefore, all the containers shown in Figure 2.8 would havethe same pressure at the bottom – no matter what the size orshape of container and how much fluid they contained.

This observation is called Pascal’s Paradox.

25

hh

Pressure is the same at the bottom of container: P=ρgh

Figure 2.9:Illustration of Pascal’s Paradox

Faculty of Engineering andTechnical Studies

Example 2.2What will be the gauge pressure and absolute pressure ofwater at a depth 12m below the surface? Take ρwater = 1000kg/m3 and Patm = 101 kN/m2

Solution:Solution:

Pgauge = ρgh= 1000 x 9.81 x 12= 117.7 kN/m2 (kPa)

Pabs = Pgauge + Patm= (117.7 + 101) kN/m2

218 7 kN/ 2

26

= 218.7 kN/m2

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 191: industrial chemical technology

11/13/2010

14

Faculty of Engineering andTechnical Studies

Example 2.3A cylinder contains a fluid at a gauge pressure of 200 kN/m2. Express this pressure in terms of head of water (ρ =1000 kg/m3) head of water (ρ 1000 kg/m ) head of mercury (SG=13.6)What would be the absolute pressure if the atmospheric pressure is, Patm = 101.3 kN/m2.

Solution:h= P/ρg

a) for water: h = 200x103/(1000x9.81)= 20.39 m of water.

27

20.39 m of water. b) for mercury h = 200x103/(13.6x1000x9.81)

= 1.5 m of mercuryAbsolute pressure = Patm + Pgauge

= 101.3 + 200 = 301.3 kN/m2.

Faculty of Engineering andTechnical Studies

Example 2.4Figure below shows a tank with one side open to the atmosphere and the other side sealed with air above the oil (SG=0.90). Calculate the gauge pressure at points A,B,C,D,E.

3

1 m

E

A

28

2 m

3 m

C

B D

Oil (SG = 0.90)

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 192: industrial chemical technology

11/13/2010

15

Faculty of Engineering andTechnical Studies

Solution:At point A, the oil is exposed to the atmosphere

thus PA=Patm = 0 (gauge)Point B is 3 m below point A,

Thus PB = PA + ρoilgh= 0 + 0.9x1000x9.81x3= 26.5 kPa (gauge)

Point C is 5 m below point A,Thus PC = PA + ρoilgh

= 0 + 0.9x1000x9.81x5= 44.15 kPa (gauge)

Point D is at the same level of point B,thus PD = PB

= 26.5 kPa (gauge)

29

Point E is higher by 1 m from point A,Thus PE = PA - ρoilgh

= 0 - 0.9x1000x9.81x1= -8.83 kPa (gauge).

Faculty of Engineering andTechnical Studies

2.4 Pressure MeasurementAtmospheric pressure is usually measured by amercury barometer.

A simple barometer consists of a tube more thanp760 mm (30 inch) long inserted in an open containerof mercury with a closed and evacuated end at thetop and open end at the bottom with mercuryextending from the container up into the tube.

A void is produced at the top of the tube which isvery nearly a perfect vacuum. Figure 2.10 belowshows an example of a barometer.

Mercury rises in the tube to a height ofapproximately 760 mm (30 in.) at sea level.

Figure 2.10:Barometer

30

The level of mercury will rise and fall asatmospheric pressure changes; direct reading of themercury level gives prevailing atmospheric pressureas a pressure head (of mercury), which can beconverted to pressure using the relation:

Patm = ρgh.

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 193: industrial chemical technology

11/13/2010

16

Faculty of Engineering andTechnical Studies

Piezometer tubeA simple vertical tube open at the top, which is attached tothe system containing the liquid where the pressure (higherthan atmospheric pressure) to be measured.p p )

As the tube is open to the atmosphere, the pressuremeasured is the gauge pressure.

h1

h

Pressure at A = pressure due to column of liquid above APA = ρgh1

31

A

•B

h2

Liquiddensity, ρ

Pressure at B = pressure due to column of liquid above B

PB = ρgh2

Figure 2.11: Piezometer tube

Faculty of Engineering andTechnical Studies

U-tube ManometerOne end of the U-tube is connected to the pressure that is to bemeasured, while the other end is left open to atmosphere.The tube contains a liquid, which is called the manometric fluid,which does not mix with the fluid whose pressure is to bewhich does not mix with the fluid whose pressure is to bemeasured.The fluid whose pressure is being measured should have a lesserdensity than the manometric fluid. (ρ < ρman )

D

Pa

32

B

PA

C

h1

h2

Manometric fluid density, ρman

Fluid density, ρ

Figure 2.12:U-tube manometer

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 194: industrial chemical technology

11/13/2010

17

Faculty of Engineering andTechnical Studies

Pressure in a continuous static fluid is the same at any horizontal level so, Pressure at B = Pressure at C

PB = Pc (1)PB Pc (1)For the left hand arm:Pressure at B = Pressure at A + pressure due to h1

PB = PA + ρgh1 (2)For right hand arm:Pressure at C = Pressure at D + pressure due to height h2

PC = PD + ρmangh2 but PD = Patm (atmospheric pressure due to open end)As we are measuring gauge pressure, Patm = 0

33

PC= ρmangh2 (3)But PC = PB, substitute in (3); will give;

PB = ρmangh2 (4)Equating (2) and (4);

PA + ρgh1= ρmangh2PA = ρmangh2 - ρgh1 (2.9)

Faculty of Engineering andTechnical Studies

Differential ManometerIn some cases, the differentbetween the pressures at twodifferent points is desired ratherdifferent points is desired ratherthan the actual value of thepressure at each point.

A manometer to determine thispressure difference is called thedifferential manometer (see figurebelow).

The liquids in manometer will rise

34

or fall as the pressure at either end(or both ends) of the tube changes.

Figure 2.13:Differential manometer

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 195: industrial chemical technology

11/13/2010

18

Faculty of Engineering andTechnical Studies

In the above figure:

P1 = PA + ρ1ga

P2 = PB + ρ1g(b-h) + ρmangh

But P1 = P2 (same horizontal level)

Thus PA + ρ1ga = PB + ρ1g(b-h) + ρmangh

or P P = ρ g(b h) + ρ gh ρ ga

35

or PA - PB = ρ1g(b-h) + ρmangh - ρ1ga

PA- PB = ρ1g(b-a) + gh(ρman - ρ1) (2.10)

Faculty of Engineering andTechnical Studies

Pressure GaugesThe pressure to be measured isapplied to a curved tube, oval in crosssection.

Pressure applied to the tube tends tocause the tube to straighten out, andthe deflection of the end of the tubeis communicated through a system oflevers to a recording needle.

This gauge is widely used for steamand compressed gases.

36

The pressure indicated is thedifference between thatcommunicated by the system to theexternal (ambient) pressure, and isusually referred to as the gaugepressure.

Figure 2.16:Bourdon tube pressure gauges

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 196: industrial chemical technology

11/13/2010

19

Faculty of Engineering andTechnical Studies

Example 2.5What height would a barometer need to be to measure What height would a barometer need to be to measure atmospheric pressure?

Solution:

Patm = 1 bar = 1 x 105 PaPatm = ρgh

37

Water barometer:

Mercury barometer:

waterofmx

xg

Ph

wateratm 2.10

81.91000101 5

==ρ

=

mercuryofmxx

xg

Ph

Hg

atm 75.081.910006.13

101 5==

ρ=

Faculty of Engineering andTechnical Studies

Example 2.6Determine the pressure at point A in the figure below if h1 = 0.2 m and h2 = 0.3 m. Use ρwater = 1000 kg/m3.1 0. a d 2 0.3 . Use ρwater 000 g .

Solution:P2 = P1 + ρHggh2

But P1 = Patm (open to atmosphere) ==>P1 = 0 (gauge)∴P2 = ρHggh2

P3 = PA + ρwaterg(h1+h2)

We know that P2 = P3 (same horizontal level)

Thus Points to be selected:

38

ρHggh2 = PA + ρwaterg(h1+h2)∴

PA = ρHggh2 - ρwaterg(h1+h2)PA = 13.54x1000x9.81x0.3 – 1000x9.81x(0.2+0.3)PA = 39, 848 - 4905PA = 34.9 kPa (gauge)

1 – at the open end of the manometer2 – at the right leg of the manometer3 – same level with point 2 but at left

leg of the manometer4 – same level as point A

Pressure at the points:P1=PatmP2 = P3P4 = PA

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 197: industrial chemical technology

11/13/2010

20

Faculty of Engineering andTechnical Studies

2.5 Hydrostatic Force on Plane SurfacePressure has been defined as force divided by the area on which it acts.This principle can be restated as when a fluid is adjacent to a fixedsurface, it exerts a force on the surface because of the pressure in the, pliquid. For fluid at rest, the force always act at right angles to the surface.

For horizontal plane submerged in a liquid, the pressure, P, will be equalat all points of the surface. This leads to the conclusion that the resultantforce on horizontal surface due to that pressure can be computed from thesimple product of pressure times the area of interest, i.e.

Force = Pressure x Area of plane

F = PA

39

This force will act vertically downward and through the center of pressure.

hF=PA=ρgh Figure 2.17:

Resultant force on horizontal plane

Faculty of Engineering andTechnical StudiesFluid statics

Consider an arbitrary flat shape and orientation:

P P h

The pressure at any point on the shape

40

0

0

P P ghP gysin

ρρ θ

= += +

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 198: industrial chemical technology

11/13/2010

21

Faculty of Engineering andTechnical StudiesFluid statics

The resultant force FR is given by

∫= PdAFR

∫∫ += dA)ysinP( 0 θρg

41

∫+= ydAgsinAP0 θρ

Faculty of Engineering andTechnical StudiesFluid statics

The integral is related to the y coordinate of the centroid (center)the centroid (center)

∫∫ == ydAAy orydAA1y CC

42

AP)AsingyP(F AVGC0R =+= θρ

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 199: industrial chemical technology

11/13/2010

22

Faculty of Engineering andTechnical StudiesFluid statics

Now that we know the resultant force on a submerged plane body issubmerged plane body is

where yc is the y-coordinate of the centroid.it is necessary to know where the center of

AP)AsingyP(F AVGC0R =+= θρ

43

pressure is, that is, the point through which it acts.

Faculty of Engineering andTechnical StudiesFluid statics

In general the location yP of the center of pressure isb l th below the location of the centroid yCbecause the pressure increases with

44

increases with depth.

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 200: industrial chemical technology

11/13/2010

23

Faculty of Engineering andTechnical StudiesFluid statics

Equate the moment of the resultant force FR to the moment of the distributed pressure force about the x-axis.pressure force about the x axis.

P R 0

20

y F yPdA y(P ysin )dA

P ydA gsin y dA

gρ θ

ρ θ

= = +

= +

∫ ∫∫ ∫

45

Where is the second moment of area (area moment of inertia).

0 C XX,0P y A gsin Iρ θ= +

∫= dAyI 2XX,0

Faculty of Engineering andTechnical StudiesFluid statics

Most area moments of inertia are given about the centroid of the shape (IXX,C).

They are relate to the moment IXX,0 about the x-axis by

AyII 2CXX,CXX,0 +=

46

Area moments of inertia about the centroid are in Fig. 10-5 for some common shapes. Centroids are also given there.

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 201: industrial chemical technology

11/13/2010

24

Faculty of Engineering andTechnical Studies

Table 2.1 Second Moments of Area

Rectangle bh3/12bh

IgAreaShape

G G

h

b

G

G

hh/3

Triangle bh3/36bh/2

G G

h

h/3G h

G

b

b

47

Gd

G

πd4/64πd2/4Circle

b

GG

d

Faculty of Engineering andTechnical Studies

2.5.2 Pressure DiagramIn Figure, the triangle on the right hand side(RST) is a graphical representation of the(gauge) pressure change with depth on oneid f th ti l ll f th t k t i i

yLiquid 2/3 H

P = ρgyR

The area of this triangle (RST) represents the resultant force per unit width on thevertical wall. So;Area of pressure diagram = Therefore, the resultant force per unit width,

(2.17)

h f h h h d f h d l h

side of the vertical wall of the tank containinga liquid with density ρ. At the free surface thegauge pressure is zero. It increases linearlyfrom zero at the surface by P = ρgy, to amaximum of at the base of P = ρgH.

S

Fw

T

H

Liquid density, ρ

2/3 H

P = ρgH

)/(21 2 mNgHFw ρ=

48

This force acts through the centroid of the pressure diagram. For a triangle, thecentroid is located at 2/3 its height, thus the resultant force acts at a depth of 2/3 Hfrom R.The total resultant force can be obtained by multiplying the above equation with thewidth of the surface, B.

F = ½ pgH2B (2.17a)The same pressure diagram technique can be used when combinations of liquid areheld in tanks (e.g. oil floating on water).

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 202: industrial chemical technology

11/13/2010

25

Faculty of Engineering andTechnical Studies

Example 2.7A 6-m deep tank contains 4 m of water and 2-m of oil as A 6 m deep tank contains 4 m of water and 2 m of oil as shown in the diagram below. Determine the pressure at point A and at the bottom of the tank. Draw the pressure diagram.

Aoil 2 m

ρwater = 1000 kg/m3

SG of oil = 0 98

49

water 4 m SG of oil 0.98

Faculty of Engineering andTechnical Studies

Solution:Pressure at oil water interface (PA)

PA = Patm + Poil (due to 2 m of oil) 0 + ρ gh 0 + 0 98 x 1000 x 9 81 x 2= 0 + ρoilghoil = 0 + 0.98 x 1000 x 9.81 x 2

= 15696 PaPA = 15.7 kPa (gauge)

Pressure at the bottom of the tank;PB = PA + ρwaterghwaterPB = 15.7x1000 + 1000 x 9.81 x 4

= 54940 PaPB = 54.9 kPa (gauge)

P = 0 Pressure Diagram

50

Patm 0

4 m

2 m

PA

PA=15.7 kPa

B

Aoil

water

PB = 54.9 kPA

Pressure Diagram

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 203: industrial chemical technology

11/13/2010

26

Faculty of Engineering andTechnical Studies

2.6 Hydrostatic Buoyant ForceWhen a body is submerged or floating in a static fluid, the resultant forceexerted on it by the fluid is called the buoyancy force. This buoyancy force isalways acting vertically upward, and has the following characteristics;The buoyancy force is equal to the weight of the fluid displaced by the solidbody.The buoyancy force acts through the centroid of the displaced volume of fluid,called the center of buoyancy.A floating body displaces a volume of fluid whose weight is equal to the weightof the bodyThe above principle is known Archimedes’ principle and can be definedmathematically as demonstrated below (see Figure 2.21);

51

W = mg

Fb= W Fb = W

GB

GB

W = mg

Volume of displaced fluid

Figure 2.21:Buoyancy force

Faculty of Engineering andTechnical StudiesBuoyancy

A buoyant force FB is caused by increasing pressure with depth, so

depthgAF f ×= ρ

andgAsF fTOP = ρ

52

h)gA(sFand

fBOTTOM += ρ

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 204: industrial chemical technology

11/13/2010

27

Faculty of Engineering andTechnical StudiesBuoyancy

The upward force from the bottom is obviously greater and so the net obviously greater, and so the net buoyancy force is

where is the density of the fluid, not the b d d V i th l f th b d

gVgAhF ffNET ρρ ==

53

body, and V is the volume of the body.

Faculty of Engineering andTechnical Studies

For equilibrium: + ΣFy = 0

Fb – W = 0 or Fb = W

Therefore we can write ;

∴ Fb = weight of fluid displaced by the body

or Fb = W = mg = ρg∀ (2.21)

where Fb = buoyant force

∀ = displaced volume of fluid

W = weight of fluid

The buoyant force will act ↑ through the center of

54

The buoyant force will act ↑ through the center of buoyancy (B), while the weight will act ↓ through the center of gravity (G) of the body.

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 205: industrial chemical technology

11/13/2010

28

Faculty of Engineering andTechnical Studies

SummaryThe chapter has summarized the important of:1. Pressure as basic property of fluid and the equation2. Principal of Pascal Law3. Indicating the gauge pressure and absolute pressure 4. The variations of pressure with elevation and the

calculation involved5. Pressure measurement of Piezometer Tube, U-tube

Manometer, Differential Manometer, Advances of U-Tube M t d P G g

55

Manometer and Pressure Gauges6. The Resultant force and the application to the pressure

diagram7. Demonstrating the technique of determining the forces

acting on submerged or partially submerged surfaces

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 206: industrial chemical technology

1/8/2011

1

PUMPSS l ti O ti & M i tSelection Operation & Maintenance

By: Janmesh J Pandya

Prepared by : Janmesh J Pandya

• A PUMP IS A MECHANICAL DEVICE BY WHICH FLUIDSCAN BE TRANSFERRED FROM ONE PLACE TO OTHERUNDER PRESSURE

• Pump is one of the most common machines used in our life –Pump is one of the most common machines used in our lifewhether for domestic or industrial life . The liquids for which apump is generally used are Water, Milk, Oil, Chemicals, Mud,Sludge etc.

Prepared by : Janmesh J Pandya

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 207: industrial chemical technology

1/8/2011

2

Prepared by : Janmesh J Pandya

ARRANGEMENT OF A PUMPING SYSTEM

TYPE OF PUMPS

• Classification of pumps• The main categories are

A) Positive Displacement type B) R t d i tB) Roto-dynamic type C) Special type

• Based on their working designMainly they are 4 types A) Reciprocating B) RotaryC) Centrifugal

Prepared by : Janmesh J Pandya

C) CentrifugalD) Jet

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 208: industrial chemical technology

1/8/2011

3

Rotary Pump Types (HI definitions)

Prepared by : Janmesh J Pandya

D i Positive Others (e g

Pumps

D i Positive Others (e g

Pumps

Dynamic Displacement

Centrifugal Special effect Rotary Reciprocating

Internal External Lobe Slide

Others (e.g. Impulse, Buoyancy)

Dynamic Displacement

Centrifugal Special effect Rotary Reciprocating

Internal External Lobe Slide

Others (e.g. Impulse, Buoyancy)

Prepared by : Janmesh J Pandya

gear gear Lobe vanegear gear Lobe vane

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 209: industrial chemical technology

1/8/2011

4

Positive Displacement Pumps

• For each pump revolution• Fixed amount of liquid taken from one end• Fixed amount of liquid taken from one end• Positively discharged at other end

• If pipe blocked• Pressure rises• Can damage pump

Prepared by : Janmesh J Pandya

• Used for pumping fluids other than water

• Reciprocating pump• Displacement by reciprocation of piston

plungerplunger• Used only for viscous fluids and oil wells

• Rotary pump• Displacement by rotary action of gear, cam

or vanes• Several sub-types

Prepared by : Janmesh J Pandya

• Several sub-types• Used for special services in industry

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 210: industrial chemical technology

1/8/2011

5

Dynamic pumps• Mode of operation

Rotating impeller converts kinetic energy• Rotating impeller converts kinetic energy into pressure or velocity to pump the fluid

• Two types• Centrifugal pumps: pumping water in

industry – 75% of pumps installed• Special effect pumps: specialized conditions

Prepared by : Janmesh J Pandya

Special effect pumps: specialized conditions

Reciprocating Power and Direct Acting (Steam) Pump Types (HI definition)

Prepared by : Janmesh J Pandya

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 211: industrial chemical technology

1/8/2011

6

Prepared by : Janmesh J Pandya

Pumps

• Two types

Flow rates Pressure Flow characteristics

Displacement- plunger- piston- rotary

Low High Pulsating

Prepared by : Janmesh J Pandya

Dynamic- centrifugal

High Low Steady Flow

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 212: industrial chemical technology

1/8/2011

7

Pumps, Fans, Compressors--Turbomachines

• Differences between pumps, fans, compressorsp p , , p– Pumps: move liquids– Fans: move gases with little increase in pressure– Compressors: move gases with greater increase in pressure

Prepared by : Janmesh J Pandya

Reciprocating pump• It consists of a cylinder barrel, piston with rings, suction valve,

delivery valve.• Piston with ring reciprocates inside the barrel. On one side of the

barrel, suction and delivery valves are fixed. The piston is connectedwith power - drive with the help of crank and a connecting rod Whenwith power drive with the help of crank and a connecting rod. Whenthe piston moves, water is sucked inside during the suction strokeand till the delivery stroke, water is pumped out.

• Reciprocating pumps are:1. PISTON OR PLUNGER TYPE2.SINGLE ACTING OR DOUBLE ACTING

Prepared by : Janmesh J Pandya

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 213: industrial chemical technology

1/8/2011

8

Roto-Dynamic Pumps

• Centrifugal Pump– Relative simplicityp y– Mech. effeciency as high as 90%– Can handle fluids containing suspended solids– Ease of maintenance…good for food products– 2 parts: impeller and casing– Radial, mixed, axial flow

Prepared by : Janmesh J Pandya

Rotary Pumps ( Positive displacement )

• Both centrifugal and rotary pumps work on the same principle ofrotation.

• But in the Rotary pumps different rotating member such as Gears• But in the Rotary pumps- different rotating member such as Gears,lobes, screws, Vanes or Cams are provided instead of impellers.

• Rotary pumps have the advantage of the rotary motion of thecentrifugal pumps and the positive displacement benefit of thereciprocating pumps.

Prepared by : Janmesh J Pandya

• These pumps can also be used for pumping thick and Viscousliquids.

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 214: industrial chemical technology

1/8/2011

9

• Jet Pumps:These pumps work on the principle of jets and injectors. A high

velocity fluid in a channel creates vacuum which pulls up theworking fluid.

Prepared by : Janmesh J Pandya

Prepared by : Janmesh J Pandya

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 215: industrial chemical technology

1/8/2011

10

Centrifugal Pump

• This is the most commonly used pump in industry.• It works on the principle of centrifugal force.• Centrifugal force is developed in a rotating body. Thus in these

pumps, the kinetic energy is converted to potential energy, whichp p , gy p gy,helps to increase the delivery pressure. When the impeller rotates,liquid is discharged by the centrifugal force from its center to theperiphery. Partial vacuum is created at the center of the impellerwhich sucks fluid from the suction tank.

• Type of centrifugal pumpsa) VOLUTE type

b) DIFFUSER typeA th t d i th b

Prepared by : Janmesh J Pandya

• As per the stage design they may bei) SINGLE STAGE ii) MULTI STAGE

Prepared by : Janmesh J Pandya

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 216: industrial chemical technology

1/8/2011

11

Prepared by : Janmesh J Pandya

Prepared by : Janmesh J Pandya

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 217: industrial chemical technology

1/8/2011

12

Prepared by : Janmesh J Pandya

Prepared by : Janmesh J Pandya

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 218: industrial chemical technology

1/8/2011

13

Prepared by : Janmesh J Pandya

Prepared by : Janmesh J Pandya

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 219: industrial chemical technology

1/8/2011

14

Prepared by : Janmesh J Pandya

• a) Volute Pump:In the case of volute pump, the impeller is surrounded by a fixedspiral casing called the "VOLUTE CHAMBER" The large velocity ofwater leaving the impeller is converted into pressure inside thevolute chamber.

• b) Diffuser pump:• A Diffuser pump has the guide vanes fixed inside the vortex

chamber in such a way that the space between two consecutivevanes have an increased area from the center to the circumference

When water from the impeller passes through these guide vanes,the velocity head is converted into higher pressure head.

• Hence diffuser pumps yield higher delivery pressure compared tothe volute pumps.

Prepared by : Janmesh J Pandya

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 220: industrial chemical technology

1/8/2011

15

SELECTION OF PUMPS:Pumps are selected on the basis of the following criteria.

• a) Fluid to be handled • b) Flow Capacity• c) Pressure headc) Pressure head• d) Suction data• e) Type of the Drive- Elect. Motor Or mechanical engine

Prepared by : Janmesh J Pandya

Technical Specifications:

• PUMP TYPE- . Type of the pump desired• FLUID Type : Density, Viscosity, Volatility.• PRESSURE: Of the fluid desired to the Pressure Vessel• TEMPERATURE: Of the Fluid of the working environment (such• TEMPERATURE: Of the Fluid , of the working environment (such

as in front of a furnace)• TOTAL HEAD- Suction Head , Delivery Head , Total Friction

Head of the system• CAPACITY- Flow Rate in m3/ Hr, Lpm etc• SUCTION - Size, Strainer, Lift, NPSH• DELIVERY- Size, Minimum Flow Line, NRVs.• INSTRUMENTs Pressure Gauge, Thermometer, Flowmeter• DRIVE Motor Ic Engine Turbine

Prepared by : Janmesh J Pandya

• DRIVE- Motor, Ic Engine, Turbine• POWER SOURCE- Single phase, 3 phase, Voltage

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 221: industrial chemical technology

1/8/2011

16

• Out of these , the most important ones are the pressure ( Head)and flow.

• While ordering a new pump the following data are entered in a datasheet and sent to the manufacturer to suggest / provide a suitablepump

• The data sheet should contain:Type of Liquid, Its viscosity & specificgravity, working temperature, Required Pressure (Head) - Flow -suction &- delivery details - pump type - Rpm - efficiency size/capacity .

• Also Pipe line details - gland cooling system• Motor, power source etc

Prepared by : Janmesh J Pandya

MAIN COMPONENTS of a Centrifugal Pump • SN Part Name Description

1. Air vent :A small valve for removing air during priming operation.

2. Drive Shaft which is the central part of a pump and rotates the impeller

3. Impeller: Main rotating part of a pump having spiral blades

4. Packing: May be gland packing

5. Stuffing Box:A small housing for fixing the gland packing

Prepared by : Janmesh J Pandya

5. Stuffing Box:A small housing for fixing the gland packing

6. Bearing driving end The bearing nearest to the coupling or pulley.

7. Bearing housing An overhung casing accommodating the bearings.

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 222: industrial chemical technology

1/8/2011

17

8. Bearing non Drive end (NDE): The bearing farthest from the couplingend or pulley.

9. Pump Casing: Cast housing for the pump parts. In multistage pump,the casing includes suction casing, delivery casing and theintermediate stage casing . The casing may be in one piece or 2pieces- having lower & upper half

11. Coupling flexible: A device flexibly connecting -the pump shaft andthe motor shaft for transmission.

12. Foot Valve: The entry side non return valve at suction line. Itcontains one strainer

Prepared by : Janmesh J Pandya

DETAILS of FEW IMPORTANT PARTS :

• FOOT VALVE• Foot valve is an important component of a centrifugal pump. Fixed

at the bottom of suction pipe, it keeps the pump primed andrestricts the entry of foreign matter, specially floating debris andaquatic plants into the suction pipe.q p p p

• The valve is a one way flap piece made of leather or rubber andhinged to the valve body. When the pump is not working the valverests on a machine base plate and prevents the return flow ofwater to the well.

• Thus water is retained in the pump casing and suction pipe. Thetotal area of the opening in the strainer of the foot valve should beabout 2 5 times the cross sectional area of the suction pipe Less

Prepared by : Janmesh J Pandya

about 2.5 times the cross sectional area of the suction pipe. Lessthan this will result in heavy friction losses and reduced pumpdischarge.

• The flap valve in the valve body should open fully.

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 223: industrial chemical technology

1/8/2011

18

• IMPELLER:-• Impeller is the rotary element of the pump. It is a wheel or disc

mounted on the shaft and provided with a number of vanes arearranged in a circular array around an inlet opening at the centre.The impeller is secured on a shaft mounted on suitable bearingsThe design of the impeller greatly influences the efficiency andg p g y yoperating characteristic of centrifugal pump.

• SLUICE VALVE :-• This will allow the motor to be started without load. If sluice valve is

provided, it is kept closed at the time of starting. When the pumpreaches its full speed, the sluice valve is opened gradually until thedesired quantity of water is delivered.

• Care is taken not to run the pump for a long period with the sluicel l d thi h t th

Prepared by : Janmesh J Pandya

valve closed, as this may over heat the pump.

WORKING PRINCIPLE & CALCULATIONS

• The centrifugal pumps work on the principle of centrifugal force. Bythe rotation of the impeller, a vacuum is created inside the pumpcasing which sucks in the input fluid .

• This fluid then is given further mechanical energy & rotated to createcentrifugal force which then sends out the fluid at high pressure outof the pump outlet.

Prepared by : Janmesh J Pandya

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 224: industrial chemical technology

1/8/2011

19

Prepared by : Janmesh J Pandya

Prepared by : Janmesh J Pandya

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 225: industrial chemical technology

1/8/2011

20

Prepared by : Janmesh J Pandya

Prepared by : Janmesh J Pandya

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 226: industrial chemical technology

1/8/2011

21

• SUCTION HEAD:-• Suction head represents the difference in level between the centre

line of the pump (also called datum or datum line) and the waterlevel in the source.

• It indicates the vertical height through which the water has to be• It indicates the vertical height through which the water has to belifted or sucked on the suction side of the pump.

• The suction lift may be too high due to the clogging of the pump inletwith mud, gravel or some other obstruction. The other reason couldbe a broken disk or a clogged strainer of the foot valve in case thepump is being started for the first time, the actual suction lift couldbe excessive.

Prepared by : Janmesh J Pandya

• In such a case the pump is to be lowered so that the total suction liftis with in 6.5 meter ( preferably within 4.5m to ensure efficientoperation)

• DISCHARGE HEAD:-• This represents the height to which the delivered water is to be lifted

on discharge side of the pump.

• It indicates the difference in level or height between the datum (orcentre line of the pump) and the delivery spout of the discharge pipep p) y p g p pif water discharge into an overhead service tank or the level of waterin that tank at a given instant, if the delivery pipe is connected to thebottom of the tank.

• The principal reasons of too high discharge head is partially closedsluice valve on the delivery side and blocking of the suction ordelivery pipe with solid entrained in water. If the discharge head iskept less than the designed value, it will result in slight overloading

Prepared by : Janmesh J Pandya

kept less than the designed value, it will result in slight overloadingof the pump and motor.

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 227: industrial chemical technology

1/8/2011

22

IMPELLER EYE TOO SMALL• The capacity of a pump is a function of diameter of the impeller eye.

Therefore, incorrect choice of a pump or moving it from one base to the other may result in this trouble The only remedy in such a case is replacement of the pump with a properly selected one,is replacement of the pump with a properly selected one,

Prepared by : Janmesh J Pandya

• PUMP CALCULATIONSQ x Total Head (Hd- Hs) x d x g

• Hydraulic Power Ph = --------------------------------------------------1000

Where;• Q = Fluid Flow in M 3 / Hour • Hd= Discharge Head in meter • Hs = Suction Head in meter .• d = Fluid density Kg/m3 • g = Acceleration due to gravity m/sec2

Hydraulic Power • Pump Shaft Power Ps = --------------------------------• Pump Efficiency

Prepared by : Janmesh J Pandya

• Pump Efficiency

Pump Shaft Power Ps • Electrical Motor Power = --------------------------• Motor Efficiency

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 228: industrial chemical technology

1/8/2011

23

• Relationship of technical parameters Of a centrifugal pump:• D α N•• Q α N• H α N²H α N • P α N³

Where Q = Fluid Flow m³/Hr H = Head of water in meter

P = Power absorbed KWN =Rotating speed of impeller rpm

_______________________________________

Prepared by : Janmesh J Pandya

• NPSH : Net Positive Suction Head• NPSH is a very important characteristic of a centrifugal pump

design.• The value by which the pressure in the pump Suction exceeds the

liquid vapour pressure is expressed as ahead of liquid and isliquid vapour pressure, is expressed as ahead of liquid and isreferred to as Net Positive Suction Head Available(NPSHA) Thevalue of NPSH needed in the pump suction to prevent the pumpfrom cavitation is known as NPSH Required (NPSHR)

Prepared by : Janmesh J Pandya

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 229: industrial chemical technology

1/8/2011

24

– Need enough pressure on the suction side s.t. the pump does not reduce press @ the eye to cause P < Psat. If P < Psat, water flashes to vapor causing damage to the pump.

Prepared by : Janmesh J Pandya

pump

Cavitation

Prepared by : Janmesh J Pandya

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 230: industrial chemical technology

1/8/2011

25

PUMP INSTALLATION

Pump Foundation :-• The foundation should be sufficiently strong to absorb any

vibration and to form a permanent rigid support for the base plate.This is important for maintaining the alignment of a direct connectedThis is important for maintaining the alignment of a direct connectedunit.

• A concrete foundation on a solid base is advisable . Foundationbolts of the proper size should be embedded in the concrete locatedby a drawing or template.

• Pump is put on level foundation base plate with grouted bolts and isfixed on the base, level again with the spirit level before tightening

Prepared by : Janmesh J Pandya

the foundation base bolts.

• Motor is to be fixed on the base plate and the bolts put on. Thepump and couplings are to be aligned and then the base bolts are tobe tightened.

• After the alignment the coupling bolts are to be fixed with couplingbushesbushes.

• The Suction,, Delivery, Minimum pipe line, gland cooling water linesare to be connected. Motor can then be electrically connected andtest run taken.

• For checking the correctness of alignment, vibration readings areadvised

Prepared by : Janmesh J Pandya

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 231: industrial chemical technology

1/8/2011

26

PUMP ALIGNMENT :-

The alignment of the pump shaft is very important. Realignment ofpump is necessary after complete unit has been levelled on thefoundation and again after the grout has been set and foundationboth has been tightened.

• The alignment must be checked after the unit is piped up andrechecked periodically.

Type of misalignment(a) Angular mis-alignment Shaft with axis concentric but not parallel.(b ) Parallel mis-alignment Shaft with axis parallel but not concentric.

Prepared by : Janmesh J Pandya

• The two halves of the coupling should be at least 4 mm apart so that they cannot touch each other when the driver shaft is rotated. Necessary tools for approximately checking are a straight edge and an out side caliper.

• In order to align the pump and motor, the motor is to be pushed towards the pump coupling till the axial gap specified is maintained. Ali t i d i t t P li i Ali t dAlignment is done in two stages, Preliminary Alignment and Accurate Alignment.

Prepared by : Janmesh J Pandya

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 232: industrial chemical technology

1/8/2011

27

• Preliminary Alignment: Is done by short straight edge and feeler gauge, keeping the straight edge on both coupling the level of both are to be made the same by putting packing sheets underneath the motor. Once it is leveled the gap between couplings is to be checked by the feeler gauge. The gap should be same at four points top, bottom, sides.

Fi l A t Ali t• Final Accurate Alignment:• Requires a coupling alignment jig. The jig is to be attached to the

shafts. Double dial gauge is used to measure the clearance at four planes 90 apart. If the difference measured does not exceed 0.04 mm both in axial and radial directions then the alignment is considered to be accurate.

• The coupling alignment check should be repeated after the trial run, to be sure that it is not disturbed after the starting shock.

Prepared by : Janmesh J Pandya

Materials of Pump Parts• In pump manufacture, common metals used are. • Cast Iron, Cast Steel, Bronze, Brass, Stainless Steel & Alloy Steel .• Impeller: Cast Iron Bronze Stainless Steel• Impeller: Cast Iron, Bronze, Stainless Steel.• Casing : CI, CS, SS Shaft: Medium carbon steel, St. Steel .• Wearing ring: Bronze, SS.

Prepared by : Janmesh J Pandya

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 233: industrial chemical technology

1/8/2011

28

OPERATION OF PUMP

PRIMING :-• Filling the pump with water is called Priming. The pump should

not start without being primed. Priming is done filling the pumpcasing and the suction pipe completely with water, thus ensuringthat all the air in the pump and suction pipe is removedthat all the air in the pump and suction pipe is removed.

• The filling of water can be done manually through a funnel. Whilefilling water, the air-release valve is Kept-open to permit the air toescape from the pump section. Overflow of water through the airrelease valve is an indication that priming has been completed.

• The pump is started after closing the valve. The manual priming isrequired to be done rarely , when either the foot valve is not

Prepared by : Janmesh J Pandya

q yfunctioning properly or there is an air pocket in the suction pipe.

LOW SPEED OF THE ROTATION OF PUMP :-

• Sometimes, the speed of motor driving the pump may be lowbecause of low voltage.

• Hence it is necessary to check the voltage. Some times the motormay have an open phase which causes it to run at a speed lowerthan its rated speed.p

• In case of an engine driven pump the fuel supply and governorshould be checked.

• CARE: During the operation of a pump, observe the pump carefully,note down its condition, the readings of Pressure, Temperature andother parameters at each hour in the prescribed Log Sheet. Anydeviation is to be taken care of/ corrected and necessary action is tobe initiated

• In addition, Noise, Vibration and Heat are also to be checked.Initially hourly readings of all parameters and observations including

Prepared by : Janmesh J Pandya

• Initially, hourly readings of all parameters and observations includingthe defects are to be recorded. Any Running maintenance carriedout are also to be recorded. Any Abnormal sound, observed shouldbe investigated and correct ed because it may be the first warning ofa trouble

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 234: industrial chemical technology

1/8/2011

29

OPERATIONAL CHECKS FOR THE PUMPS

1 . Checks for the pump before starting.• a) The shaft rotates freely.• b) The pump is primed.

) If th i l i d li b h it i• c) If there is any valve in delivery branch, it is open.• d) The stuffing box (gland) is properly tightened (in case of gland

packed pump)

2. Checks during running conditions:• a) The direction of rotation is correct.• b) The pump is running smoothly.• c) See that the prime mover is not overloaded.

Prepared by : Janmesh J Pandya

• d) Leakage through stuffing box is not abnormal • e) There is no leakage from mechanical seal.• f) The ball bearing do not get excessive hot.• g) Avoid idle running on operation against closed discharge valve for

a longer period of time.

DIRECTION OF ROTATION :-• The pump must be run in the direction indicated by an arrow on the

casing which is always toward the discharge nozzle. Rotation, right-hand or left hand, is determined by facing the pump from the driveend.

VAPOUR LOCK IN SUCTION LINE• Vapour pockets may develop in the pump suction line due to

excessive suction head and inadequate submergence of the footvalve. The possible remedies include lowering the pump andincreasing the submergence of the foot valve below the pumpingwater level.

Prepared by : Janmesh J Pandya

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 235: industrial chemical technology

1/8/2011

30

AIR LEAKAGE• Air leakage may take place either in the stuffing box or in the suction

pipe . The stuffing box should leak a small amount of water duringpump operation First of all, one should check for the desired leakageby making suitable adjustments. If this adjustments fails to give thedesired results, the pump should be stopped and the gland packingchecked for damage. A damaged gland packing should be replacedb Th l k f th t ffi b i i h k dby a new one, The leakage from the stuffing box is again checked

• If even after replacement of the gland packing. the defect is notremoved, the suction line will have to be checked for air leakage.The flanges and screwed joints are tightened first

• In case the leakage is not traceable the same can be located byusing a flame or a lighted match stick, The flame, if held close to thepipe and flanges will be drawn towards any leak

Prepared by : Janmesh J Pandya

pipe and flanges, will be drawn towards any leak

OPERATIONAL SHUTDOWN OF PUMP:• While shutting down a pump, the following operations can

be taken up :• Throttle the Discharge valve.• Stop Motor.• As soon as the pump stops, close Discharge valve fully.As soon as the pump stops, close Discharge valve fully.• Close Suction valve.• Close Bypass line.• Shut the Cooling & Sealing system when the pump casing

attains room temp

Prepared by : Janmesh J Pandya

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 236: industrial chemical technology

1/8/2011

31

PUMP START UP PROCEDURE• The following steps are normally suitable for starting a Pump after a

long shutdown--• 1) Check the Lubrication. Start Lub. oil pump if it has Forced

Lubrication System.• 2) Check & open cooling system for Bearing, Gland & Mechanical

Seal, if any.• 4) Open Suction valve. Vent the pump.• 5) Close all Drains.• 6) Prime the pump. Priming means filling the pump with liquid and

driving out ,• 8) Warm up the pump, in case of hot water system.• 9) Open Minimum flow line.• 10) Start pump and bring upto the rated speed.• 11) Open Discharge valve, depending on the starting procedure.

Prepared by : Janmesh J Pandya

) p g , p g g p• 12) Check gland leakage and adjust, if required.• 13) Adjust Sealing liquid flow.• 14) Check pump lubrication for proper oil flow.• 15) Close Re-circulation (Minimum flow) valve, when there is

sufficient flow

• However, for specific cases, the steps mentioned in the PumpManual to be followed.

• If there is Excessive Bearing temperature, excessive glandleakage, high gland heating, Vibration or Noise then stop the pump,rectify the defects and then re-start.

• STANDBY PUMPS :• STANDBY PUMPS :• Standby pumps are required in case the running pump

develops any problem or when more flow is needed. These must bekept in readiness to start in emergencies.

• · Keep Suction valve open.• · Keep Discharge valve throttled.• · Keep all Cooling & Sealing systems on.• · Start pump once in each 8 hour shift and run for atleast 5 minutes.

Prepared by : Janmesh J Pandya

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 237: industrial chemical technology

1/8/2011

32

Prepared by : Janmesh J Pandya

STANDARD PUMP PERFORMANCE CURVES CHARECTERSTICS

Prepared by : Janmesh J Pandya

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 238: industrial chemical technology

1/8/2011

33

Maintenance of Pumps• For efficient running of any pump, lot of care and regular

maintenance is required. There are two types of Maintenance• 1. PLANNED• 2. UNPLANNED• Planned maintenancePlanned maintenance• It is that which is preplanned and the activities start ahead of

the actual execution of job. All kinds of resources like Manpower,tools spares, and other services are readily available at the time ofmaintenance.

• Planned Maintenance is Subdivided into• i) Preventive ii) Predictive iii) Corrective.• Preventive Maintenance is the best type of Maintenance

Prepared by : Janmesh J Pandya

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE• This may be ON-LINE & SHUT DOWN• ON-LINE / ROUTINE Maintenance are activities which can be

carried out during the actual running of the equipment.

• In pump maintenance on line maintenance includes.In pump maintenance on line maintenance includes.• 1. Tightening of loose Bolts• 2. Top up of Lubricants in oil wells/cups• 3. Tightening of gland in the pumps and valves• 4. Greasing. of moving parts

• SHUTDOWN Maintenance can be for minor repairs or major repairs.• Replacements of damaged parts can be done during short shut-ins

of' plant stoppages

Prepared by : Janmesh J Pandya

of plant stoppages. .

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 239: industrial chemical technology

1/8/2011

34

OVERHAULING MAINTENANCE:• It is done to take up major jobs which take long duration to

complete.

• Previous planning is to be made and all needed resources are madeavailable before the shutdown of the pump for overhauling.

• After the shutdown form has reached the maintenance section, thejob can be started.

• Coupling bolts are removed, suction delivery and other pipesdisconnected and the pump has to be shifted to a suitable placewhere the job will be started.

Prepared by : Janmesh J Pandya

• The steps are as follows:

• a) Dismantling: The following parts are to be removed a) Coupling b)Bearing bracket c) Bearings d) Stuffing box e) Connecting rods f)Inlet cover g) Impellers and casings, sleeves h) Outlet cover.

• b Cleaning: All the parts are to be cleaned thoroughly

• c) Inspection: Parts are to be inspected for damage

• d) Repairs: Repairable parts are to be repaired at the work shops

• e) Spares: Spares required to be replaced are to be are to be

Prepared by : Janmesh J Pandya

e) Spares: Spares required to be replaced are to be are to bearranged.

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 240: industrial chemical technology

1/8/2011

35

f) Assembly: Assembly has to be done as per the correct sequence,not forgetting to insert parts at their correct places. Once thepump has been assembled completely it has to> be put on baseand fixed. Motor .is to be fixed with coupling and alignment isdone. The pipes are to be connected and Bearings lubricatedbefore the test run.before the test run.

g) Test run : Pump has to be started and stopped immediately,.During the test run abnormalities if any are to be noted andrectified.

h) Clearance' Clearance can be given to operation to run the pump.i) House keeping: Once the job completed, the area should be

cleaned. Oil spillage, debris are to be removed.The overhauling Jobs may consists of:a) Dismantling b) Cleaning c) Inspection of parts d) Repairs e)

Prepared by : Janmesh J Pandya

) g ) g ) p p ) p )Replacement spares f) Assembly g) Test run h) Clear to operationi) House keeping j) Record keeping.

Unplanned Maintenance:• Unplanned maintenance is done when there are unexpected

failures of pump. It is a costly type of maintenance as it directly effects production and productivity.

• Breakdown of a pump is an Unplanned maintenance activity.• SHUTDOWN MAINTENANCE:• For such repairs,· which can not be carried out during normal

operation of the pump, a short shutdown is taken to repair them.• 1. New gland packing.• 2. Alignment.• 3. Replacement coupling flexible elements.• 4. Change of Bearings.• 5. Cleaning of Suction filters / Foot valves.• 6. Change of Valves / Non-return valves.

Prepared by : Janmesh J Pandya

g• 7. Oil / Grease replacement.• 8. Other necessary jobs.

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 241: industrial chemical technology

1/8/2011

36

WEARING RINGS :-• Wearing ring clearances should be checked from time to time.

When the wearing ring clearance is increased, a loss in capacityand head is caused . If the clearance is approximately twice theoriginal, or if the loss in capacity and head does not meetrequirements, it is time to replace the rings.

STUFFING BOX AND SHAFT PACKINGS• Stuffing box should be carefully cleaned and the packing

placed in them.• Generally a leakage of 15-30 drops of liquid per minute from the

stuffing box is excessive or the packing is worn, the entire packing inthe box will have to be replaced.

• Replacing just a ring or two will not result in an effectivesealing. The shaft and shaft sleeve surface are properly cleanedbefore inserting the packing rings There should not be any burrs or

Prepared by : Janmesh J Pandya

before inserting the packing rings. There should not be any burrs orscores on the working surface.

• If the shaft sleeve is badly worn or scored, it is to be replaced.

Prepared by : Janmesh J Pandya

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 242: industrial chemical technology

1/8/2011

37

Prepared by : Janmesh J Pandya

IMPORTANT PUMP PROBLEMS

• PLUGGING OF IMPELLER• In case of cavity wells, solids in the water may get a

accumulated in the impeller This may block the pump eithercompletely or partially Under such situation the pump casingcompletely or partially. Under such situation, the pump casingshould be opened and all the parts of the impeller cleanedperiodically.

• BENT SHAFT• Thermal distoration, damage during pump overhaul or wrong

assembly of the rotating assembly can cause the bent shaft. Checkthe shaft deflection by means of a dial gauge by turning the shaftbetween lathe centres.

• The average run out of the shaft should not be more than 0.075

Prepared by : Janmesh J Pandya

gmm and 0.150 mm for high speed and low speed pumpsrespectively. The shaft deflection should be checked with a dialgauge by turning the shaft between the lathe centres. If the shaft isfound damaged it should be replaced.

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 243: industrial chemical technology

1/8/2011

38

DISTORTED CASING• . Many a time, the casing gets distorted because of poorly

aligned suction and discharge piping. This results in excessivefriction between the impeller and casing. The piping and thealignment of the primemover should be checked. The wearing ringsshould also be checked and replaced, if found damaged.

PUMP TROUBLE SHOOTING:1. Problem: Pump fails to deliver fluid• Probable Causes• 1. Pump not vented properly• 2. Foot valve defective• 3. Speed too low.• 4. High back pressure.

Prepared by : Janmesh J Pandya

• 5. Foreign bodies inside impeller• 6. Reverse rotation.• 7. Pump not primed properly

2. Insufficient Flow Probable Causes

• 1. Pump not vented properly • 2. Speed too low.• 3. High back pressure.3. High back pressure.• 4. Wearing rings worn out.• 5. Impeller damaged.• 6. Suction filter chocked.3. Total head too low

Probable Causes• 1 Speed too low.• 2. Impeller damaged.

Prepared by : Janmesh J Pandya

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 244: industrial chemical technology

1/8/2011

39

4. Motor taking high CurrentProbable Causes

• 1. Speed too high• 2. High back pressure.• 3. Wearing rings worn • 4. Reverse rotation

5 R t ti l t f li i id• 5. Rotating elements fouling inside.5 High Vibration

Probable Causes• 1. Foreign bodies inside impeller • 2 Impeller damaged.• 3. Rotating element fouling • 4 Mis-alignment • 5. Shaft bent.

Prepared by : Janmesh J Pandya

5. Shaft bent.• 6. Bearings damaged.• 7. Operates at low flow rate • 8. Faulty bearing assembly.• . 9. Suction line incompletely primed.

6. Low bearing life Probable Causes• 1. Rotating elements fouling.• 2. Misalignment.• 3. Shaft bent.• 4. Rotor vibration.

5 F lt b i bl• 5. Faulty bearing assembly. • 6. Lubrication not proper.• 7. Ingress of water into bearing7. Excessive Gland LeakageProbable Causes• 1. Misalignment • 2. Shaft bent.• 3. Bearings damaged.

Prepared by : Janmesh J Pandya

3. Bearings damaged.• 4. Shaft protection sleeve worn out.• 5. Stuffing box badly packed.• 6. Improper gland packing.• 7. Rotor vibration.

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 245: industrial chemical technology

1/8/2011

40

ENERGY CONSERVATION OPPORTUNITIS IN PUMPINGSYSTEMS

• Centrifugal pumps are some of the most inefficient equipment as faras the energy utilization is concerned due to its typical designfeatures. Hence this also offers good scope for improving energyefficiencyefficiency.

• Some Recommendations are :• OPERATE PUMPS AT NEAR ITS BEST EFFICIENCY• TO MODIFY PUMING SYSTEM & PUMP LOSSES TO MINIMISE

THROTTLING So That Need Not To Close Valves• ENSURE ADEQUATE NPSH AT THE INSTALLATION• STOP RUNNING MULTIPLE PUMPS IF NOT NECESSARY. ADD

AUTO-START OR ADD A BOOSTER PUMP

Prepared by : Janmesh J Pandya

• REPAIR ALL THE SEALS & PACKINGS TO MINIMISE LEAKAGES

• BALANCE THE SYSTEM TO MINMISE FLOWS & REDUCE PUMP POWER REQUIREMENT

• REPLACE ANY OLD INEFFICIENT PUMPS BY MORE EFFICIENT PUMPS

• REDUCE THE SYSTEM RESISTANCE BY PROPER DESIGN OF VALVES, PIPES, ELBOWS, FLANGES

• PRESSURE DROP ASSESSMENT AND PIPE SIZE TO BE OPTIMISED

• AVOID OVER SIZING OF PUMPS. PROVIDE VARIABLE SPEED DRIVE. PROVIDE CORRECT SIZE PUMP

• HAVE ALWAYS VERY GOOD MAINTENANCE WITH PROPER PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

• 12 USE MODERN PREDICTIVE MAINTENANCE TOOLS TO

Prepared by : Janmesh J Pandya

• 12.USE MODERN PREDICTIVE MAINTENANCE TOOLS TO MONITOR PERFORMANCE

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 246: industrial chemical technology

1/8/2011

41

More details about problems and failures in pump

Prepared by : Janmesh J Pandya

Prepared by : Janmesh J Pandya

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 247: industrial chemical technology

1/8/2011

42

• Section B -- Pump Application Data

• B-2 Material Selection Chart• This chart is intended as a guide in the selection of economical

materials. It must be kept in mind that corrosion rates may varywidely with tem-perature, concentration, and the presence of tracey p , , pelements or abrasive solids. Blank spaces in the chart indicate alack of accurate corrosion data for those specific conditions.

Prepared by : Janmesh J Pandya

• Code:• A Recommended• B Useful resistance• X Unsuitable

Prepared by : Janmesh J Pandya

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 248: industrial chemical technology

1/8/2011

43

Prepared by : Janmesh J Pandya

• Net Positive Suction Head (NPSH)• NPSH Available is a function of the system in which the pump

operates.• It is the excess pressure of the liquid in feet absolute over its vapor

pressure as it arrives at the pump suctionpressure as it arrives at the pump suction.

Prepared by : Janmesh J Pandya

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 249: industrial chemical technology

1/8/2011

44

Prepared by : Janmesh J Pandya

Prepared by : Janmesh J Pandya

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 250: industrial chemical technology

1/8/2011

45

Prepared by : Janmesh J Pandya

Prepared by : Janmesh J Pandya

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 251: industrial chemical technology

1/8/2011

46

N 1 N 2

R e ci p r o ca t i n g P u m pC h a r a ct e r i st i c C u r v e

P R E SSU R E H E A D( H p = f t l b f / lb m )

Prepared by : Janmesh J Pandya

C A P A C I T Y( V = G P M )

A ct u a lI d e a l

Prepared by : Janmesh J Pandya

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 252: industrial chemical technology

1/8/2011

47

Blowers

Prepared by : Janmesh J Pandya

Theoretical

PERFORMANCE CURVE comparison:CENTRIFUGAL vs POSITIVE DISPLACEMENT

Flow

Actual

Prepared by : Janmesh J Pandya

Flow Pressure

Centrifugal Positive Displacement

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 253: industrial chemical technology

Long Term Training Programonon

“Industrial Chemical Technology”

Fluid Flow Operation

Topic: Pressure concept & measurement

Prepared by:M M B DhMr. M. B. DhangarLecturer, ChED

N. G. Patel Polytechnic, BardoliDate: 10th October 2010Date: 10 October, 2010

Prepared by: Prof.M. Dhangar, Lecturer, N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 254: industrial chemical technology

Newtonian Fluids:Newtonian Fluids:

Bingham

Newtonian Pseudo Plastic

g

Dilatant

Velocity Gradient du / dyy y

Prepared by: Prof.M. Dhangar, Lecturer, N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 255: industrial chemical technology

Examples:Examples:

• Newtonian Fluids: All gases air liquids such asNewtonian Fluids: All gases, air, liquids such as kerosene, alcohol, glycerine, benzene etc.

• Bingham Fluids: Tooth Paste jellies paints etc• Bingham Fluids: Tooth Paste, jellies, paints etc.

• Pseudo Plastic: Blood, Polymer solutions, d bb lmuds, rubber latex etc.

• Dilatant Fluids: Pulp in water, Starch in water etc.

Prepared by: Prof.M. Dhangar, Lecturer, N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 256: industrial chemical technology

Pressure:Pressure:

• The normal force exerted by a fluid per unitThe normal force exerted by a fluid per unitarea of the surface is called as the fluidpressurepressure.

• P = F / A

Prepared by: Prof.M. Dhangar, Lecturer, N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 257: industrial chemical technology

Gauge Pressure Pg Pabs = Patm + Pg g g

Local Atmosphere Pressure line Patm

Vacuum Pressure

Pabs = Patm - PgAbsolute zero line

Prepared by: Prof.M. Dhangar, Lecturer, N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 258: industrial chemical technology

Pressure Measurement:Pressure Measurement:

Pressure measuring DevicesPressure measuring Devices

Manometers-Piezometer-Simple U tube Mano.Differential Manometer

Mechanical Gauges-Bourdon Tube-DiaphragmBellow Pressure Gauge

Transducers

-Differential Manometer-Inverted Diff. Manometer-Single Tube Manometer-Inclined Tube Manometer

-Bellow Pressure Gauge-Dead Weight

-Mocromanometer

Prepared by: Prof.M. Dhangar, Lecturer, N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 259: industrial chemical technology

A Long Term Training Program Chemical Engineering Department  N. G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli 

Nodal Institute Experiment: Reynolds No. and Flow Pattern Staff: Mr. M. B. Dhangar                                                             Date: 26th December, 2010  Objective: - To indentify the various flow pattern by calculating the Reynold’s No. Equipment: - Water supply tank, KMnO4 solution, stop watch etc.

Experimental Set up: - Apparatus consist of storage cum supply tank which has the

provision for supplying colored dye through jet. A Perspex tube is provided to visualize the

different flow conditions. The entry of water in Perspex tube is through elliptical bell mouth to

have smooth flow at the entry. A regulating value is provided on the downstream side of the tube

to regulate the flow. The discharge must be varied vary gradually from a smaller to larger value;

A collecting tank is used to find the actual discharge though Perspex tube.

Theory: - Depending upon the relative magnitudes of viscous and inertial forces, flow can

occur in two different manner viz. Laminar flow and turbulent flow. In laminar flow viscous

effect are more predominant than the inertial effects. But when shear and normal stresses are

added with the increase in velocity of flow, the flow is turbulent. To identify the laminar and

turbulent ranges of flow a dimensionless parameter is being utilized which is a measure of the

relative importance of inertial force and viscous force prevailing in the flow of a fluid, which is

known as Reynolds number. It is equal to the ratio of the inertial force to the viscous force per

unit volume. Sir Osborene Reynolds first did the study of flow pattern in 1883.Reynold number

gives a fair idea about the flow pattern

Reynolds no. given by the formula:-

NRe = ρvd µ

where d = diameter of pipe

v = velocity of flowing fluid

µ = viscosity of fluid

ρ = density of fluid

Prepared by: Prof.M. Dhangar, Lecturer, N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 260: industrial chemical technology

This means that a large value of Reynolds number signifies less viscous effects and vice versa.

For determining different flow conditions, equipment first used by Professor Osborne Reynolds

after whose name Reynolds’s number exists. The motion is laminar or turbulent according to the

value of NRe is less then or greater then a certain value. When a fluid flows in a pipe, the flows

are either laminar or turbulent. When a velocity of the flowing fluid is low, the fluid flows in a

pattern of parallel layers or laminar, sliding past adjacent laminar and the flow is said to be

Laminar flow when the velocity of fluid is further increased, the fluid no longer flows in parallel

layers and the layers starts intermingling/mixing with each other resulting in formation of eddy.

This type of flow is known as Turbulent flow. In between laminar flow & turbulent flow there

exists a transition flow pattern where the flow is neither laminar nor turbulent.

Procedure: - • Note down Diameter of perspex tube, Area of collecting tank and room temperature.

• Switch on the pump and circulate the water through the Storage reservoir, supply

tank, Perspex tube and back to storage reservoir.

• Allow the flow rate to achieve steady state.

• Open the valve attached with dye supply tube carefully and introduces the dye into

the Perspex tube.

• Observe the flow pattern of dye inside Perspex tube. If the velocity of fluid is very

less it will be observed like a thread flowing at the centre of Perspex tube. This type

of flow can be described as laminar flow.

• Record the discharge of water flowing in the Perspex tube by collecting the water in

measuring tank for known time period.

• Increase the velocity of flow in the Perspex tube by operating regulating valve.

Oscillating motion of dye thread will be observed and after oscillation dye will

gradually disperse in the fluid. This flow describes transition stage between laminar

and turbulent. Again measure the flow rate by same method as that described above.

• On further increasing the flow rate, thorough mixing of dye in water will be

observed which represents turbulent flow. Repeat again the flow measurement

procedure.

Prepared by: Prof.M. Dhangar, Lecturer, N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 261: industrial chemical technology

• Tabulate the readings and calculate the Reynolds No. using given data of dia.,

density and viscosity. Match the calculated value of Reynolds No. with observed

flow pattern.

Observations: -

• Room temp: _________0C

• Internal dia. of pipe D= 3.2 cm =____________

• Density of water to given temp, ρ=_______gm/cm3

• viscosity of water at given temp, μ=_______gm/cm-sec

• Cross Sectional area of pipe=_____cm2

• Area of collecting tank A=________ cm2

Observation Table: -

Sr.

No.

Discharge Measurement

Observed Flow

Pattern

Initial Height

H1 (cm)

Final Height

H2 (cm)

Time

(sec)

Computation sheet: -

Sr.

No.

Velocity

v=Q/A

(m/sec)

Reynolds No.

NRe= ρvd/µ

Flow Pattern Based On

Reynolds No.

Prepared by: Prof.M. Dhangar, Lecturer, N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 262: industrial chemical technology

Calculation steps: -

Cross sectional Area (i.e. flow area) of pipe a=(π /4) x d2

Volumetric flow rate = volume of water collected in collecting tank/time

Q = (H2-H1) x A / t where, H2= initial height in collection tank

H1= initial height in collection tank

t = time of collection of fluid in Collecting tank

Velocity of fluid (water) v = Q/A where, v = velocity of fluid Q = discharge

A = c/s. of pipe

Reynold’s No. NRe = ρvd / µ where, ρ = density of fluid

v = velocity of fluid

d = dia. Of pipe

µ = viscosity of fluid

If NRe < 2100 it is laminar flow

If NRe > 4000 it is turbulent flow

If 2100 < NRe > 4000 it is transition flow

Prepared by: Prof.M. Dhangar, Lecturer, N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 263: industrial chemical technology

A Long Term Training Program Chemical Engineering Department  N. G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli 

Nodal Institute  Experiment: Rotameter Staff: Mr. M. B. Dhangar                                                      

Objective: To calibrate the Rota meter for water system. Apparatus: Arrangement of cooling water / ion exchanger unit with rotameter. Theory: Rota meter essentially consists of tapered glass tube and float along with scale meter in tube set vertically in a piping system with its range and end at top and small at bottom. Float: Rota meter scale be marked on which have density higher then liquid than can be made corrosion to any metal like Al, Ni, SS. Rota meter scale: Scale can be marked on glass or it is mounted on to the measuring tube. A direct reading type is used to give the actual reading. Various shapes of floats are as follows. Procedure:

• An assembly of cooling tower / Ion exchanger unit with Rota meter arrangement.. Set the float of Rota meter arrangement up to LPM and take water in beaker of 1 min by using stop watch.

• Measure the volume by collecting in a measuring cylinder and compare it with actual flow rate of Rota meter.

• Repeat the same procedure for other flow rates. Result: Conclusion:

Prepared by: Prof.M. Dhangar, Lecturer, N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 264: industrial chemical technology

Observation table: Sr. No.

Flow rate by measuring cylinder

(LPM)

Actual flow rate measured by Rota meter

(LPM)

Error in (LPM)

% Error

Calculation: % Error = error________ X 100 Rota meter Flow rate

Prepared by: Prof.M. Dhangar, Lecturer, N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 265: industrial chemical technology

A Long Term Training Program Chemical Engineering Department  N. G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli 

Nodal Institute  

Experiment: U Tube Manometer Staff: Mr. M. B. Dhangar                                                               Objective : - To measure the differential pressure across two points in a pipe, for a

fluid flowing through it.

Apparatus : - U-Tube manometer connected across two points of a pipe, stopwatch,

container, and scale.

Theory : - Manometer is a simple device used for measuring pressure differences. A U-

Tube manometer is the simplest form of manometer. It consists of a small diameter U-

Shaped tube of glass. The U-Tube is clamped on a wooden board. Between the two

arms the manometer, scale is fixed on the same board. The U-Tube is partially filled

with a manometric fluid, which is heavier than the process fluid. The two limbs of the

manometer are connected by the tubing to the taps between which the pressure drop is

to be measured. Air vent valves are provided at the end of the each arm for removal of

trapped air in the arm. The manometric fluid is mercury. U-Tube manometer filled with

manometric fluid up to certain height. The remaining portion of the U-Tube if filled

with process fluid / flowing fluid of density p including the tubing. The one limb of the

manometer is connected to the downstream tap in the pipeline between which the

pressure difference P1 – P2 is required to the measured. Air if any is there in the line of

the manometer should be removed. At steady state, for a given flow rate, the reading of

the manometer i.e. difference in the level of the manometric fluid in two arms is

measured and it give the value of pressure difference in terms of manometric fluid

across the taps.

Prepared by: Prof.M. Dhangar, Lecturer, N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 266: industrial chemical technology

Experimental Set Up : - Figure Shows a U-Tube manometer that is connected

across a pipeline. There are two gauge points. One gauge point is at the junction of the

pipe before the hindrance in the pipeline and the other gauge points is after the

hindrance. Manometer tapping are done from their gauge points & connected to a

differential manometric head having a U-Tube manometer fixed on a measuring scale.

Flow through the pipeline is controlled with the help of a valve and the fluid is collected

in a collection tank.

Procedure: -

1.With the help of the regulating valve, adjust the rate of flow through pipe

so as to get maximum possible differences in the manometer liquid levels.

2.Note the reading of the right limp & the left limp of the manometer. With

the help of the stopwatch note the time taken for a specific volume of water

collected in the measuring tank.

3.Vary the flow rate and take more reading.

Observation : -

1. Area of a measuring tank =

2. Density of Manometric fluid =

3. Density of Process fluid =

Prepared by: Prof.M. Dhangar, Lecturer, N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 267: industrial chemical technology

Observation Table : -

Sr.

No.

Left Limb

h1

(cm)

Right Limb

h2

(cm)

Difference

Δh=h2-h1

(cm)

Differential Pressure

ΔP =∆hg(ρM-ρ)

(N/m2)

Calculation : Δh=_________________ m

ρM = _________________ kg/m3

ρ =__________________kg/m3

g = 9.81 m/sec2

Δh=

Result : -

Prepared by: Prof.M. Dhangar, Lecturer, N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 268: industrial chemical technology

A Long Term Training Program Chemical Engineering Department  N. G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli 

Nodal Institute  Experiment: Rectangular and V notch Staff: Mr. M. B. Dhangar                                                               Objective:- Determination of discharge coefficients of discharge of

(i) V-notch

(ii) Rectangular notch

Equipment :- A constant steady water supply tank (Notch tank) with

baffles wall, pointer gauge, collecting tank, models of

(i) v-notch

(ii) Rectangular notch

Introduction and Theory :- Different types of models are available to find discharge in an open channel as a

notch, venturiflume, weir etc. For calibration of rectangular notch, Trapezoidal

notch or v-notch some flow is allowed in the flume. Once the flow becomes

steady and uniform discharge coefficients can be determined for any model. In

general, sharp crested notches are preferred where highly accurate discharge

measurements are required, for example in hydraulic laboratories, industry and

irrigation pilot schemes which do not carry derbies and sediments.

Notches are those overflow structures whose length of crest in the direction of

flow is accurately shaped. They may be rectangular, trapezoidal, v-notch etc. The

v-notch is one of the most precise discharge-measuring devices suitable for a

wide range of flow.

A triangular or v notch is having a triangular or ‘v’ shaped opening provided in its

body so that water is discharged through this opening only. The line which

Prepared by: Prof.M. Dhangar, Lecturer, N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 269: industrial chemical technology

bisects the angle of the notch should be vertical and at the same distance from

both sides of the channel. The discharge coefficients Cd of a V notch may be

determined by applying formula:

Cd = ________Q____________ (8/15)(√ 2g) H5/2 tan θ/2

Where, Q =discharge over a triangular notch,

θ = the apex angle of notch,

H = head over the crest of the notch.

A rectangular notch, symmetrically located in a vertical thin plate, which is placed

perpendicular to the sides and the bottom of a straight channel, is defined as a

rectangular sharp-crested weirs. The discharge coefficient Cd of a rectangular

notch may be determined by applying formula:

Cd= _____Q______ 2/3(√2g) B H3/2

Where,

Q = Discharge over a rectangular notch,

B = Width of notch,

H= Head over the crest of the notch, and g is

acceleration due to gravity. Experimental setup: - The experimental set up consists of a tank where inlet section is provided with 2

nos. of baffles for streamline flow. While at the upstream portion of the tank one

can fix a notch of rectangular notch, trapezoidal notch or ‘v’-notch. A hook gauge

is used to measure the head of water over the model. A collecting tank is used to

find the actual discharge through the notch.

Prepared by: Prof.M. Dhangar, Lecturer, N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 270: industrial chemical technology

Experimental Procedures: - • Position the notch under test at the end of the tank, in a vertical

plane, and with the sharp edge on the upstream side.

• Fill the tank with water up to the crest level and subsequently note

down the crest level of the notch by the help of the point gauge.

• Adjust the flow regulating valve to give the maximum possible

discharge without flooding the notch.

• Allow the conditions to attain steady state.

• Measure the head over the notch, i.e.’H2’ with the help of point

gauge.

• Reduce the flow rate in stages and the readings of discharge and

H2 were taken.

• Repeat the procedure for other type of notch.

Prepared by: Prof.M. Dhangar, Lecturer, N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 271: industrial chemical technology

OBSERVATION & COMPUTATION SHEET:- [A] TRIANGULAR OR ‘V’ NOTCH :

Apex angle of notch θ =

Crest level of ‘V’ notch, H1 =

Area of collecting tank, A =

Sr. No.

Discharge Measurement Final reading of water level above

the notch H2 (cm)

Head over

notch H=H2-H1

Cd

Initial h1,(cm)

Finial h2(cm)

Time

T (sec)

Discharge

Q (cm3/sec)

Calculations steps :-

1) Discharge, Q= Area of collecting tank, a x (Final,h2-Initial,h1) Time,t

2) Head over notch, H=H2-H1

3) Co-efficient of discharge, Cd = ________Q____________

(8/15)(√ 2g) H5/2 tan θ/2

Prepared by: Prof.M. Dhangar, Lecturer, N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 272: industrial chemical technology

Graphical Method: - Equation fro flow rate is:

Q = 8/15 Cd (√ 2g) H5/2 tan θ/2

Taking log for both sides of above equation,

log Q = log [(8/15) Cd (√ 2g) tan θ/2] +5/2 log H.

Which is a straight-line equation similar to y=mx + C.

Where, y= log Q, x= log H, m= 5/2,

c= log [(8/15) Cd (√ 2g) tan θ/2].

log Q 5/2

c

log H

Plot the graph as explained above using log Q &log H

data, read value of c from graph and find value of Cd

graphically using following equation,

Cd = 10c .

8/15 (√ 2g) tan θ/2

Prepared by: Prof.M. Dhangar, Lecturer, N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 273: industrial chemical technology

[B] RECTANGULAR NOTCH:

Width of rectangular notch, B =

Crest level of rectangular notch, H =

Area of collecting tank, a =

Sr. No.

Discharge Measurement Final reading of water level above

the notch H2 (cm)

Head over

notch H=H2-H1

Cd

Initial h1,(cm)

Finial h2(cm)

Time

T (sec)

Discharge

Q (cm3/sec)

Calculations steps :-

1) Discharge, Q= Area of collecting tank, a*(Initial h2-final, h1)/Time, t

2) Head over notch, H=H 2 - H 1

3) Co-efficient of discharge, Cd= _____Q______ 2/3(√2g) B H3/2

Prepared by: Prof.M. Dhangar, Lecturer, N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 274: industrial chemical technology

Graphical Method: - Equation for flow rate is:

Q = 2/3 B Cd (√ 2g) H3/2

Taking log for both sides of above equation,

log Q = log [(2/3) Cd (√ 2g) B] +3/2 log H.

Which is a straight-line equation similar to y=mx + C.

Where, y= log Q, x= log H, m= 3/2,

c= log [(2/3) Cd (√ 2g) B].

log Q 3/2

c

log H

Plot the graph as explained above using log Q &log H

data, read value of c from graph & find value of Cd graphically using following equation,

Cd = 10c___

2/3 (√ 2g)B

Prepared by: Prof.M. Dhangar, Lecturer, N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 275: industrial chemical technology

Result: -

‘V’ Notch Recatngular

Notch

Co efficient of

Discharge(Analytically)

Co efficient of

Discharge(Graphically)

Conclusion: -

Prepared by: Prof.M. Dhangar, Lecturer, N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 276: industrial chemical technology

Page 1                                                                                                                                               Prepared By: JMV 

NODAL INSTITUTE N. G. PATEL POLYTECHNIC

LONG TERM TRAINING PROGRAMME ON INDUSTRIAL CHEMICAL TECHNOLOGY (MODULE-I)

MTT Lecture-1 Introduction

Mass transfer is the net movement of mass from one location to other. Some common examples of mass transfer processes are the evaporation of water from a

pond to the atmosphere, the diffusion of chemical impurities in lakes, rivers, and oceans from natural or artificial point sources, separation of chemical components in distillation columns. In cooling towers, hot water flows down over the fill material as air flows up and contact between water and air evaporates some of the water. Evaporation requires heat; the heat is removed from the remaining water lowering its temperature.

Day-by-Day experiences also involve MT: A lump of sugar added to a cup of coffee eventually dissolves and then eventually

diffuses to make the concentration uniform. Water evaporates from ponds to increase the humidity of passing-air-stream A perfume presents a pleasant fragrance which is imparted throughout the surrounding

atmosphere.

Why Mass is Transfered? The random motion of molecules causes a net transfer of mass from an area of high

concentration to an area of low concentration. The driving force for mass transfer is a difference in concentration

Mass transfer operations – nature of interface between phases

Gas-liquid contact e.g. absorption, evaporation, distillation etc Liquid-liquid contact e.g. extraction Liquid-solid contact e.g. crystallization, adsorption Gas-solid contact e.g. adsorption, drying etc

Methods of operation

Non steady state – concentration changes with time e.g. batch processes Steady state Stage Differential contact

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 277: industrial chemical technology

Page 2                                                                                                                                               Prepared By: JMV 

Mass transfer operation In every mass transfer operation mass is transferred from one phase to another phase.

Distillation(G/L)-Gas to Liquid & Liquid to Gas Gas Absorption(G/L)-Gas to Liquid Desorption(L/G)-Liquid to Gas Extraction(L/L)-Liquid to Liquid Leaching(L/S)-Liquid to Solid Crystallization(L/S)-Liquid to Solid Drying(S/G)-Solid to Gas Adsorption(F/S)-Fluid to solid

Distillation

Distillation is a method of separating mixtures based on differences in their volatilities in a boiling liquid mixture. Distillation is a unit operation, or a physical separation process, and not a chemical reaction.

It is used to separate crude oil into more fractions for specific uses such as transport, power generation and heating. Type of Distillation column

There are many types of distillation columns, each designed to perform specific types of separations, and each design differs in terms of complexity. Batch and Continuous Columns

Batch Columns In batch operation, the feed to the column is introduced batch-wise. That is, the column is charged with a 'batch' and then the distillation process is carried out. When the desired task is achieved, a next batch of feed is introduced.

Continuous Columns In contrast, continuous columns process a continuous feed stream.

No interruptions occur unless there is a problem with the column or surrounding process units. They are capable of handling high throughputs and are the most common of the two types. Concentration does not change with time.

Gas Absorption

Gas absorption (also known as scrubbing) is an operation in which a gas mixture is contacted with a liquid for the purpose of preferentially dissolving one or more components of the gas mixture and to provide a solution of them in the liquid.

We will focus on the analysis for gas absorption, for the simple case whereby only one component of the gas solute is being absorbed. The other components of the gas are assumed to be non-soluble in the liquid (i.e. the other gas components are inert components),

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 278: industrial chemical technology

Page 3                                                                                                                                               Prepared By: JMV 

The liquid is non-volatile, which means that there is no transfer of molecules from the liquid to the gas phase.

In addition, we assume there is no chemical reaction in the system and that it is operating at isothermal condition.

The process of gas absorption thus involves the diffusion of solute from the gas phase through a stagnant or non-diffusing liquid.

There are 2 types of absorption processes: physical absorption and chemical absorption, depending on whether there is any chemical reaction.

Liquid-Liquid Extraction

Liquid-liquid extraction, also known as solvent extraction and partitioning, is a method to separate compounds based on their relative solubility in two different immiscible liquids, usually water and an organic solvent. It is an extraction of a substance from one liquid phase into another liquid phase. Liquid-liquid extraction is a basic technique in chemical laboratories, where it is performed using a separatory funnel. This type of process is commonly performed after a chemical reaction as part of the work-up.

Solvent extraction is used in nuclear reprocessing, ore processing, the production of fine organic compounds, the processing of perfumes, and other industries.

Example: Acetic Acid &Water/Isopropyl ether(Solvent)

Adsorption Adsorption is the adhesion of atoms, ions, biomolecules or molecules of gas, liquid, or

dissolved solids to a surface. This process creates a film of the adsorbate (the molecules or atoms being accumulated) on the surface of the adsorbent. It differs from absorption, in which a fluid permeates or is dissolved by a liquid or solid. The term sorption encompasses both processes, while desorption is the reverse of adsorption.

The most common industrial adsorbents are activated carbon, silica gel, and alumina, because they present enormous surface areas per unit weight.

Used in many industrial processes: dehumidification odour/colour/taste removal gas pollutant removal (H2S) water softening and deionisation hydrocarbon fractionation pharmaceutical purification

Nature of Adsorbents

Porous material - Large surface area per unit mass – size, shape, polarity cause certain particles to be held more strongly in these pores than others

Rate of mass transfer is dependent on the void fraction within the pores

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 279: industrial chemical technology

Page 4                                                                                                                                               Prepared By: JMV 

Granular (50μm - 12 mm diameter) Suitable for packed bed use

Types of Adsorption

Physical Adsorption ◦ Result of intermolecular forces causing preferential binding of certain substances

to certain adsorbents ◦ Reversible by addition of heat (via steam, hot inert gas, oven) ◦ Attachment to the outer layer of adsorbent material

Chemisorption ◦ Result of chemical interaction ◦ Large amount heat released ◦ Irreversible ◦ Mainly found in catalysis

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 280: industrial chemical technology

ANCHOR INSTITUTE – N. G. PATEL POLYTECHNIC Module – I (Mass transfer operations)

Lecture – I (Mr. R. M. Patel) Date: 10-10-2010

FUNAMENTALS OF MASS TRANSFER

1. Fick’s Law: The rate of mass transfer is directly proportional to the concentration gradient, dCA/dz (concentration difference divided by time). This law is called Fick’s Law for z direction. The proportionality constant, DAB is called Diffusivity. Rate or molar Flux is of two types:

i. Flux relative to a fixed location, NA ii. Flux relative to the average molar velocity of all components, JA.

The unit of both fluxes is mol/(time.Area).

)1(. −−−−−−−−−−=dz

dCDJ AABA

JA is the called relative flux when all components are moving. For a given system having two components A and B, DAB =DBA. 2. Relationship between NA and JA:

)2(−−−−−−−−−−−+= AAA JNxN Where, NA molar flux relative to a fixed location, The mole fraction, xA = CA/C (i.e. concentration of component A / Total concentration of all components). If two components A and B are flowing with same rate but in opposite direction, JA=-JB, CA+CB=constant, DAB =DBA If two components A and B are flowing with same rate but in same direction, JA=JB, CA+CB=constant, DAB =DBA 3. Steady State diffusion molecular diffusion of NA and NB in z-direction:

)3()/())/(()/())/((ln

1

2 −−−−−−−−−−⎥⎦

⎤⎢⎣

⎡−+−+

+=

CCNNNCCNNN

zCD

NNNN

ABAA

ABAAAB

AA

AA

Considering molecular diffusion of gases (Ideal Gas) and substituting the following into equation (3),

AT

AA yPP

CC

== and RTP

VnC T==

)4())/(())/((ln

1

2 −−−−−−−−−−⎥⎦

⎤⎢⎣

⎡−+−+

+=

ABAA

ABAATAB

AA

AA yNNN

yNNNRTz

PDNN

NN

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 281: industrial chemical technology

where,

AP = partial pressure of component A in gas

TP = Total pressure of gas mixture R is universal gas constant T is absolute temperature of gas

1Ay mole fraction of component A at location z=1

2Ay mole fraction of component A at location z=2 4. Steady state diffusion of A through non-diffusing B:

0=BN and 1=+ BAA NNN

)5()( 21,

−−−−−−−−−−−−−= AAMB

TABA PP

PRTzPDN

where, )/ln( 12

12,

BB

BBMB PP

PPP −=

5. Steady state equimolal diffusion of both A and B:

BA NN −= and ∞=+ BAA NNN

)6()( 21 −−−−−−−−−−−−−= AAAB

A PPRTzDN

6. Mass transfer coefficient, k: Flux = (coefficient)(concentration difference) Since, different ways are there to present concentrations, the mass transfer coefficient will also be f various types. Mass transfer coefficient for steady state diffusion of A through non-diffusing B:

1

1

B

A

PP

2AP

2BP

Distance, z

TP TP

1

1

B

A

P

P

2BP

2AP

Distance, z

TP TP

Diffusion of A through stagnant B Equimolal counter diffusion

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 282: industrial chemical technology

Mole fraction of A in gas = yA

Mole fraction of A in liquid = xA

Equilibrium-distribution curve of solute between a gas and liquid phase at constant temperature

0=BN and 1=+ BAA NNN )()()( 212121 AACAAyAAGA CCkyykPPkN −=−=−= ……………..(for gases)

)()( 2121 AALAAxA CCkxxkN −=−= ……………………………….(for liquids) Mass transfer coefficient for steady state equimolal counter diffusion of A and B:

BA NN −= and ∞=+ BAA NNN )()()( 212121 AACAAyAAGA CCkyykPPkN −′=−′=−′= ……………..(for gases)

)()( 2121 AALAAxA CCkxxkN −′=−′= ……………………………….(for liquids) 7. Relationship of DAB and mass transfer coefficient k: According to Film theory, mass transfer coefficient is directly proportional to square root of mass diffusivity.

5.0ABDkα

8. Interphase mass transfer:

When mass transfer occurs between two phases it is called interphase mass transfer. When the molecules are transferring from one phase to another but if the net transfer of all the molecules is zero, this condition is called dynamic equilibrium. The concentration measured at the condition of equilibrium or dynamic equilibrium is called equilibrium concentration of component A in both phases (xA and yA in both phases). The equilibrium distribution of a solute between a gas and liquid phase at constant temperature is as shown in figure below (Equilibrium curve).

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 283: industrial chemical technology

9. Diffusion between two phases:

kx and ky are the liquid- and gas-phase mass transfer coefficients, Kx and Ky are the liquid- and gas-phase overall mass transfer coefficients [kmol m–2 s–1], NA* is the molar flux [kmol m–2 s–1], xs is the equilibrium mole fraction of the liquid at the interface, x∞ is the mole fraction of the bulk liquid, x* is the mole fraction of the liquid in equilibrium with the bulk gas, ys is the equilibrium mole fraction of the gas at the interface, y∞ is the mole fraction of the bulk gas, and y* is the mole fraction of the gas in equilibrium with the bulk liquid

Equilibrium curve

P

M

D

C

y∞

ys

y*

x∞ xs x*

Slope = -kx/ky

Slope = m”

Slope = m’

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 284: industrial chemical technology

Hence, from the above graph, the relationship between overall mass transfer coefficient (Ky) and individual phase mass transfer coefficient of liquid phase (kx) and gas phase (ky) can be found as,

xyy km

kK′

+=11 and

xyx kkmK111

+′′

= .

MATERIAL BALANCE IN MASS TRANSFER

1. Steady state co-current processes: Let E and R be two insoluble phases. Considering only one component solute A diffusing from R to E. The other components of the E and R, i.e. solvent of the phases are considered non-diffusing. R1 mole / time of total substance, consisting of non-diffusing solvent RS mole / time and diffusing solute A. concentration of A in R1 is x1 mole fraction. As phase R moves through equipment, A diffuses to phase E as a result of which total R falls to R2 moles / time at the exit and the concentration of A falls to mole fraction x2. But RS mole / time do not change and remains same as entrance. R1 mole / time of total substance, consisting of non-diffusing solvent RS mole / time and diffusing solute A. concentration of A in R1 is x1 mole fraction. Similarly, phase E at entrance contains E1 moles / time total substance. ES moles / time is non-diffusing solvent and concentration of A is y1 mole fraction. Due to transfer of A

R1 moles total material / time RS moles of non-diffusing material / time ,x1 mole fraction solute X1 mole ratio solute

E1 moles total material / time ES moles of non-diffusing material / time ,y1 mole fraction solute Y1 mole ratio solute

I II

E ES ,y Y

E2 ES ,y2

Y2

R RS ,x X

R2 RS ,x2

X2

B

B

Steady state cocurrent processes

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 285: industrial chemical technology

from R to E, the concentration of A increases to y2 and moles of E increases to E2 at exit of equipment. The solvent ES remains constant during the process. Mass balance of component A over envelope I: Amount of A entering with phase E = E1y1 Amount of A entering with phase R = R1x1 Amount of A leaving with phase E = E2y2 Amount of A leaving with phase R = R2x2 At steady state: Amount of substance in = Amount of substance out Hence,

)9(1

,

)8()7(

11

111

11222211

22221111

−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−=−

=

−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−=−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−+=+

XRx

xRxRbut

yEyExRxRyExRyExR

SS

where, X1 is moles A/moles non-A (moles solute/moles solvent) )10()()( 1221 −−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−=− YYEXXR SS

This equation 10, is an equation of a straight line on X, Y coordinates with slope = -RS /ES. Mass balance of component A over envelope II: Similarly, at section B-B, a general equation can be found for any concentration of A in E and R as

)12()()(

)11()()(

11

11

−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−

=−

−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−=−

XXERYY

YYEXXR

S

S

SS

Equation 12, is also equation of a straight line and the line drawn using the above equation is called the operating line of system (Line QP in figure below).

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 286: industrial chemical technology

The operating line above equilibrium curve is for transfer of A from E to R and below the equilibrium curve is for transfer of A from R to E

Q

Q

P

X1 X2 Xe X2*

Ye Y2*

Concentration in phase E, moles A / moles non-A = Y

Concentration in phase R, moles A / moles non-A = X

Y2

Y1

Equilibrium curve, Yi = f(Xi)

Operating line = -RS/ES (transfer from R to E)

K, interfacial concentration

Steady state cocurrent process, transfer of solute from phase R to phase E

Operating line = -RS/ES (transfer from E to R)

P

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 287: industrial chemical technology

2. Steady state counter-current processes: Mass balance of component A over envelope I:

)14()()()13(

2121

22111122

−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−=−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−+=+

YYEXXRxRyExRyE

SS

Mass balance of component A over envelope II:

)17()()(

)16()()()15(

11

11

1111

−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−=−

−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−=−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−+=+

XXER

YY

YYEXXRRxyExREy

S

S

SS

The equation (17), is the equation of straight line on X, Y coordinates and is called equation of operating line for counter current processes (as shown in figure below). The operating line above equilibrium curve is for transfer of A from E to R and below the equilibrium curve is for transfer of A from R to E in figure below.

R1 moles total material / time RS moles of non-diffusing material / time ,x1 mole fraction solute X1 mole ratio solute

E1 moles total material / time ES moles of non-diffusing material / time ,y1 mole fraction solute Y1 mole ratio solute

I II

E ES ,y Y

E2 ES ,y2

Y2

R RS ,x X

R2 RS ,x2

X2

B

B

Steady state countercurrent processes

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 288: industrial chemical technology

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 289: industrial chemical technology

MTT

Prepared By: JMV

NODAL INSTITUTE N. G. PATEL POLYTECHNIC

LONG TERM TRAINING PROGRAMME ON INDUSTRIAL CHEMICAL TECHNOLOGY (MODULE-I)

MTT Lecture-3

Drying

Drying is a mass transfer process consisting of the removal of water moisture or moisture from another solvent, by evaporation from a solid, semi-solid or liquid (hereafter product). To be considered "drying", the final product must be a solid, either as a continuous sheet (e.g., paper), as long pieces (e.g., wood), particles (cereal grains, corn flakes) or in powder form (sand, salt, washing powder, milk powder). To achieve this, there must be a source of heat, and a sink of the vapor thus produced. In bioproducts (food, grains, vaccines), and pharmaceuticals, the solvent to be removed is almost invariably water.

In the most common case, a gas stream, e.g., air, applies the heat by convection and carries away the vapor as humidity. Other possibilities are vacuum drying, where heat is supplied by conduction or radiation (or microwaves) while the vapor thus produced is removed by the vacuum system. Another indirect technique is drum drying (used, for instance, for manufacturing potato flakes), where a heated surface is used to provide the energy and aspirators draw the vapor outside the room.

Crystallization

Crystallization is the (natural or artificial) process of formation of solid crystals precipitating from a solution, melt or more rarely deposited directly from a gas. Crystallization is also a chemical solid-liquid separation technique, in which mass transfer of a solute from the liquid solution to a pure solid crystalline phase occurs.

The crystallization process consists of two major events, nucleation and crystal growth. Nucleation is the step where the solute molecules dispersed in the solvent start to gather into clusters, on the nanometer scale (elevating solute concentration in a small region), that becomes stable under the current operating conditions. These stable clusters constitute the nuclei. However when the clusters are not stable, they redissolve. Therefore, the clusters need to reach a critical size in order to become stable nuclei. Such critical size is dictated by the operating conditions (temperature, supersaturation, etc.). It is at the stage of nucleation that the atoms arrange in a defined and periodic manner that defines the crystal structure — note that "crystal structure" is a special term that refers to the relative arrangement of the atoms, not the macroscopic properties of the crystal (size and shape), although those are a result of the internal crystal structure.

The crystal growth is the subsequent growth of the nuclei that succeed in achieving the critical cluster size. Nucleation and growth continue to occur simultaneously while the

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 290: industrial chemical technology

MTT

Prepared By: JMV

supersaturation exists. Supersaturation is the driving force of the crystallization, hence the rate of nucleation and growth is driven by the existing supersaturation in the solution. Depending upon the conditions, either nucleation or growth may be predominant over the other, and as a result, crystals with different sizes and shapes are obtained (control of crystal size and shape constitutes one of the main challenges in industrial manufacturing, such as for pharmaceuticals). Once the supersaturation is exhausted, the solid-liquid system reaches equilibrium and the crystallization is complete, unless the operating conditions are modified from equilibrium so as to supersaturate the solution again.

Leaching

In general, leaching is the extraction of certain materials from a carrier into a liquid (usually, but not always a solvent). Specifically, it may refer to:

• Leaching (agriculture), the loss of water-soluble plant nutrients from the soil; or applying a small amount of excess irrigation to avoid soil salinity

• Leaching (chemical science), the process of extracting minerals from a solid by dissolving them in a liquid

• Leaching (metallurgy), a widely used extractive metallurgy technique which converts metals into soluble salts in aqueous media

o Dump leaching, an industrial process to extract metals from ore taken directly from the mine and stacked on the leach pad without crushing

o Heap leaching, an industrial process to extract metals from ore which has been crushed into small chunks

o Tank leaching, a hydrometallurgical method of extracting valuable material from ore

o In-situ leaching, a process of recovering minerals such as copper and uranium through boreholes drilled into the deposit

• Leaching (pedology), the loss of mineral and organic solutes due to percolation from soil

• Bioleaching, the extraction of specific metals from their ores through the use of bacteria

• In cooking, leaching generally refers to Parboiling.

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 291: industrial chemical technology

MTT

Prepared By: JMV

Tray Dryer

A tray Dryer is an enclosed insulated chamber in which trays are placed on top of each other in trolleys. Tray Dryer are used where heating and drying are essential parts of manufacturing process in industries such as Chemicals, Dye stuff, Pharmaceutical, Food Products, Colours etc. The material to be dried either wet or solids are placed in the trays. Heat transfer is by circulation of hot air by electric heaters or steam in radiator coils. Blower fans are installed inside to ensure proper circulation and transfer of heat. A control panel to control the temperature and other parameters is fixed outside the dryer. These dryers are available in Mild Steel, Stainless Steel or construction. Tray dryer is used for drying of pigments, food, bakery, electrodes, chemical and plastic powders. DESCRIPTION: The Drying ovens are normally available with choice of heating mode, as electrically heated / steam heated & thermic fluid heated. In electrically heated model, digital temperature controller provided with digital timer to facilitate working day and night. In steam & thermic fluid heated model, digital temperature indicator is provided with digital timer , but the temperature controller is not supplied with the machine. AIR CIRCULATION A highly effective recirculating air system is provided. The heated air, is recirculated with fresh air in selected proportions for optimum drying. The system is designed so that the materials at the top & the bottom dry simultaneously. Uniform air circulation, controlled temperature, sturdy construction and large working space are the valuables of the oven which is suitably designed to cover wide temperature range, loading and unloading is faster and simple. In higher capacities trays trolley rolls in and out of the chamber. For continuous operation a spare trolley can be had for loading while the drying cycle is taking place. CONTROLLED TEMPERATURE & TIME Digital temperature controller with digital timer are supplied to facilitate working day and night.

Rotary Dryer 

Rotary dryers which are generally used in various industries, especially in the mineral industry. In mineral industry, the equipment is used for drying commodity such as clay, kaolin, gypsum, mineral sand, limestone, potash and silica sand. This equipment is suitable for evaporating and drying of wide range of material of variegated sizes and composition. To lift, distribute and transport the material some internal lifters or flights are used. We offer co-current direct-heat rotary dryer which is the most common equipment available in the market. In this equipment, the initial heat transfer level is very high which creates a considerable drop in temperature and prevents over heating of the dryer as well as the material. Apart from this, counter current dryers that we provide are ideal for the materials that need to be dried to very low moisture contents. It is further helps for the material in which last traces of moisture are hard to remove.

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 292: industrial chemical technology

MTT

Prepared By: JMV

Other details of the equipment are mentioned below:

• Consist of a relatively long cylindrical shell • The shell ranges from 0. 6 to 5 m in diameter and from 5 to 30 m long • It is supported by two riding rings running on a set of rollers (rotation speed up to

25 rpm) • The shell is slightly inclined from the horizontal and the slope enables material to

move from the feed to the discharge end under gravity • Feed rate ranges from less than 1 tonne to 500 tonnes per hour • the internal flights produce a shower, or cascade, of wet feed material through the

hot gas stream • This promotes evaporation of the moisture and breaks up lumps to produce a

more uniformly dried material • The hot air is introduced either at the feed end such that it moves in the same

direction as the material (co-current) or at the discharge end such that it moves in the opposite direction (counter-current)

• While coming in contact with the highest temperature and extremely hot gas stream, the surface moisture of the wet material get evaporated

• As the wet material progresses through the dryer, heat energy is lost to the material it is drying and it leaves the dryer at a comparatively low temperature

• The moisture content can be readily controlled when the final dried product is discharged with the gas stream at its lowest temperature

Application:

The wet slurry comes in contact with the hottest drying gases which is supplied from an external source and the heat transfer is done by convection. This equipment find application in the production process of the following products:

• floatation concentrates • coal/coke • clays, phosphates • suifilter cakes • minerals, fertilizers • beet pulp • germ, stillage • sludges • animal feeds

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 293: industrial chemical technology

MTT

Prepared By: JMV

[1]

Heavy Duty Rotary Dryer Drum• 3/8" steel construction for most

models • Reinforcement bands

[2]

Internal Rotary Dryer Lifters• Heavy-duty lifters • Designed specifically for each

application • Welded or boltable

[3]

Rotary Dryer Riding Rings• Specially forged rings for

durability • Machined for precision • Wedge system for alignment

[4]

Rotary Dryer Trunnion Rollers• Specially forged rollers and

treated for durability • Heavy-duty shaft • Large pillow block bearings

[8] Combustion Chamber (optional)• Refractory lined • Adjustable air vent • Burner mounting plate

[9] Rotary Dryer Discharge Chute • Off gas connection • Discharge chute • Cleanout removable door

[10] Rotary Dryer Discharge Seals • High temperature seals

[11] Rotary Dryer Support Frame • Unitized frame • Allows for installation on

concrete piers

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 294: industrial chemical technology

MTT

Prepared By: JMV

• Adjustable bases

[5]

Rotary Dryer Thrust Wheel• Engineered design for strength • Built to last with low

maintenance • Forged wheel

[6]

Rotary Dryer Drive • Heavy-duty chain and sprocket • Spur gear set (optional) • Drive guard • Reduction unit with direct-

coupled motor

[7]

Rotary Dryer Feed Chute • Standard unit allows for direct

burner mounting • Natural gas or oil burners

(optional)

[12]

Rotary Dryer Modular Frame (optional)

• Adjustable frame • Adjustable slope • (Also available mounted on

portable chassis)

[13]

Rotary Dryer Burner System • Natural gas or oil • Complete system with

controls and safety • Sized for each application

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 295: industrial chemical technology

MTT

Prepared By: JMV

Cooling tower

Cooling towers are heat removal devices used to transfer process waste heat to the atmosphere. Cooling towers may either use the evaporation of water to remove process heat and cool the working fluid to near the wet-bulb air temperature or rely solely on air to cool the working fluid to near the dry-bulb air temperature. Common applications include cooling the circulating water used in oil refineries, chemical plants, power stations and building cooling. The towers vary in size from small roof-top units to very large hyperboloid structures that can be up to 200 metres tall and 100 metres in diameter, or rectangular structures that can be over 40 metres tall and 80 metres long. Smaller towers are normally factory-built, while larger ones are constructed on site. They are often associated with nuclear power plants in popular culture.

Industrial cooling towers

Industrial cooling towers can be used to remove heat from various sources such as machinery or heated process material. The primary use of large, industrial cooling towers is to remove the heat absorbed in the circulating cooling water systems used in power plants, petroleum refineries, petrochemical plants, natural gas processing plants, food processing plants, semi-conductor plants, and for other industrial facilities such as in condensers of distillation columns, for cooling liquid in crystallization, etc. The circulation rate of cooling water in a typical 700 MW coal-fired power plant with a cooling tower amounts to about 71,600 cubic metres an hour (315,000 U.S. gallons per minute) and the circulating water requires a supply water make-up rate of perhaps 5 percent (i.e., 3,600 cubic metres an hour).

If that same plant had no cooling tower and used once-through cooling water, it would require about 100,000 cubic metres an hour and that amount of water would have to be continuously returned to the ocean, lake or river from which it was obtained and continuously re-supplied to the plant. Furthermore, discharging large amounts of hot water may raise the temperature of the receiving river or lake to an unacceptable level for the local ecosystem. Elevated water temperatures can kill fish and other aquatic organisms. A cooling tower serves to dissipate the heat into the atmosphere instead and wind and air diffusion spreads the heat over a much larger area than hot water can distribute heat in a body of water. Some coal-fired and nuclear power plants located in coastal areas do make use of once-through ocean water. But even there, the offshore discharge water outlet requires very careful design to avoid environmental problems.

Petroleum refineries also have very large cooling tower systems. A typical large refinery processing 40,000 metric tonnes of crude oil per day (300,000 barrels (48,000 m3) per day) circulates about 80,000 cubic metres of water per hour through its cooling tower system.

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 296: industrial chemical technology

MTT

Prepared By: JMV

The world's tallest cooling tower is the 200 metre tall cooling tower of Niederaussem Power Station.

Types of cooling Tower Based on Air flow (Three types):

• Natural draft, which utilizes buoyancy via a tall chimney. Warm, moist air naturally rises due to the density differential to the dry, cooler outside air. Warm moist air is less dense than drier air at the same pressure. This moist air buoyancy produces a current of air through the tower.

• Mechanical draft, which uses power driven fan motors to force or draw air through the tower.

o Induced draft: A mechanical draft tower with a fan at the discharge which pulls air through tower. The fan induces hot moist air out the discharge. This produces low entering and high exiting air velocities, reducing the possibility of recirculation in which discharged air flows back into the air intake. This fan/fin arrangement is also known as draw-through.

o Forced draft: A mechanical draft tower with a blower type fan at the intake. The fan forces air into the tower, creating high entering and low exiting air velocities. The low exiting velocity is much more susceptible to recirculation. With the fan on the air intake, the fan is more susceptible to complications due to freezing conditions. Another disadvantage is that a forced draft design typically requires more motor horsepower than an equivalent induced draft design. The forced draft benefit is its ability to work with high static pressure. They can be installed in more confined spaces and even in some indoor situations. This fan/fill geometry is also known as blow-through.

• Fan assisted natural draft, A hybrid type that appears like a natural draft though airflow is assisted by a fan.

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 297: industrial chemical technology

MTT

Prepared By: JMV

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 298: industrial chemical technology

MTT

Prepared By: JMV

Some commonly used terms in the cooling tower industry 

• Drift - Water droplets that are carried out of the cooling tower with the exhaust air. Drift droplets have the same concentration of impurities as the water entering the tower. The drift rate is typically reduced by employing baffle-like devices, called drift eliminators, through which the air must travel after leaving the fill and spray zones of the tower. Drift can also be reduced by using warmer entering cooling tower temperatures.

• Blow-out - Water droplets blown out of the cooling tower by wind, generally at the air inlet openings. Water may also be lost, in the absence of wind, through splashing or misting. Devices such as wind screens, louvers, splash deflectors and water diverters are used to limit these losses.

• Plume - The stream of saturated exhaust air leaving the cooling tower. The plume is visible when water vapor it contains condenses in contact with cooler ambient air, like the saturated air in one's breath fogs on a cold day. Under certain conditions, a cooling tower plume may present fogging or icing hazards to its surroundings. Note that the water evaporated in the cooling process is "pure" water, in contrast to the very small percentage of drift droplets or water blown out of the air inlets.

• Blow-down - The portion of the circulating water flow that is removed in order to maintain the amount of dissolved solids and other impurities at an acceptable level. It may be noted that higher TDS (total dissolved solids) concentration in

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 299: industrial chemical technology

MTT

Prepared By: JMV

solution results in greater potential cooling tower efficiency. However the higher the TDS concentration, the greater the risk of scale, biological growth and corrosion.

• Leaching - The loss of wood preservative chemicals by the washing action of the water flowing through a wood structure cooling tower.

• Noise - Sound energy emitted by a cooling tower and heard (recorded) at a given distance and direction. The sound is generated by the impact of falling water, by the movement of air by fans, the fan blades moving in the structure, and the motors, gearboxes or drive belts.

• Approach - The approach is the difference in temperature between the cooled-water temperature and the entering-air wet bulb temperature (twb). Since the cooling towers are based on the principles of evaporative cooling, the maximum cooling tower efficiency depends on the wet bulb temperature of the air. The wet-bulb temperature is a type of temperature measurement that reflects the physical properties of a system with a mixture of a gas and a vapor, usually air and water vapor

• Range - The range is the temperature difference between the water inlet and water exit.

• Fill - Inside the tower, fills are added to increase contact surface as well as contact time between air and water. Thus they provide better heat transfer. The efficiency of the tower also depends on them. There are two types of fills that may be used:

o Film type fill (causes water to spread into a thin film) o Splash type fill (breaks up water and interrupts its vertical progress)

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 300: industrial chemical technology

MTT

Prepared By: Jignesh M.Vasoya

NODAL INSTITUTE N. G. PATEL POLYTECHNIC

LONG TERM TRAINING PROGRAMME ON INDUSTRIAL CHEMICAL TECHNOLOGY (MODULE-I)

MTT Lecture-4

GAS ABSORPTION & DESORPTION

Gas absorption (also known as scrubbing) is an operation in which a gas mixture is contacted with a liquid for the purpose of preferentially dissolving one or more components of the gas mixture and to provide a solution of them in the liquid.

Therefore we can see that there is a mass transfer of the component of the gas from the gas phase to the liquid phase. The solute so transferred is said to be absorbed by the liquid.

In gas desorption (or stripping), the mass transfer is in the opposite direction, i.e. from the liquid phase to the gas phase. The principles for both systems are the same.

We will focus on the analysis for gas absorption, for the simple case whereby only one component of the gas solute is being absorbed. The other components of the gas are assumed to be non-soluble in the liquid (i.e. the other gas components are inert components), and the liquid is non-volatile, which means that there is no transfer of molecules from the liquid to the gas phase.

In addition, we assume there is no chemical reaction in the system and that it is operating at isothermal condition.

The process of gas absorption thus involves the diffusion of solute from the gas phase through a stagnant or non-diffusing liquid.

Physical vs. Chemical Absorption

There are 2 types of absorption processes: physical absorption and chemical absorption, depending on whether there is any chemical reaction between the solute and the solvent (absorbent).

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 301: industrial chemical technology

MTT

Prepared By: Jignesh M.Vasoya

When water and hydrocarbon oils are used as absorbents, no significant chemical reactions occur between the absorbent and the solute, and the process is commonly referred to as physical absorption.

When aqueous sodium hydroxide (a strong base) is used as the absorbent to dissolve an acid gas, absorption is accompanied by a rapid and irreversible neutralization reaction in the liquid phase and the process is referred to as chemical absorption or reactive absorption.

More complex examples of chemical absorption are processes for absorbing CO2 and H2S with aqueous solution of mono ethanol amine (MEA), diethanolamine (DEA), diethylene glycol (DEG) or triethylene glycol (TEG), where a reversible chemical reaction takes place in the liquid phase. Chemical reactions can increase the rate of absorption, increase the absorption capacity of the solvent, increase selectivity to preferentially dissolve only certain components of the gas, and convert a hazardous chemical to a safe compound.

Method of Operation

Two methods of contacting the gas and liquid are possible: counter-current operation and co-current operation. We will focus principally on the counter-current gas absorption, as it was widely used in the industry. The main differences between the two configurations will be highlighted. Note that for counter-current operation, the gas enters the column or tower from below as leaves at the top, while liquid enters from the top and flows in opposite direction and exits from the bottom.

We will be concerned primarily with counter-current gas absorption. The gas flows upwards while the liquid flow downwards. Inside the column where there is vapour-liquid contact, mass transfer by absorption occurs, i.e. there is a transfer of solute(s) from the gas phase to the liquid phase.

Absorption Equipment

Absorption and stripping are conducted in tray (or plate or stage) columns, packed columns, spray towers, bubble columns, and centrifugal contactors. In general, operating pressure should be high and temperature low for an absorber, to minimize stage requirements and/or absorbent flow rate to lower the equipment volume required accommodating the gas flow. The reverse is true for stripping. However, the operating pressure should not be too high

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 302: industrial chemical technology

MTT

Prepared By: Jignesh M.Vasoya

and the operating temperature should not be too low as to condense the feed gas.

Tray Column

The types of trays used in absorption include: sieve tray, valve tray and bubble-cap trays. These internals are the same as those covered in "Distillation".

Packed Column

Both random and structured packings had been used. Again, please refer to the topics covered in "Distillation".

Spray Column

The gas flows upward continuously through an open chamber in which scrubbing liquid droplets falls from spray nozzles through the gas. The gas pressure drop is small, but separation is not as good as the bubble column. This column is widely used for its simplicity, low pressure drop, and resistance to scale deposition and plugging.

Bubble Column

The gas is forced under pressure through perforated pipes submerged in the scrubbing liquid. As such the gas phase is dispersed and the liquid phase is continuous. As the bubbles rise through the liquid, absorption of the gas occurs. This type of device suffers from the high pressure drop due to the liquid hydrostatic head.

Integration of absorber and stripper

In practice, absorbers and strippers are often interconnected with one stripper serving several absorbers.

In general, operating pressure should be high and temperature low for an absorber, to minimize stage requirements and/or solvent flow rate and to lower the equipment volume required accommodating the gas flow. Unfortunately, both compression and refrigeration of a gas are expensive. Therefore most absorbers are operated at feed gas pressure, which may be

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 303: industrial chemical technology

MTT

Prepared By: Jignesh M.Vasoya

higher than ambient pressure. Operating temperature is kept low, but not to condense the feed gas.

An amine treating system typical in refineries with one absorber (scrubber) and one regenerator (stripper).

In the absorber, H2S is removed from the incoming sour gas by contacting it with liquid amine (DEA or MEA) in a counter-current manner. The amine solution (known as lean amine) enters the column at the top. The gas leaves the absorber as sweet gas with the H2S removed. The amine solution that leaves the bottom of the column is rich in absorbed H2S (known as rich amine) and is feed to the stripper or regenerator.

In the regenerator, the opposite process takes place whereby H2S is removed from rich amine by counter-current contact with steam. The amine stripped of H2S leaves the bottom of the regenerator is send back to the scrubber as lean amine for more absorption. The entire process takes place essentially in a closed loop.

Note that in this case, the liquid entering the absorber is no longer pure (i.e. x2 is not 0) as it may contain traces of H2S in the entering liquid amine.

Liquid-Liquid Extraction

Liquid-liquid extraction (LLE) is an important unit operation that allows one to separate fluids based on different solutes being soluble to different degrees in different solvents. In this experiment, acetone is extracted by contact with water from a feed stream containing an unknown concentration of acetone in butyl acetate (BA).

Purpose:- The goal of this laboratory exercise is to study the performance of a liquid-liquid extraction column.

Learning Objectives:-The main learning objective of this laboratory exercise is to gain experience in characterizing the behavior of a liquid-liquid extraction column. To do this, one must examine such parameters as the composition of the top and bottom products at various feed rates and compositions. These parameters should be calculated theoretically using available computer programs and determined experimentally from the column.

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 304: industrial chemical technology

MTT

Prepared By: Jignesh M.Vasoya

NODAL INSTITUTE N. G. PATEL POLYTECHNIC

LONG TERM TRAINING PROGRAMME ON INDUSTRIAL CHEMICAL TECHNOLOGY (MODULE-I)

MTT Lecture-4

GAS ABSORPTION & DESORPTION

Gas absorption (also known as scrubbing) is an operation in which a gas mixture is contacted with a liquid for the purpose of preferentially dissolving one or more components of the gas mixture and to provide a solution of them in the liquid.

Therefore we can see that there is a mass transfer of the component of the gas from the gas phase to the liquid phase. The solute so transferred is said to be absorbed by the liquid.

In gas desorption (or stripping), the mass transfer is in the opposite direction, i.e. from the liquid phase to the gas phase. The principles for both systems are the same.

We will focus on the analysis for gas absorption, for the simple case whereby only one component of the gas solute is being absorbed. The other components of the gas are assumed to be non-soluble in the liquid (i.e. the other gas components are inert components), and the liquid is non-volatile, which means that there is no transfer of molecules from the liquid to the gas phase.

In addition, we assume there is no chemical reaction in the system and that it is operating at isothermal condition.

The process of gas absorption thus involves the diffusion of solute from the gas phase through a stagnant or non-diffusing liquid.

Physical vs. Chemical Absorption

There are 2 types of absorption processes: physical absorption and chemical absorption, depending on whether there is any chemical reaction between the solute and the solvent (absorbent).

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 305: industrial chemical technology

MTT

Prepared By: Jignesh M.Vasoya

When water and hydrocarbon oils are used as absorbents, no significant chemical reactions occur between the absorbent and the solute, and the process is commonly referred to as physical absorption.

When aqueous sodium hydroxide (a strong base) is used as the absorbent to dissolve an acid gas, absorption is accompanied by a rapid and irreversible neutralization reaction in the liquid phase and the process is referred to as chemical absorption or reactive absorption.

More complex examples of chemical absorption are processes for absorbing CO2 and H2S with aqueous solution of mono ethanol amine (MEA), diethanolamine (DEA), diethylene glycol (DEG) or triethylene glycol (TEG), where a reversible chemical reaction takes place in the liquid phase. Chemical reactions can increase the rate of absorption, increase the absorption capacity of the solvent, increase selectivity to preferentially dissolve only certain components of the gas, and convert a hazardous chemical to a safe compound.

Method of Operation

Two methods of contacting the gas and liquid are possible: counter-current operation and co-current operation. We will focus principally on the counter-current gas absorption, as it was widely used in the industry. The main differences between the two configurations will be highlighted. Note that for counter-current operation, the gas enters the column or tower from below as leaves at the top, while liquid enters from the top and flows in opposite direction and exits from the bottom.

We will be concerned primarily with counter-current gas absorption. The gas flows upwards while the liquid flow downwards. Inside the column where there is vapour-liquid contact, mass transfer by absorption occurs, i.e. there is a transfer of solute(s) from the gas phase to the liquid phase.

Absorption Equipment

Absorption and stripping are conducted in tray (or plate or stage) columns, packed columns, spray towers, bubble columns, and centrifugal contactors. In general, operating pressure should be high and temperature low for an absorber, to minimize stage requirements and/or absorbent flow rate to lower the equipment volume required accommodating the gas flow. The reverse is true for stripping. However, the operating pressure should not be too high

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 306: industrial chemical technology

MTT

Prepared By: Jignesh M.Vasoya

and the operating temperature should not be too low as to condense the feed gas.

Tray Column

The types of trays used in absorption include: sieve tray, valve tray and bubble-cap trays. These internals are the same as those covered in "Distillation".

Packed Column

Both random and structured packings had been used. Again, please refer to the topics covered in "Distillation".

Spray Column

The gas flows upward continuously through an open chamber in which scrubbing liquid droplets falls from spray nozzles through the gas. The gas pressure drop is small, but separation is not as good as the bubble column. This column is widely used for its simplicity, low pressure drop, and resistance to scale deposition and plugging.

Bubble Column

The gas is forced under pressure through perforated pipes submerged in the scrubbing liquid. As such the gas phase is dispersed and the liquid phase is continuous. As the bubbles rise through the liquid, absorption of the gas occurs. This type of device suffers from the high pressure drop due to the liquid hydrostatic head.

Integration of absorber and stripper

In practice, absorbers and strippers are often interconnected with one stripper serving several absorbers.

In general, operating pressure should be high and temperature low for an absorber, to minimize stage requirements and/or solvent flow rate and to lower the equipment volume required accommodating the gas flow. Unfortunately, both compression and refrigeration of a gas are expensive. Therefore most absorbers are operated at feed gas pressure, which may be

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 307: industrial chemical technology

MTT

Prepared By: Jignesh M.Vasoya

higher than ambient pressure. Operating temperature is kept low, but not to condense the feed gas.

An amine treating system typical in refineries with one absorber (scrubber) and one regenerator (stripper).

In the absorber, H2S is removed from the incoming sour gas by contacting it with liquid amine (DEA or MEA) in a counter-current manner. The amine solution (known as lean amine) enters the column at the top. The gas leaves the absorber as sweet gas with the H2S removed. The amine solution that leaves the bottom of the column is rich in absorbed H2S (known as rich amine) and is feed to the stripper or regenerator.

In the regenerator, the opposite process takes place whereby H2S is removed from rich amine by counter-current contact with steam. The amine stripped of H2S leaves the bottom of the regenerator is send back to the scrubber as lean amine for more absorption. The entire process takes place essentially in a closed loop.

Note that in this case, the liquid entering the absorber is no longer pure (i.e. x2 is not 0) as it may contain traces of H2S in the entering liquid amine.

Liquid-Liquid Extraction

Liquid-liquid extraction (LLE) is an important unit operation that allows one to separate fluids based on different solutes being soluble to different degrees in different solvents. In this experiment, acetone is extracted by contact with water from a feed stream containing an unknown concentration of acetone in butyl acetate (BA).

Purpose:- The goal of this laboratory exercise is to study the performance of a liquid-liquid extraction column.

Learning Objectives:-The main learning objective of this laboratory exercise is to gain experience in characterizing the behavior of a liquid-liquid extraction column. To do this, one must examine such parameters as the composition of the top and bottom products at various feed rates and compositions. These parameters should be calculated theoretically using available computer programs and determined experimentally from the column.

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 308: industrial chemical technology

1. Distillation Distillation is a unit operation in which 2 or more miscible substances are separated to relatively pure products by using vaporization and condensation of the mixture. The liquid with lower boiling point is vaporized and condensed in a separate flask. 2. Theory of distillaiton A. Vaporization and Condensation

a) For any liquid, the individual molecules within the liquid are continuously in motion

b) A small percentage of these molecules attain enough kinetic energy to leave the liquid phase

c) This exerts an opposing pressure on the atmosphere above the solution known as the vapor pressure, P

Vapor Pressure, P

Atmospheric pressure, Patm

Vapor Pressure, P

Atmospheric pressure, Patm

d) When enough energy, in the form of heat, is imparted to the solution the vapor

pressure becomes equal to the atmospheric pressure and the liquid begins to boil

P < Patm P ≥ PatmP < Patm P ≥ Patm e) The vapor obtained from a boiling liquid, once cooled, will re-condense to a

liquid known as the distillate. The complete process is called a distillation.

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 309: industrial chemical technology

3. Types of distillation a) Simple (Differential) distillation

b) Fractional distillation

Distillation column types: The distillation column can be operated in Batch or continuous process. Batch distillation: The feed to this type of distillation is fed initially only and then the distillation is operated. At the time of distillation process, there is no supply of feed or removal of product. (Above figures are batch distillation operations) Continuous distillation: This type of distillation consists of continuous supply of feed and continuous removal of products. 4. Introduction to (continuous) distillation with reflux In a distillation column the stages (referred to as sieve plates or trays) in a distillation tower are arranged vertically, as shown schematically in figure below.

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 310: industrial chemical technology

1. Feed enters the column somewhere in the middle of the column.

2. Feed is liquid, it flowsdown to a sieve tray or stage.

3. Vapor enters the tray and bubbles through the liquid on this tray as the entering liquid flows across.

4. The vapor and liquid leaving the tray are essentially in equilibrium

5. The vapor continues up to the next tray or stage, where it is again contacted with a down-flowing liquid.

6. The concentration of the more volatile component is being increased in the vapor form each stage going upward and decreased in the liquid from each stage going downwards.

7. The final vapor product coming overhead is condensed in a condenser and a portion of the liquid product (distillate) is removed, which contains a high concentration of A

8. The remaining liquid from the condenser is returned (refluxed) as a liquid to the top tray

9. The liquid leaving the bottom tray enters a reboilier, where it partially vaporized, and the remaining liquid, which is lean in A or rich in B, is withdrawn as liquid product.

10. The vapor from the reboiler is sent back to the bottom stage or tray is much greater.

Temperature Versus xA, yA for Benzene (A) – Toluene (B)

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 311: industrial chemical technology

5. Parts of continuous distillation column a) Feed

b) Distillation stage

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 312: industrial chemical technology

c) Rectifying section:

d) Stripping section

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 313: industrial chemical technology

e) Overhead vapour and condenser:

f) Overhead product (Light component with low boiling point) and Reflux

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 314: industrial chemical technology

g) Bottom liquid and reboiler

h) Bottom Product (Heavy component with high boiling point)

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 315: industrial chemical technology

5. Equilibrium curve (yA vs xA) (At constant Pressure = 101.325 KPa)

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 316: industrial chemical technology

6. Mac-Cabe and Thiele Method (Number of stages)

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 317: industrial chemical technology

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 318: industrial chemical technology

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 319: industrial chemical technology

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 320: industrial chemical technology

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 321: industrial chemical technology

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 322: industrial chemical technology

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 323: industrial chemical technology

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 324: industrial chemical technology

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 325: industrial chemical technology

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 326: industrial chemical technology

Prepared by:Jignesh VasoyaJignesh Vasoya

LecturerN.G.POLYTECHNIC,ISROLI,

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 327: industrial chemical technology

Mass transfer is the net movement of mass from onelocation to other.Some common examples of mass transfer processesare the evaporation of water from a pond to theare the evaporation of water from a pond to theatmosphere, the diffusion of chemical impurities inlakes, rivers, and oceans from natural or artificialpoint sources, separation of chemical components indistillation columns. In Cooling towers, hot waterflows down over the fill material as air flows up andflows down over the fill material as air flows up andcontact between water and air evaporates some of thewater.

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 328: industrial chemical technology

Evaporation requires heat, the heat is removed fromthe remaining water lowering its temperature.

Day-by-Day experiences also involve MT:A lump of sugar added to a cup of coffee eventuallydissolves and then eventually diffuses to make theconcentration uniform.W t t f d t i thWater evaporates from ponds to increase thehumidity of passing-air-streamPerfumes presents a pleasant fragrance which isPerfumes presents a pleasant fragrance which isimparted throughout the surrounding atmosphere.

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 329: industrial chemical technology

Why Mass is Transfered?Th d ti f l l tThe random motion of molecules causes a nettransfer of mass from an area of high concentrationto an area of low concentration.The driving force for mass transfer is a difference inconcentration

Mass transfer operations – nature of interfacebetween phasesGas-liquid contact e g absorption evaporationGas-liquid contact e.g. absorption, evaporation, distillation etcLiquid-liquid contact e.g. extractionq q gLiquid-solid contact e.g. crystallization, adsorptionGas-solid contact e.g. adsorption, drying etc

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 330: industrial chemical technology

Non steady state – concentration changes with time e.g. batch processesSteady stateSStageDifferential contact

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 331: industrial chemical technology

In every mass transfer operation mass is transferredfrom one phase to another phase.Distillation(G/L)-Gas to Liquid & Liquid to GasG Ab ti (G/L) G t Li idGas Absorption(G/L)-Gas to LiquidDesorption(L/G)-Liquid to GasExtraction(L/L)-Liquid to LiquidExtraction(L/L)-Liquid to LiquidLeaching(L/S)-Liquid to SolidCrystallization(L/S)-Liquid to Solidy ( ) qDrying(S/G)-Solid to GasAdsorption(F/S)-Fluid to solid

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 332: industrial chemical technology

Distillation is a method of separating mixtures basedon differences in their volatilities in a boiling liquidmixture. Distillation is a unit operation, or a physical

i d h i l iseparation process, and not a chemical reaction.It is used to separate crude oil into more fractions forspecific uses such as transport power generation andspecific uses such as transport, power generation andheating.

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 333: industrial chemical technology

Total condenser

Overhead vapor

DistillationReflux drum

21Rectifying section stages

Feed Stage

Reflux Distillate

Feed

BoilupNStripping section stages

Bottoms

Partial reboiler

Bottoms

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 334: industrial chemical technology

TYPES OF DISTILLATION COLUMNS

There are many types of distillation columns, eachd i d t f ifi t f ti ddesigned to perform specific types of separations, andeach design differs in terms of complexity. Batchand Continuous Columnsand Continuous ColumnsBatch Columns In batch operation, the feed to thecolumn is introduced batch-wise. That is, the column,is charged with a 'batch' and then the distillationprocess is carried out. When the desired task isachieved, a next batch of feed is introduced.

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 335: industrial chemical technology

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 336: industrial chemical technology

Continuous Columns In contrast, continuouscolumns process a continuous feed stream. Nopinterruptions occur unless there is a problem with thecolumn or surrounding process units. They are

bl f h dli hi h h h d hcapable of handling high throughputs and are themost common of the two types. Concentration doesnot change with timenot change with time.

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 337: industrial chemical technology

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 338: industrial chemical technology

Gas absorption (also known as scrubbing) is anoperation in which a gas mixture is contacted with aliquid for the purpose of preferentially dissolving one

f h i dor more components of the gas mixture and toprovide a solution of them in the liquid.We will focus on the analysis for gas absorption forWe will focus on the analysis for gas absorption, forthe simple case whereby only one component of thegas solute is being absorbed. The other componentsgas solute is being absorbed. The other componentsof the gas are assumed to be non-soluble in the liquid(i.e. the other gas components are inert components),

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 339: industrial chemical technology

and the liquid is non-volatile, which means that there is notransfer of molecules from the liquid to the gas phase.In addition, we assume there is no chemical reaction in thesystem and that it is operating at isothermal condition.Th f b i h i l h diff i fThe process of gas absorption thus involves the diffusion ofsolute from the gas phase through a stagnant or non-diffusing liquiddiffusing liquid.There are 2 types of absorption processes: physicalabsorption and chemical absorption, depending on whetherabsorption and chemical absorption, depending on whetherthere is any chemical reaction.

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 340: industrial chemical technology

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 341: industrial chemical technology

Liquid-liquid extraction, also known as solventextraction and partitioning is a method to separateextraction and partitioning, is a method to separatecompounds based on their relative solubility in twodifferent immiscible liquids, usually water and andifferent immiscible liquids, usually water and anorganic solvent. It is an extraction of a substancefrom one liquid phase into another liquid phase.Liquid-liquid extraction is a basic technique inchemical laboratories, where it is performed using a

t f l Thi t f i lseparatory funnel. This type of process is commonlyperformed after a chemical reaction as part of thework-upwork-up.

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 342: industrial chemical technology

Solvent extraction is used in nuclear reprocessing, oreprocessing, the production of fine organic compounds,the processing of perfumes, and other industries.Example: Acetic Acid &Water/Isopropyl ether(Solvent)

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 343: industrial chemical technology

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 344: industrial chemical technology

Adsorption is the adhesion of atoms, ions,biomolecules or molecules of gas, liquid, or dissolvedsolids to a surface. This process creates a film of the

d b t ( h l l b iadsorbate (the molecules or atoms beingaccumulated) on the surface of the adsorbent. Itdiffers from absorption in which a fluid permeates ordiffers from absorption, in which a fluid permeates oris dissolved by a liquid or solid. The term sorptionencompasses both processes, while desorption is thep p , preverse of adsorption.

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 345: industrial chemical technology

The most common industrial adsorbents are activatedThe most common industrial adsorbents are activatedcarbon, silica gel, and alumina, because they presentenormous surface areas per unit weight.Used in many industrial processes:◦ dehumidification◦ odour/colour/taste removal◦ gas pollutant removal (H2S)◦ water softening and deionisation◦ hydrocarbon fractionation

h i l ifi i◦ pharmaceutical purification

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 346: industrial chemical technology

Porous material - Large surface area per unit mass –size, shape, polarity cause certain particles to be heldmore strongly in these pores than othersRate of mass transfer is dependent on the voidRate of mass transfer is dependent on the voidfraction within the poresGranular (50μm - 12 mm diameter)( μ )Suitable for packed bed use

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 347: industrial chemical technology

Physical Adsorption◦ Result of intermolecular forces causing preferential

binding of certain substances to certain adsorbents◦ Reversible by addition of heat (via steam, hot inert gas,Reversible by addition of heat (via steam, hot inert gas,

oven)◦ Attachment to the outer layer of adsorbent materialCh i tiChemisorption◦ Result of chemical interaction◦ Large amount heat releasedLarge amount heat released◦ Irreversible◦ Mainly found in catalysis

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 348: industrial chemical technology

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 349: industrial chemical technology

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 350: industrial chemical technology

Fundamentals of Mass Fundamentals of Mass T f O iT f O iTransfer OperationsTransfer Operations

Mr. R. M. PatelMr. R. M. PatelLecturer, Lecturer,

Chemical engineering Department,Chemical engineering Department,N G P l P l h iN G P l P l h iN. G. Patel Polytechnic,N. G. Patel Polytechnic,

Bardoli.Bardoli.

Prepared By: Prof.R. M. Patel, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 351: industrial chemical technology

Fick’s LawFick’s LawFick s LawFick s Law

Rate or molar Flux is of two types:Rate or molar Flux is of two types:ypypFlux relative to a fixed location, Flux relative to a fixed location, NNAA

Flux relative to the average molar velocity of all components, Flux relative to the average molar velocity of all components, JJAA..Th i f b h fl i l /( i )Th i f b h fl i l /( i )The unit of both fluxes is moles/(time. area).The unit of both fluxes is moles/(time. area).

)1(−−−−−−−−−−=d

dCDJ AABA )(

dzABA

Prepared By: Prof.R. M. Patel, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 352: industrial chemical technology

Relationship between NRelationship between NAA and Jand JAARelationship between NRelationship between NAA and Jand JAA

)2(−−−−−−−−−−−+= AAA JNxN

CCx AA /=

If two components A and B are flowing with same rate but in opposite

di i J J C +C D Ddirection, JA=-JB, CA+CB=constant, DAB =DBA

If two components A and B are flowing with same rate but in same direction,

JA=JB, CA+CB=constant, DAB =DBA

Prepared By: Prof.R. M. Patel, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 353: industrial chemical technology

Steady State diffusion molecular Steady State diffusion molecular diffusion of NA and NB in zdiffusion of NA and NB in z--diffusion of NA and NB in zdiffusion of NA and NB in z

directiondirection⎤⎡

)3()/())/(()/())/((ln

1

2 −−−−−−−−−−⎥⎦

⎤⎢⎣

⎡−+−+

+=

CCNNNCCNNN

zCD

NNNN

ABAA

ABAAAB

AA

AA

Considering above eq ation for ideal gasConsidering above equation for ideal gas,

AT

AA yPP

CC

==RTP

VnC T==

)4())/(())/((ln

1

2 −−−−−−−−−−⎥⎦

⎤⎢⎣

⎡−+−+

+=

ABAA

ABAATAB

AA

AA yNNN

yNNNRTz

PDNN

NN

where,PA= partial pressure of component A in gasPT= Total pressure of gas mixtureR is universal gas constantR is universal gas constantT is absolute temperature of gasyA1 mole fraction of component A at location z=1yA2 mole fraction of component A at location z=2

Prepared By: Prof.R. M. Patel, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 354: industrial chemical technology

Steady state diffusion of A through Steady state diffusion of A through nonnon--diffusing Bdiffusing B

0=BN 1=+ BAA NNNB BAA

)5()( 21 −−−−−−−−−−−−−= AATAB

A PPPRTzPDN

,MBPRTz

Where,12 BB

MBPPP −

=)/ln( 12

,BB

MB PPP

Prepared By: Prof.R. M. Patel, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 355: industrial chemical technology

Steady state equimolal diffusion of Steady state equimolal diffusion of both A and Bboth A and B

BA NN −= ∞=+ BAA NNNBA NN + BAA NNN

)6()( 21 −−−−−−−−−−−−−= AAAB

A PPRTzDNRTz

Prepared By: Prof.R. M. Patel, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 356: industrial chemical technology

Mass transfer coefficient, kMass transfer coefficient, kMass transfer coefficient, kMass transfer coefficient, kFlux = (coefficient) (concentration difference)

Mass transfer coefficient for steady state diffusion of A through non-diffusing B:

0=N 1+ NNN0=BN 1=+ BAA NNN

)()()( 212121 AACAAyAAGA CCkyykPPkN −=−=−= (For Gases)

)()( CCkkN )()( 2121 AALAAxA CCkxxkN −=−= (For Liquids)

Mass transfer coefficient for steady state equimolal counter diff i f A d Bdiffusion of A and B:

BA NN −= ∞=+ BAA NNN

)()()( CCkyykPPkN −′=−′=−′= (For Gases))()()( 212121 AACAAyAAGA CCkyykPPkN ===

)()( 2121 AALAAxA CCkxxkN −′=−′=

(For Gases)

(For Liquids)

Prepared By: Prof.R. M. Patel, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 357: industrial chemical technology

Relationship of DAB and mass Relationship of DAB and mass transfer coefficient ktransfer coefficient k

Based on widely used Film Theory, the relationship between mass

5.0ABDkα

transfer coefficient, k and mass diffusivity, DAB is,

ABDkα

Prepared By: Prof.R. M. Patel, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 358: industrial chemical technology

Driving force for mass transferDriving force for mass transferDriving force for mass transferDriving force for mass transfer

Prepared By: Prof.R. M. Patel, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 359: industrial chemical technology

Interphase mass transferInterphase mass transfer --EquilibriumEquilibrium

When mass transfer occurs between two phases it is called interphaseWhen mass transfer occurs between two phases it is called interphase mass transfer.

When the molecules are transferring from one phase to another but ifg pthe net transfer of all the molecules is zero, this condition is called dynamicequilibrium. The concentration measured at the condition ofequilibrium or dynamic equilibrium is called equilibrium concentration ofq y q qcomponent A in both phases (xA and yA in both phases).

Prepared By: Prof.R. M. Patel, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 360: industrial chemical technology

Equilibrium CurveEquilibrium CurveEquilibrium CurveEquilibrium Curve

Prepared By: Prof.R. M. Patel, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 361: industrial chemical technology

Interphase mass transferInterphase mass transferT TT T(Two resistance Theory)(Two resistance Theory)

Prepared By: Prof.R. M. Patel, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 362: industrial chemical technology

Interphase mass transferInterphase mass transferT TT T(Two resistance Theory)(Two resistance Theory)

k k = liquid- and gas-phase mass transfer coefficientskx, ky liquid and gas phase mass transfer coefficients, Kx, Ky = liquid & gas-phase overall mass transfer coefficients,

[kmol m–2 s–1], N * is the molar flux [kmol m–2 s–1]NA is the molar flux [kmol m s ], xS is the equilibrium mole fraction of the liquid at the interface, x∞ is the mole fraction of the bulk liquid, x* is the mole fraction of the liquid in equilibrium with the bulk gasx* is the mole fraction of the liquid in equilibrium with the bulk gas, yS is the equilibrium mole fraction of the gas at the interface, y∞ is the mole fraction of the bulk gas, * is the m le fr ti n f the s in eq ilibri m ith the b lk liq idy* is the mole fraction of the gas in equilibrium with the bulk liquid

Prepared By: Prof.R. M. Patel, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 363: industrial chemical technology

Relationship of local and overall Relationship of local and overall mass transfer coefficientsmass transfer coefficientsmass transfer coefficientsmass transfer coefficients(Two resistance Theory)(Two resistance Theory)

xyy km

kK′

+=11

xyx kkmK111

+′′

=xyy kk xyx

Prepared By: Prof.R. M. Patel, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 364: industrial chemical technology

Steady state coSteady state co--current processescurrent processesSteady state coSteady state co current processescurrent processes

Prepared By: Prof.R. M. Patel, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 365: industrial chemical technology

Mass balance of component A over envelope I

Amount of A entering with phase E = E1y1g p 1y1Amount of A entering with phase R = R1x1Amount of A leaving with phase E = E2y2Amount of A leaving with phase R = R2x2

)8()7(

11222211

22221111

−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−=−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−+=+

yEyExRxRyExRyExR

g p 2 2

)9(1

, 11

111 −−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−=

−= XR

xxRxRbut SS

At steady state: Amount of substance in = Amount of substance out

where, X1 is moles A/moles non-A (moles solute/moles solvent)

)10()()( YYEXXR )10()()( 1221 −−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−=− YYEXXR SS

Equation of a straight line on X, Y coordinates with slope = -RS /ES.

Prepared By: Prof.R. M. Patel, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 366: industrial chemical technology

Mass balance of component A over Mass balance of component A over envelope IIenvelope II

)11()()( 11 −−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−=− YYEXXR SS

)12()()( 11 −−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−

=− XXERYYS

S

Equation of a straight line on X, Y coordinates with slope = -RS /ES. q g , p /

Equation (12) is called equation of operating line for Co-current processes. (Line QP in figure below).

Prepared By: Prof.R. M. Patel, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 367: industrial chemical technology

Operating Line Operating Line –– CoCo--current current ProcessesProcesses

The operating line above equilibrium curve is for transfer of A from E to Rand below the equilibrium curve is for transfer of A from R to E

Prepared By: Prof.R. M. Patel, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 368: industrial chemical technology

Steady state counterSteady state counter--current current processesprocesses

Mass balance of component A over envelope I

Prepared By: Prof.R. M. Patel, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 369: industrial chemical technology

Mass balance of component A over Mass balance of component A over envelope Ienvelope I

)13(22111122 −−−−−−−−−−−−−−+=+ xRyExRyE)14()()( 2121 −−−−−−−−−−−−−−−=− YYEXXR SS

Mass balance of component A overMass balance of component A overMass balance of component A over Mass balance of component A over envelope IIenvelope II

)15(RERE

)17()()(

)16()()()15(

11

1111

=

−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−=−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−+=+

XXR

YY

YYEXXRRxyExREy

S

SS

)17()()( 11 −−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−=− XXE

YYS

The equation (17), is the equation of straight line on X, Y coordinates and is ll d i f i li f ( h icalled equation of operating line for counter current processes (as shown in

figure below).

Prepared By: Prof.R. M. Patel, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 370: industrial chemical technology

CounterCounter--current processescurrent processes(Operating Line)(Operating Line)

The operating line above equilibrium curve is for transfer of A from E to R and below the equilibrium curve is for transfer of A from R to E in figure.

Prepared By: Prof.R. M. Patel, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 371: industrial chemical technology

Prepared By: Prof.R. M. Patel, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 372: industrial chemical technology

MASS TRANSFER TECHNOLOGYTECHNOLOGY

Prepared by:Jignesh Vasoya

Chemical Engineer(Gold Medalist)Lecturer

N.G.POLYTECHNIC,ISROLI

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 373: industrial chemical technology

Drying

• Drying is a mass transfer process consisting of theremoval of water moisture or moisture from

th l t b ti f lid ianother solvent, by evaporation from a solid, semi-solid or liquid (hereafter product). To be considered"drying" the final product must be a solid either asdrying , the final product must be a solid, either asa continuous sheet (e.g., paper), as long pieces(e.g., wood), particles (cereal grains, corn flakes) or( g , ), p ( g , )in powder form (sand, salt, washing powder, milkpowder). To achieve this, there must be a source ofheat, and a sink of the vapor thus produced. Inbioproducts(food,grains,vaccines),andpharmaceuticals the solvent to be removed ispharmaceuticals the solvent to be removed isalmost invariably water.

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 374: industrial chemical technology

• In the most common case, a gas stream, e.g., air,applies the heat by convection and carries away the

h idit Oth ibilitivapor as humidity. Other possibilities are vacuumdrying, where heat is supplied by conduction orradiation (or microwaves) while the vapor thusradiation (or microwaves) while the vapor thusproduced is removed by the vacuum system. Anotherindirect technique is drum drying (used, for instance,q y g ( , ,for manufacturing potato flakes), where a heatedsurface is used to provide the energy and aspiratorsdraw the vapor outside the room

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 375: industrial chemical technology

CrystallizationC t lli ti i th ( t l tifi i l) f• Crystallization is the (natural or artificial) process offormation of solid crystals precipitating from asolution melt or more rarely deposited directly from asolution, melt or more rarely deposited directly from agas. Crystallization is also a chemical solid-liquidseparation technique, in which mass transfer of asolute from the liquid solution to a pure solidcrystalline phase occurs.

• The crystallization process consists of two majorevents, nucleation and crystal growth. Nucleation isth t h th l t l l di d i ththe step where the solute molecules dispersed in thesolvent start to gather into clusters, on the nanometerscale (elevating solute concentration in a smallscale (elevating solute concentration in a smallregion), that becomes stable under the currentoperating conditions.

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 376: industrial chemical technology

• These stable clusters constitute the nuclei• These stable clusters constitute the nuclei.However when the clusters are not stable, theyredissolve. Therefore, the clusters need to reach a

iti l i i d t b t bl l i S hcritical size in order to become stable nuclei. Suchcritical size is dictated by the operating conditions(temperature, supersaturation, etc.). It is at the( p , p , )stage of nucleation that the atoms arrange in adefined and periodic manner that defines thecrystal structure — note that "crystal structure" iscrystal structure — note that crystal structure isa special term that refers to the relativearrangement of the atoms, not the macroscopic

ti f th t l ( i d h ) lth hproperties of the crystal (size and shape), althoughthose are a result of the internal crystal structure.

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 377: industrial chemical technology

• The crystal growth is the subsequent growth of theThe crystal growth is the subsequent growth of thenuclei that succeed in achieving the critical clustersize. Nucleation and growth continue to occursimultaneously while the supersaturation exists.Supersaturation is the driving force of the

t lli ti h th t f l ti dcrystallization, hence the rate of nucleation andgrowth is driven by the existing supersaturation inthe solution Depending upon the conditions eitherthe solution. Depending upon the conditions, eithernucleation or growth may be predominant over theother, and as a result, crystals with different sizes and, , yshapes are obtained (control of crystal size and shapeconstitutes one of the main challenges in industrial

f i h f h i l )manufacturing, such as for pharmaceuticals).

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 378: industrial chemical technology

• Once the supersaturation is exhausted, the solid-liquidsystem reaches equilibrium and the crystallization iscomplete, unless the operating conditions aremodified from equilibrium so as to supersaturate thesolution againsolution again.

LeachingI l l hi i th t ti f t iIn general, leaching is the extraction of certainmaterials from a carrier into a liquid (usually, but notalways a solvent) Specifically it may refer to:always a solvent). Specifically, it may refer to:

• Leaching (agriculture), the loss of water-soluble plantnutrients from the soil; or applying a small amount ofnutrients from the soil; or applying a small amount ofexcess irrigation to avoid soil salinity

• Leaching(chemical science), the process of extractingg( ), p gminerals from a solid by dissolving them in a liquid

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 379: industrial chemical technology

• Leaching (metallurgy), a widely used extractiveg ( gy) ymetallurgy technique which converts metals intosoluble salts in aqueous media– Dump leaching an industrial process to extractDump leaching, an industrial process to extract

metals from ore taken directly from the mine andstacked on the leach pad without crushingH l hi i d t i l t t t– Heap leaching, an industrial process to extractmetals from ore which has been crushed into smallchunks

– Tank leaching, a hydrometallurgical method ofextracting valuable material from oreIn situ leaching a process of recovering minerals– In-situ leaching, a process of recovering mineralssuch as copper and uranium through boreholesdrilled into the deposit

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 380: industrial chemical technology

• Leaching (pedology), the loss of mineral and organicg (p gy), gsolutes due to percolation from soil

• Bioleaching, the extraction of specific metals fromtheir ores through the use of bacteria

• In cooking, leaching generally refers to Parboiling.

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 381: industrial chemical technology

Tray DryerA t D i l d i l t d h b i• A tray Dryer is an enclosed insulated chamber inwhich trays are placed on top of each other introlleys. Tray Dryer are used where heating anddrying are essential parts of manufacturing process inindustries such as Chemicals, Dye stuff,Pharmaceutical, Food Products, Colours etc. The, ,material to be dried either wet or solids are placed inthe trays. Heat transfer is by circulation of hot air byelectric heaters or steam in radiator coils. Blowerelectric heaters or steam in radiator coils. Blowerfans are installed inside to ensure proper circulationand transfer of heat. A control panel to control thetemperature and other parameters is fixed outside thetemperature and other parameters is fixed outside thedryer. These dryers are available in Mild Steel,Stainless Steel or construction. Tray dryer is used fordrying of pigments food bakery electrodesdrying of pigments, food, bakery, electrodes,chemical and plastic powders.

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 382: industrial chemical technology

• DESCRIPTION: The Drying ovens are normallyil bl i h h i f h i d l i llavailable with choice of heating mode, as electrically

heated / steam heated & thermic fluid heated. Inelectrically heated model digital temperature controllerelectrically heated model, digital temperature controllerprovided with digital timer to facilitate working dayand night. In steam & thermic fluid heated model,g ,digital temperature indicator is provided with digitaltimer , but the temperature controller is not suppliedwith the machine AIR CIRCULATION A highlyeffective recirculating air system is provided. Theheated air is recirculated with fresh air in selectedheated air, is recirculated with fresh air in selectedproportions for optimum drying. The system isdesigned so that the materials at the top & the bottomdesigned so that the materials at the top & the bottomdry simultaneously.

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 383: industrial chemical technology

• Uniform air circulation, controlled temperature,sturdy construction and large working space are thesturdy construction and large working space are thevaluables of the oven which is suitably designed tocover wide temperature range, loading and unloadingcover wide temperature range, loading and unloadingis faster and simple.

• In higher capacities trays trolley rolls in and out ofg p y ythe chamber. For continuous operation a spare trolleycan be had for loading while the drying cycle istaking place. CONTROLLED TEMPERATURE& TIME Digital temperature controller with digitaltimer are supplied to facilitate working day andtimer are supplied to facilitate working day andnight.

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 384: industrial chemical technology

Rotary Dryers• Rotary dryers which are generally used in various• Rotary dryers which are generally used in various

industries, especially in the mineral industry. Inmineral industry, the equipment is used for drying

dit h l k li i lcommodity such as clay, kaolin, gypsum, mineralsand, limestone, potash and silica sand. Thisequipment is suitable for evaporating and drying of

id f i l f i d i dwide range of material of variegated sizes andcomposition. To lift, distribute and transport thematerial some internal lifters or flights are used. Wegoffer co-current direct-heat rotary dryer which isthe most common equipment available in the market.In this equipment, the initial heat transfer level is veryq p , yhigh which creates a considerable drop in temperatureand prevents over heating of the dryer as well as thematerial.material.

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 385: industrial chemical technology

• Apart from this, counter current dryers that weid id l f th t i l th t d t bprovide are ideal for the materials that need to be

dried to very low moisture contents. It is furtherhelps for the material in which last traces of moisture

h dare hard to remove.Other details of the equipment are mentionedbelow:below:

• Consist of a relatively long cylindrical shell• The shell ranges from 0. 6 to 5 m in diameter and

from 5 to 30 m long• It is supported by two riding rings running on a set of

rollers (rotation speed up to 25 rpm)rollers (rotation speed up to 25 rpm)• The shell is slightly inclined from the horizontal and

the slope enables material to move from the feed toth di h d d itthe discharge end under gravity

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 386: industrial chemical technology

• Feed rate ranges from less than 1 tonne to 500 tonnesper hour

• the internal flights produce a shower, or cascade, ofwet feed material through the hot gas stream

• This promotes evaporation of the moisture and breaksup lumps to produce a more uniformly dried material

• The hot air is introduced either at the feed end suchthat it moves in the same direction as the material(co current) or at the discharge end such that it moves(co-current) or at the discharge end such that it movesin the opposite direction (counter-current)

• While coming in contact with the highest temperature• While coming in contact with the highest temperatureand extremely hot gas stream, the surface moisture ofthe wet material get evaporatedg p

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 387: industrial chemical technology

• As the wet material progresses through the dryer,heat energy is lost to the material it is drying and itleaves the dryer at a comparatively low temperature

• The moisture content can be readily controlled whenthe final dried product is discharged with the gasstream at its lowest temperaturestream at its lowest temperature

• Application: The wet slurry comes in contact withthe hottest drying gases which is supplied from anthe hottest drying gases which is supplied from anexternal source and the heat transfer is done byconvection.

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 388: industrial chemical technology

This equipment find application in the productionq p pp pprocess of the following products:

• floatation concentrates• coal/coke• clays, phosphatesy , p p• suifilter cakes• minerals, fertilizers,• beet pulp• germ stillagegerm, stillage• sludges• animal feeds• animal feeds

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 389: industrial chemical technology

Rotary Dryer

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 390: industrial chemical technology

Cooling tower• Cooling towers are heat removal devices used toCooling towers are heat removal devices used to

transfer process waste heat to the atmosphere. Coolingtowers may either use the evaporation of water toy premove process heat and cool the working fluid to nearthe wet-bulb air temperature or rely solely on air tocool the working fluid to near the dry-bulb airtemperature. Common applications include cooling thecirculating water used in oil refineries chemicalcirculating water used in oil refineries, chemicalplants, power stations and building cooling. Thetowers vary in size from small roof-top units to verytowe s va y s e o s a oo top u ts to ve ylarge hyperboloid structures (as in Image 1) that can beup to 200 metres tall and 100 metres in diameter, orrectangular structures (as in Image 2) that can be over40 metres tall and 80 metres long.

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 391: industrial chemical technology

• Smaller towers are normally factory-built, while l t t d it Th ftlarger ones are constructed on site. They are often associated with nuclear power plants in popular culture.culture.

Industrial cooling towers• Industrial cooling towers can be used to remove heatIndustrial cooling towers can be used to remove heat

from various sources such as machinery or heatedprocess material. The primary use of large, industrial

li t i t th h t b b d i thcooling towers is to remove the heat absorbed in thecirculating cooling water systems used in powerplants, petroleum refineries, petrochemical plants,p , p , p p ,natural gas processing plants, food processing plants,semi-conductor plants, and for other industrialfacilities s ch as in condensers of distillation col mnsfacilities such as in condensers of distillation columns,for cooling liquid in crystallization, etc.

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 392: industrial chemical technology

• The circulation rate of cooling water in a typical 700MW coal fired power plant with a cooling towerMW coal-fired power plant with a cooling toweramounts to about 71,600 cubic metres an hour (315,000U.S. gallons per minute) and the circulating waterrequires a supply water make-up rate of perhaps 5percent (i.e., 3,600 cubic metres an hour).

• If that same plant had no cooling tower and used once-• If that same plant had no cooling tower and used once-through cooling water, it would require about 100,000cubic metres an hour and that amount of water wouldh b i l d h l khave to be continuously returned to the ocean, lake orriver from which it was obtained and continuously re-supplied to the plant. Furthermore, discharging largepp p , g g gamounts of hot water may raise the temperature of thereceiving river or lake to an unacceptable level for thelocal ecosystemlocal ecosystem.

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 393: industrial chemical technology

• Elevated water temperatures can kill fish and otheraquatic organisms (See thermal pollution ) A coolingaquatic organisms. (See thermal pollution.) A coolingtower serves to dissipate the heat into the atmosphereinstead and wind and air diffusion spreads the heatinstead and wind and air diffusion spreads the heatover a much larger area than hot water can distributeheat in a body of water. Some coal-fired and nuclearpower plants located in coastal areas do make use ofonce-through ocean water. But even there, the

ff h di h t tl t i f loffshore discharge water outlet requires very carefuldesign to avoid environmental problems.

• The world's tallest cooling tower is the 200 metre tall• The world's tallest cooling tower is the 200 metre tallcooling tower of Niederaussem Power Station.

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 394: industrial chemical technology

• Petroleum refineries also have very large coolingA i l l fi itower systems. A typical large refinery processing

40,000 metric tonnes of crude oil per day(300 000 barrels (48 000 m3) per day) circulates about(300,000 barrels (48,000 m ) per day) circulates about80,000 cubic metres of water per hour through itscooling tower system.g y

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 395: industrial chemical technology

• Types of cooling Tower Based on Air flow (Threetypes):

hi h ili b i ll• Natural draft, which utilizes buoyancy via a tallchimney. Warm, moist air naturally rises due to thedensity differential to the dry, cooler outside air. Warmy y,moist air is less dense than drier air at the samepressure. This moist air buoyancy produces a currentof air through the tower.g

• Mechanical draft, which uses power driven fanmotors to force or draw air through the tower.

I d d d f A h i l d ft t ith f– Induced draft: A mechanical draft tower with a fanat the discharge which pulls air through tower. Thefan induces hot moist air out the discharge. Thisproduces low entering and high exiting airvelocities, reducing the possibility of recirculationin which discharged air flows back into the airgintake. This fan/fin arrangement is also known asdraw-through.

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 396: industrial chemical technology

– Forced draft: A mechanical draft tower with afblower type fan at the intake. The fan forces air intothe tower, creating high entering and low exiting airvelocities. The low exiting velocity is much moreg ysusceptible to recirculation. With the fan on the airintake, the fan is more susceptible to complicationsdue to freezing conditions. Another disadvantage isdue to freezing conditions. Another disadvantage isthat a forced draft design typically requires moremotor horsepower than an equivalent induced draftdesign The forced draft benefit is its ability todesign. The forced draft benefit is its ability towork with high static pressure. They can beinstalled in more confined spaces and even in someindoor situations This fan/fill geometry is alsoindoor situations. This fan/fill geometry is alsoknown as blow-through.

• Fan assisted natural draft, A hybrid type that appearslik l d f h h i fl i i d b flike a natural draft though airflow is assisted by a fan.

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 397: industrial chemical technology

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 398: industrial chemical technology

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 399: industrial chemical technology

Some commonly used terms in the cooling towerindustryindustry

• Drift - Water droplets that are carried out of thecooling tower with the exhaust air. Drift droplets haveth t ti f i iti th tthe same concentration of impurities as the waterentering the tower. The drift rate is typically reducedby employing baffle-like devices, called driftli i h h hi h h i l feliminators, through which the air must travel after

leaving the fill and spray zones of the tower. Drift canalso be reduced by using warmer entering coolingy g g gtower temperatures.

• Blow-out - Water droplets blown out of the coolingtower by wind generally at the air inlet openingstower by wind, generally at the air inlet openings.Water may also be lost, in the absence of wind,through splashing or misting. Devices such as windscreens louvers splash deflectors and water divertersscreens, louvers, splash deflectors and water divertersare used to limit these losses.

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 400: industrial chemical technology

• Plume - The stream of saturated exhaust air leavingthe cooling tower. The plume is visible when waterg pvapor it contains condenses in contact with coolerambient air, like the saturated air in one's breath fogson a cold day. Under certain conditions, a coolingtower plume may present fogging or icing hazards toit diits surroundings.

• Blow-down - The portion of the circulating waterflow that is removed in order to maintain the amountflow that is removed in order to maintain the amountof dissolved solids. It may be noted that higher TDS(total dissolved solids) concentration in solution(tota d sso ved so ds) co ce t at o so ut oresults in greater potential cooling tower efficiency.However the higher the TDS concentration, thegreater the risk of scale, biological growth andcorrosion.

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 401: industrial chemical technology

• Leaching - The loss of wood preservative chemicalsby the washing action of the water flowing through a

d liwood structure cooling tower.• Noise - Sound energy emitted by a cooling tower

and heard (recorded) at a given distance andand heard (recorded) at a given distance anddirection. The sound is generated by the impact offalling water, by the movement of air by fans, thefan blades moving in the structure and the motorsfan blades moving in the structure, and the motors,gearboxes or drive belts.

• Approach - The approach is the difference int t b t th l d t t ttemperature between the cooled-water temperatureand the entering-air wet bulb temperature (twb).Since the cooling towers are based on the principles

f i li h i liof evaporative cooling, the maximum cooling towerefficiency depends on the wet bulb temperature ofthe air.

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 402: industrial chemical technology

• The wet-bulb temperature is a type of temperaturemeasurement that reflects the physical properties of ameasurement that reflects the physical properties of asystem with a mixture of a gas and a vapor, usually airand water vapor

• Range The range is the temperature difference• Range - The range is the temperature difference between the water inlet and water exit.

• Fill - Inside the tower, fills are added to increase contact surface as well as contact time between air and water. Thus they provide better heat transfer. The efficiency of the tower also depends on them. There y pare two types of fills that may be used: – Film type fill (causes water to spread into a thin

film)film)– Splash type fill (breaks up water and interrupts its

vertical progress)•

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 403: industrial chemical technology

THANK YOUTHANK YOU

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 404: industrial chemical technology

MASS TRANSFER TECHNOLOGYTECHNOLOGY

Prepared by:Jignesh Vasoya

Chemical Engineer(Gold Medalist)Lecturer

N.G.POLYTECHNIC,ISROLI

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 405: industrial chemical technology

Drying

• Drying is a mass transfer process consisting of theremoval of water moisture or moisture from

th l t b ti f lid ianother solvent, by evaporation from a solid, semi-solid or liquid (hereafter product). To be considered"drying" the final product must be a solid either asdrying , the final product must be a solid, either asa continuous sheet (e.g., paper), as long pieces(e.g., wood), particles (cereal grains, corn flakes) or( g , ), p ( g , )in powder form (sand, salt, washing powder, milkpowder). To achieve this, there must be a source ofheat, and a sink of the vapor thus produced. Inbioproducts(food,grains,vaccines),andpharmaceuticals the solvent to be removed ispharmaceuticals the solvent to be removed isalmost invariably water.

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 406: industrial chemical technology

• In the most common case, a gas stream, e.g., air,applies the heat by convection and carries away the

h idit Oth ibilitivapor as humidity. Other possibilities are vacuumdrying, where heat is supplied by conduction orradiation (or microwaves) while the vapor thusradiation (or microwaves) while the vapor thusproduced is removed by the vacuum system. Anotherindirect technique is drum drying (used, for instance,q y g ( , ,for manufacturing potato flakes), where a heatedsurface is used to provide the energy and aspiratorsdraw the vapor outside the room

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 407: industrial chemical technology

CrystallizationC t lli ti i th ( t l tifi i l) f• Crystallization is the (natural or artificial) process offormation of solid crystals precipitating from asolution melt or more rarely deposited directly from asolution, melt or more rarely deposited directly from agas. Crystallization is also a chemical solid-liquidseparation technique, in which mass transfer of asolute from the liquid solution to a pure solidcrystalline phase occurs.

• The crystallization process consists of two majorevents, nucleation and crystal growth. Nucleation isth t h th l t l l di d i ththe step where the solute molecules dispersed in thesolvent start to gather into clusters, on the nanometerscale (elevating solute concentration in a smallscale (elevating solute concentration in a smallregion), that becomes stable under the currentoperating conditions.

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 408: industrial chemical technology

• These stable clusters constitute the nuclei• These stable clusters constitute the nuclei.However when the clusters are not stable, theyredissolve. Therefore, the clusters need to reach a

iti l i i d t b t bl l i S hcritical size in order to become stable nuclei. Suchcritical size is dictated by the operating conditions(temperature, supersaturation, etc.). It is at the( p , p , )stage of nucleation that the atoms arrange in adefined and periodic manner that defines thecrystal structure — note that "crystal structure" iscrystal structure — note that crystal structure isa special term that refers to the relativearrangement of the atoms, not the macroscopic

ti f th t l ( i d h ) lth hproperties of the crystal (size and shape), althoughthose are a result of the internal crystal structure.

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 409: industrial chemical technology

• The crystal growth is the subsequent growth of theThe crystal growth is the subsequent growth of thenuclei that succeed in achieving the critical clustersize. Nucleation and growth continue to occursimultaneously while the supersaturation exists.Supersaturation is the driving force of the

t lli ti h th t f l ti dcrystallization, hence the rate of nucleation andgrowth is driven by the existing supersaturation inthe solution Depending upon the conditions eitherthe solution. Depending upon the conditions, eithernucleation or growth may be predominant over theother, and as a result, crystals with different sizes and, , yshapes are obtained (control of crystal size and shapeconstitutes one of the main challenges in industrial

f i h f h i l )manufacturing, such as for pharmaceuticals).

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 410: industrial chemical technology

• Once the supersaturation is exhausted, the solid-liquidsystem reaches equilibrium and the crystallization iscomplete, unless the operating conditions aremodified from equilibrium so as to supersaturate thesolution againsolution again.

LeachingI l l hi i th t ti f t iIn general, leaching is the extraction of certainmaterials from a carrier into a liquid (usually, but notalways a solvent) Specifically it may refer to:always a solvent). Specifically, it may refer to:

• Leaching (agriculture), the loss of water-soluble plantnutrients from the soil; or applying a small amount ofnutrients from the soil; or applying a small amount ofexcess irrigation to avoid soil salinity

• Leaching(chemical science), the process of extractingg( ), p gminerals from a solid by dissolving them in a liquid

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 411: industrial chemical technology

• Leaching (metallurgy), a widely used extractiveg ( gy) ymetallurgy technique which converts metals intosoluble salts in aqueous media– Dump leaching an industrial process to extractDump leaching, an industrial process to extract

metals from ore taken directly from the mine andstacked on the leach pad without crushingH l hi i d t i l t t t– Heap leaching, an industrial process to extractmetals from ore which has been crushed into smallchunks

– Tank leaching, a hydrometallurgical method ofextracting valuable material from oreIn situ leaching a process of recovering minerals– In-situ leaching, a process of recovering mineralssuch as copper and uranium through boreholesdrilled into the deposit

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 412: industrial chemical technology

• Leaching (pedology), the loss of mineral and organicg (p gy), gsolutes due to percolation from soil

• Bioleaching, the extraction of specific metals fromtheir ores through the use of bacteria

• In cooking, leaching generally refers to Parboiling.

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 413: industrial chemical technology

Tray DryerA t D i l d i l t d h b i• A tray Dryer is an enclosed insulated chamber inwhich trays are placed on top of each other introlleys. Tray Dryer are used where heating anddrying are essential parts of manufacturing process inindustries such as Chemicals, Dye stuff,Pharmaceutical, Food Products, Colours etc. The, ,material to be dried either wet or solids are placed inthe trays. Heat transfer is by circulation of hot air byelectric heaters or steam in radiator coils. Blowerelectric heaters or steam in radiator coils. Blowerfans are installed inside to ensure proper circulationand transfer of heat. A control panel to control thetemperature and other parameters is fixed outside thetemperature and other parameters is fixed outside thedryer. These dryers are available in Mild Steel,Stainless Steel or construction. Tray dryer is used fordrying of pigments food bakery electrodesdrying of pigments, food, bakery, electrodes,chemical and plastic powders.

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 414: industrial chemical technology

• DESCRIPTION: The Drying ovens are normallyil bl i h h i f h i d l i llavailable with choice of heating mode, as electrically

heated / steam heated & thermic fluid heated. Inelectrically heated model digital temperature controllerelectrically heated model, digital temperature controllerprovided with digital timer to facilitate working dayand night. In steam & thermic fluid heated model,g ,digital temperature indicator is provided with digitaltimer , but the temperature controller is not suppliedwith the machine AIR CIRCULATION A highlyeffective recirculating air system is provided. Theheated air is recirculated with fresh air in selectedheated air, is recirculated with fresh air in selectedproportions for optimum drying. The system isdesigned so that the materials at the top & the bottomdesigned so that the materials at the top & the bottomdry simultaneously.

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 415: industrial chemical technology

• Uniform air circulation, controlled temperature,sturdy construction and large working space are thesturdy construction and large working space are thevaluables of the oven which is suitably designed tocover wide temperature range, loading and unloadingcover wide temperature range, loading and unloadingis faster and simple.

• In higher capacities trays trolley rolls in and out ofg p y ythe chamber. For continuous operation a spare trolleycan be had for loading while the drying cycle istaking place. CONTROLLED TEMPERATURE& TIME Digital temperature controller with digitaltimer are supplied to facilitate working day andtimer are supplied to facilitate working day andnight.

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 416: industrial chemical technology

Rotary Dryers• Rotary dryers which are generally used in various• Rotary dryers which are generally used in various

industries, especially in the mineral industry. Inmineral industry, the equipment is used for drying

dit h l k li i lcommodity such as clay, kaolin, gypsum, mineralsand, limestone, potash and silica sand. Thisequipment is suitable for evaporating and drying of

id f i l f i d i dwide range of material of variegated sizes andcomposition. To lift, distribute and transport thematerial some internal lifters or flights are used. Wegoffer co-current direct-heat rotary dryer which isthe most common equipment available in the market.In this equipment, the initial heat transfer level is veryq p , yhigh which creates a considerable drop in temperatureand prevents over heating of the dryer as well as thematerial.material.

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 417: industrial chemical technology

• Apart from this, counter current dryers that weid id l f th t i l th t d t bprovide are ideal for the materials that need to be

dried to very low moisture contents. It is furtherhelps for the material in which last traces of moisture

h dare hard to remove.Other details of the equipment are mentionedbelow:below:

• Consist of a relatively long cylindrical shell• The shell ranges from 0. 6 to 5 m in diameter and

from 5 to 30 m long• It is supported by two riding rings running on a set of

rollers (rotation speed up to 25 rpm)rollers (rotation speed up to 25 rpm)• The shell is slightly inclined from the horizontal and

the slope enables material to move from the feed toth di h d d itthe discharge end under gravity

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 418: industrial chemical technology

• Feed rate ranges from less than 1 tonne to 500 tonnesper hour

• the internal flights produce a shower, or cascade, ofwet feed material through the hot gas stream

• This promotes evaporation of the moisture and breaksup lumps to produce a more uniformly dried material

• The hot air is introduced either at the feed end suchthat it moves in the same direction as the material(co current) or at the discharge end such that it moves(co-current) or at the discharge end such that it movesin the opposite direction (counter-current)

• While coming in contact with the highest temperature• While coming in contact with the highest temperatureand extremely hot gas stream, the surface moisture ofthe wet material get evaporatedg p

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 419: industrial chemical technology

• As the wet material progresses through the dryer,heat energy is lost to the material it is drying and itleaves the dryer at a comparatively low temperature

• The moisture content can be readily controlled whenthe final dried product is discharged with the gasstream at its lowest temperaturestream at its lowest temperature

• Application: The wet slurry comes in contact withthe hottest drying gases which is supplied from anthe hottest drying gases which is supplied from anexternal source and the heat transfer is done byconvection.

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 420: industrial chemical technology

This equipment find application in the productionq p pp pprocess of the following products:

• floatation concentrates• coal/coke• clays, phosphatesy , p p• suifilter cakes• minerals, fertilizers,• beet pulp• germ stillagegerm, stillage• sludges• animal feeds• animal feeds

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 421: industrial chemical technology

Rotary Dryer

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 422: industrial chemical technology

Cooling tower• Cooling towers are heat removal devices used toCooling towers are heat removal devices used to

transfer process waste heat to the atmosphere. Coolingtowers may either use the evaporation of water toy premove process heat and cool the working fluid to nearthe wet-bulb air temperature or rely solely on air tocool the working fluid to near the dry-bulb airtemperature. Common applications include cooling thecirculating water used in oil refineries chemicalcirculating water used in oil refineries, chemicalplants, power stations and building cooling. Thetowers vary in size from small roof-top units to verytowe s va y s e o s a oo top u ts to ve ylarge hyperboloid structures (as in Image 1) that can beup to 200 metres tall and 100 metres in diameter, orrectangular structures (as in Image 2) that can be over40 metres tall and 80 metres long.

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 423: industrial chemical technology

• Smaller towers are normally factory-built, while l t t d it Th ftlarger ones are constructed on site. They are often associated with nuclear power plants in popular culture.culture.

Industrial cooling towers• Industrial cooling towers can be used to remove heatIndustrial cooling towers can be used to remove heat

from various sources such as machinery or heatedprocess material. The primary use of large, industrial

li t i t th h t b b d i thcooling towers is to remove the heat absorbed in thecirculating cooling water systems used in powerplants, petroleum refineries, petrochemical plants,p , p , p p ,natural gas processing plants, food processing plants,semi-conductor plants, and for other industrialfacilities s ch as in condensers of distillation col mnsfacilities such as in condensers of distillation columns,for cooling liquid in crystallization, etc.

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 424: industrial chemical technology

• The circulation rate of cooling water in a typical 700MW coal fired power plant with a cooling towerMW coal-fired power plant with a cooling toweramounts to about 71,600 cubic metres an hour (315,000U.S. gallons per minute) and the circulating waterrequires a supply water make-up rate of perhaps 5percent (i.e., 3,600 cubic metres an hour).

• If that same plant had no cooling tower and used once-• If that same plant had no cooling tower and used once-through cooling water, it would require about 100,000cubic metres an hour and that amount of water wouldh b i l d h l khave to be continuously returned to the ocean, lake orriver from which it was obtained and continuously re-supplied to the plant. Furthermore, discharging largepp p , g g gamounts of hot water may raise the temperature of thereceiving river or lake to an unacceptable level for thelocal ecosystemlocal ecosystem.

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 425: industrial chemical technology

• Elevated water temperatures can kill fish and otheraquatic organisms (See thermal pollution ) A coolingaquatic organisms. (See thermal pollution.) A coolingtower serves to dissipate the heat into the atmosphereinstead and wind and air diffusion spreads the heatinstead and wind and air diffusion spreads the heatover a much larger area than hot water can distributeheat in a body of water. Some coal-fired and nuclearpower plants located in coastal areas do make use ofonce-through ocean water. But even there, the

ff h di h t tl t i f loffshore discharge water outlet requires very carefuldesign to avoid environmental problems.

• The world's tallest cooling tower is the 200 metre tall• The world's tallest cooling tower is the 200 metre tallcooling tower of Niederaussem Power Station.

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 426: industrial chemical technology

• Petroleum refineries also have very large coolingA i l l fi itower systems. A typical large refinery processing

40,000 metric tonnes of crude oil per day(300 000 barrels (48 000 m3) per day) circulates about(300,000 barrels (48,000 m ) per day) circulates about80,000 cubic metres of water per hour through itscooling tower system.g y

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 427: industrial chemical technology

• Types of cooling Tower Based on Air flow (Threetypes):

hi h ili b i ll• Natural draft, which utilizes buoyancy via a tallchimney. Warm, moist air naturally rises due to thedensity differential to the dry, cooler outside air. Warmy y,moist air is less dense than drier air at the samepressure. This moist air buoyancy produces a currentof air through the tower.g

• Mechanical draft, which uses power driven fanmotors to force or draw air through the tower.

I d d d f A h i l d ft t ith f– Induced draft: A mechanical draft tower with a fanat the discharge which pulls air through tower. Thefan induces hot moist air out the discharge. Thisproduces low entering and high exiting airvelocities, reducing the possibility of recirculationin which discharged air flows back into the airgintake. This fan/fin arrangement is also known asdraw-through.

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 428: industrial chemical technology

– Forced draft: A mechanical draft tower with afblower type fan at the intake. The fan forces air intothe tower, creating high entering and low exiting airvelocities. The low exiting velocity is much moreg ysusceptible to recirculation. With the fan on the airintake, the fan is more susceptible to complicationsdue to freezing conditions. Another disadvantage isdue to freezing conditions. Another disadvantage isthat a forced draft design typically requires moremotor horsepower than an equivalent induced draftdesign The forced draft benefit is its ability todesign. The forced draft benefit is its ability towork with high static pressure. They can beinstalled in more confined spaces and even in someindoor situations This fan/fill geometry is alsoindoor situations. This fan/fill geometry is alsoknown as blow-through.

• Fan assisted natural draft, A hybrid type that appearslik l d f h h i fl i i d b flike a natural draft though airflow is assisted by a fan.

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 429: industrial chemical technology

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 430: industrial chemical technology

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 431: industrial chemical technology

Some commonly used terms in the cooling towerindustryindustry

• Drift - Water droplets that are carried out of thecooling tower with the exhaust air. Drift droplets haveth t ti f i iti th tthe same concentration of impurities as the waterentering the tower. The drift rate is typically reducedby employing baffle-like devices, called driftli i h h hi h h i l feliminators, through which the air must travel after

leaving the fill and spray zones of the tower. Drift canalso be reduced by using warmer entering coolingy g g gtower temperatures.

• Blow-out - Water droplets blown out of the coolingtower by wind generally at the air inlet openingstower by wind, generally at the air inlet openings.Water may also be lost, in the absence of wind,through splashing or misting. Devices such as windscreens louvers splash deflectors and water divertersscreens, louvers, splash deflectors and water divertersare used to limit these losses.

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 432: industrial chemical technology

• Plume - The stream of saturated exhaust air leavingthe cooling tower. The plume is visible when waterg pvapor it contains condenses in contact with coolerambient air, like the saturated air in one's breath fogson a cold day. Under certain conditions, a coolingtower plume may present fogging or icing hazards toit diits surroundings.

• Blow-down - The portion of the circulating waterflow that is removed in order to maintain the amountflow that is removed in order to maintain the amountof dissolved solids. It may be noted that higher TDS(total dissolved solids) concentration in solution(tota d sso ved so ds) co ce t at o so ut oresults in greater potential cooling tower efficiency.However the higher the TDS concentration, thegreater the risk of scale, biological growth andcorrosion.

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 433: industrial chemical technology

• Leaching - The loss of wood preservative chemicalsby the washing action of the water flowing through a

d liwood structure cooling tower.• Noise - Sound energy emitted by a cooling tower

and heard (recorded) at a given distance andand heard (recorded) at a given distance anddirection. The sound is generated by the impact offalling water, by the movement of air by fans, thefan blades moving in the structure and the motorsfan blades moving in the structure, and the motors,gearboxes or drive belts.

• Approach - The approach is the difference int t b t th l d t t ttemperature between the cooled-water temperatureand the entering-air wet bulb temperature (twb).Since the cooling towers are based on the principles

f i li h i liof evaporative cooling, the maximum cooling towerefficiency depends on the wet bulb temperature ofthe air.

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 434: industrial chemical technology

• The wet-bulb temperature is a type of temperaturemeasurement that reflects the physical properties of ameasurement that reflects the physical properties of asystem with a mixture of a gas and a vapor, usually airand water vapor

• Range The range is the temperature difference• Range - The range is the temperature difference between the water inlet and water exit.

• Fill - Inside the tower, fills are added to increase contact surface as well as contact time between air and water. Thus they provide better heat transfer. The efficiency of the tower also depends on them. There y pare two types of fills that may be used: – Film type fill (causes water to spread into a thin

film)film)– Splash type fill (breaks up water and interrupts its

vertical progress)•

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 435: industrial chemical technology

THANK YOUTHANK YOU

Prepared By: Prof.J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 436: industrial chemical technology

DistillationDistillationDistillationDistillationR. M. PatelR. M. Patel

Prepared By: Prof.R. M. Patel, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 437: industrial chemical technology

Distillation in IndustriesDistillation in IndustriesDistillation in IndustriesDistillation in Industries

Prepared By: Prof.R. M. Patel, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 438: industrial chemical technology

Why distillation?Why distillation?Why distillation?Why distillation?• Distillation is used separate 2 or • Distillation is used separate 2 or

more miscible substance substances (Ex: Ethanol & Water)(Ex: Ethanol & Water)

• It increases purity of substance present in the mixture (Both Ethanol present in the mixture (Both Ethanol & Water).It i ti d • It uses vaporization and condensation method for purification.

Prepared By: Prof.R. M. Patel, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 439: industrial chemical technology

A. Vaporization and Condensation

Distillation - Theory

1. For any liquid, the individual molecules within the liquid arecontinuously in motion

2. A small percentage of these molecules attain enough kineticenergy to leave the liquid phase

3. This exerts an opposing pressure on the atmosphere above thesolution known as the vapor pressure, P

Atmospheric pressure, Patm

Vapor Pressure, P

Prepared By: Prof.R. M. Patel, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 440: industrial chemical technology

A. Vaporization and Condensation

Distillation - Theory

4. When enough energy, in the form of heat, is imparted to thesolution the vapor pressure becomes equal to the atmosphericpressure and the liquid begins to boilpressure and the liquid begins to boil

P < Patm P ≥ Patm

Prepared By: Prof.R. M. Patel, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 441: industrial chemical technology

The vapor obtained from a boiling liquid, once cooled, will re-condense to a liquid known as the distillate

The complete process is

ll dcalled a distillation

DISTILLATION SYSTEM

Prepared By: Prof.R. M. Patel, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 442: industrial chemical technology

Simple (Differential) Simple (Differential) DistillationDistillationDistillationDistillation

Prepared By: Prof.R. M. Patel, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 443: industrial chemical technology

Fractional DistillationFractional DistillationPrepared By: Prof.R. M. Patel, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 444: industrial chemical technology

Distillation separation of Distillation separation of EthanolEthanol waterwaterEthanolEthanol--waterwater

Prepared By: Prof.R. M. Patel, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 445: industrial chemical technology

Prepared By: Prof.R. M. Patel, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 446: industrial chemical technology

Water

Ethanol + Water

Prepared By: Prof.R. M. Patel, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 447: industrial chemical technology

Movie of distillationMovie of distillationMovie of distillationMovie of distillation

Prepared By: Prof.R. M. Patel, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 448: industrial chemical technology

Vapor-Liquid Equilibrium RelationsVapor Liquid Equilibrium RelationsRaoult’s Law

An ideal law, Raoult’s law, can be defined for vapor-liquid phases in equilibrium (only ideal solution e.g. benzene-toluene, hexane-heptane etc.

Where

AAA xPp = (1)

pA is the partial pressure of component A in the vapor in Pa (atm)

PA is the vapor pressure of pure A in Pa (atm)

xA is the mole fraction of A in the liquid.

BA xx +=1Composition in liquid: (2)

13BA yy +=1Composition in vapor: (3)

Prepared By: Prof.R. M. Patel, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 449: industrial chemical technology

Boiling-Point Diagrams and xy Plots

Boiling-point diagram for system benzene (A)-toluene (B) at a total pressure of 101.32 kPa.

Boiling Point Diagrams and xy Plots

Dew point is the temperature at which the saturated vapour starts to condense.

Bubble-point is the temperature atBubble point is the temperature at which the liquid starts to boil.

The difference between liquid and iti i th b i fvapour compositions is the basis for

distillation operations.

14

Prepared By: Prof.R. M. Patel, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 450: industrial chemical technology

A common method of plotting the equilibrium data is shown in Figure where yA is plotted versus xA for the benzene-toluene system. The 45º line is given to show that yA is richer in component A than is xA.

15

Figure: Equilibrium diagram for system benzene(A) – toluene(B) at 101.32 kPa (1atm).

Prepared By: Prof.R. M. Patel, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 451: industrial chemical technology

Differential distillationDifferential distillationDifferential distillationDifferential distillation

Prepared By: Prof.R. M. Patel, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 452: industrial chemical technology

Differential DistillationDifferential Distillation

• Rayleigh equation:

The pot is filled with liquid mixture and heated.

Vapour flows upwards though the Rayleigh equation:

∫∫ −=⎟

⎠⎞

⎜⎝⎛= ∗

FxF

xydx

WF

LdL ln

p p gcolumn and condenses at the top.

Part of the liquid is returned to the column as reflux, and the remainder ⎠⎝

wxW xyWL

F = moles of feed

W = Moles of residue

withdrawn as distillate.

Nothing is added or withdrawn from the still until the run is completed.W = Moles of residue

xF= mole fraction of A in feed

xW= mole fraction of A in residue

Prepared By: Prof.R. M. Patel, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 453: industrial chemical technology

4.4.1 Introduction to Distillation with Reflux

1. Feed enters the column somewhere in th iddl f th l

In a distillation column the stages (referred to as sieve plates or trays) in a distillation tower are arranged vertically, as shown schematically in figure below.

the middle of the column.

2. Feed is liquid, it flows down to a sieve tray or stage.

3. Vapor enters the tray and bubbles through the liquid on this tray as the entering liquid flows across.

5. The vapor continues up to the next tray t h it i i t t d ith

4. The vapor and liquid leaving the tray are essentially in equilibrium.

or stage, where it is again contacted with a downflowing liquid.

6. The concentration of the more volatile component is being increased in the vapor

18

form each stage going upward and decreased in the liquid from each stage going donwards.

Prepared By: Prof.R. M. Patel, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 454: industrial chemical technology

Continuous Distillation with Reflux

7. The final vapor product coming h d i d d i d

In a distillation column the stages (referred to as sieve plates or trays) in a distillation tower are arranged vertically, as shown schematically in figure below.

overhead is condensed in a condenser and a portion of the liquid product (distillate) is removed, which contains a high concentration of A.

8. The remaining liquid from the condenser is returned (refluxed) as a liquid to the top tray.

9. The liquid leaving the bottom tray enters a reboiler, where it partially vaporized, and the remaining liquid, which is lean in A or rich in B, is withdrawn as liquid productliquid product.

10. The vapor from the reboiler is sent back to the bottom stage or trays is much greater.

Prepared By: Prof.R. M. Patel, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 455: industrial chemical technology

Continuous distillationContinuous distillationPrepared By: Prof.R. M. Patel, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 456: industrial chemical technology

Industrial Distillation Industrial Distillation columncolumncolumncolumn

Mccabe.swfMccabe.swf

Prepared By: Prof.R. M. Patel, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 457: industrial chemical technology

Distillation Design

Industrial Chemical TechnologyIndustrial Chemical TechnologyLecture - 3R. M. PatelN. G. Patel Polytechnic,Isroli – Afwa, Bardoli.

1

Prepared By: Prof.R. M. Patel, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 458: industrial chemical technology

What are you going to learn in this chapter?What are you going to learn in this chapter?

4.1 Vapor-Liquid Equilibrium Relations

4.2 Single-Stage Equilibrium Contact for Vapor-Liquid g g q p q

System

4 3 Distillation with reflux and McCabe-Thiele Method4.3 Distillation with reflux and McCabe Thiele Method

2

Prepared By: Prof.R. M. Patel, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 459: industrial chemical technology

4 1 Vapor-Liquid Equilibrium Relations4.1 Vapor Liquid Equilibrium Relations4.1.1 Raoult’s Law

An ideal law, Raoult’s law, can be defined for vapor-liquid phases in equilibrium (only ideal solution e.g. benzene-toluene, hexane-heptane etc.

Where

AAA xPp = (1)

pA is the partial pressure of component A in the vapor in Pa (atm)

PA is the vapor pressure of pure A in Pa (atm)

xA is the mole fraction of A in the liquid.

BA xx +=1Composition in liquid: (2)

3BA yy +=1Composition in vapor: (3)

Prepared By: Prof.R. M. Patel, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 460: industrial chemical technology

4.1.2 Boiling-Point Diagrams and xy Plots

Boiling-point diagram for system benzene (A)-toluene (B) at a total pressure of 101.32 kPa.

4.1.2 Boiling Point Diagrams and xy Plots

Dew point is the temperature at which the saturated vapour starts to condense.

Bubble-point is the temperature atBubble point is the temperature at which the liquid starts to boil.

The difference between liquid and iti i th b i fvapour compositions is the basis for

distillation operations.

4

Prepared By: Prof.R. M. Patel, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 461: industrial chemical technology

4.1.2 Boiling-Point Diagrams and xy Plots

Boiling-point diagram for system benzene (A)-toluene (B) at a total pressure of 101.32 kPa.

4.1.2 Boiling Point Diagrams and xy Plots

If we start with a cold liquid composition is xA1 = 0.318 (xB1p A1 ( B1= 0.682) and heat the mixture, it will start to boil at 98ºC.

The first vapor composition in equilibrium is y = 0 532 (y =equilibrium is yA1 = 0.532 (yB1 = 0.468).

Continue boiling, the composition xA will move to the p Aleft since yA is richer in A.

5

Prepared By: Prof.R. M. Patel, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 462: industrial chemical technology

4.1.2 Boiling-Point Diagrams and xy Plots

The boiling point diagram can be calculated from (1) the pure vapor-pressure data in the table below and (2) the following equations:

Ppp BA =+

PPP )1(

(4)

PxPxP ABAA =−+ )1(

PxP

Pp

y AAAA ==

(5)

(6)PP (6)

Where

pA, pB are the partial pressure of component A and B in the vapor in Pa (atm)

PA , PB are the vapor pressure of pure A and pure B in Pa (atm)

P is total pressure in Pa (atm)

6

xA is the mole fraction of A in the liquid.

Prepared By: Prof.R. M. Patel, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 463: industrial chemical technology

4.1.2 Boiling-Point Diagrams and xy Plots

The boiling point diagram can be calculated from (1) the pure vapor-pressure data in the table below and (2) the following equations:

1

7

Prepared By: Prof.R. M. Patel, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 464: industrial chemical technology

Ex 4.1 Use of Raoult’s Law for Boiling-Point Diagram

Calculate the vapor and liquid compositions in equilibrium at 95ºC (368.2K) for benzene-toluene using the vapor pressure from the table 1 at 101.32 kPa.

Solution: At 95ºC from Table 1 for benzene, PA = 155.7 kPa and PB = 63.3 kPa. Substituting into Eq.(5) and solving,

155 7( ) 63 3(1 ) 101 32 kP (760 H )

PxPxP ABAA =−+ )1(

155.7(xA) + 63.3(1-xA) = 101.32 kPa (760 mmHg)

Hence, xA= 0.411 and xB= 1 – xA = 1 - 0.411 = 0.589. Substituting into , A B A geqn.(6),

632.032101

)411.0(7.155====

PxP

Ppy AAA

A

8

32.101PP

Prepared By: Prof.R. M. Patel, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 465: industrial chemical technology

The boiling point diagram can be calculated from the pure vapor-pressure g p g p p pdata in the table below and the following equations:

11

9

Prepared By: Prof.R. M. Patel, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 466: industrial chemical technology

A common method of plotting the equilibrium data is shown in Fig. 2 where yA is plotted versus xA for the benzene-toluene system. The 45º line is given to show that yA is richer in component A than is xA.

10

Fig. 2 Equilibrium diagram for system benzene(A) – toluene(B) at 101.32 kPa (1atm).

Prepared By: Prof.R. M. Patel, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 467: industrial chemical technology

4 1 Vapor-Liquid Equilibrium Relations4.1 Vapor Liquid Equilibrium Relations4.1.2 Boiling-Point Diagrams and xy Plots

Maximum-boiling azeotropeMinimum-boiling azeotropeIdeal boiling point diagram

An azeotrope is a mixture of two or more liquids in such a ratio that its composition cannot be changed by simple distillation.

11

This occurs because, when an azeotrope is boiled, the resulting vapor has the same ratio of constituents as the original mixture.

Prepared By: Prof.R. M. Patel, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 468: industrial chemical technology

4 1 2 Boiling-Point Diagrams and xy Plots

4.1 Vapor-Liquid Equilibrium Relations4.1.2 Boiling-Point Diagrams and xy Plots

12

Prepared By: Prof.R. M. Patel, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 469: industrial chemical technology

4 2 Single-Stage Equilibrium Contact for Vapor-Liquid System4.2 Single-Stage Equilibrium Contact for Vapor-Liquid System

A single equilibrium stage is

- the two different phases are brought into intimate contact with each other. p g- The mixing time is long enough and the components are essentially at equilibrium in the two phases after separation.

V1 V2 Where

V1, V2 is a vapor

L L is a liquidL0 L1

L0, L1is a liquid

MVLVL =+=+ 1120Total mass balance:

AMAAAA MxyVxLyVxL =+=+ 11112200Mass A balance:

13In case of constant molal overflow : V1 = V2 and L0 = L1

Prepared By: Prof.R. M. Patel, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 470: industrial chemical technology

Ex 4.2 Equilibrium Contact of Vapor-Liquid MixtureEx 4.2 Equilibrium Contact of Vapor Liquid Mixture

A vapor at the dew point and 101.32 kPa containing a mole fraction of 0.40 benzene (A) and 0.60 toluene (B) and 100 kg mol total vapour is contacted with 110 kg mol of a liquid at the bubble point containingis contacted with 110 kg mol of a liquid at the bubble point containing a mole fraction of 0.30 benzene and 0.70 toluene. The two streams are contacted in a single stage, and the outlet streams leave in equilibrium with each other Assume constant molal overflowequilibrium with each other. Assume constant molal overflow. Calculate the amounts and compositions of the exit streams.

Solution: The given values are V2 = 100 kg mol, yA2 = 0.40, L0=110 kg mol g 2 g , yA2 , 0 g, and xA0 = 0.30.

V1, yA1 V2, yA2For constant molal overflow,

V V d L L

L0, xA0 L1, xA1

V2 = V1 and L0 = L1.

14

Prepared By: Prof.R. M. Patel, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 471: industrial chemical technology

Material balance on component A,

AMAAAA MxyVxLyVxL =+=+ 11112200

11 100110)40.0(100)30.0(110 AA yx +=+

To solve equation above, the equilibrium relation between yA1 and xA1 in figure below must be used.

First, we assume that xA1 = 0.20 and substitute into equation above toFirst, we assume that xA1 0.20 and substitute into equation above to solve for yA1.

1100)2.0(110)40.0(100)30.0(110 Ay+=+

Assuming that xA1 = 0.20 and solving yA1 = 0.51.

Next, assuming that xA1=0.40 and solving, yA1 = 0.29., g A1 g, yA1

(These point are plotted on the graph.)

At the intersection of this line with the equilibrium curve,

15

yA1 = 0.455 and xA1 = 0.25. Answer

Prepared By: Prof.R. M. Patel, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 472: industrial chemical technology

16

Prepared By: Prof.R. M. Patel, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 473: industrial chemical technology

4 2 1 R l ti V l tilit f V Li id S t4.2.1 Relative Volatility of Vapor-Liquid Systems

Relative volatility )( ABα

// AAAA xyxy==α

It is a measure of the differences in volatility between 2 components, and hence their boiling points. It indicates how easy or difficult a particular separation will be.

)1)(1(/ AABBAB xyxy −−

==α

Where αAB is the relative volatility of A with respect to B in the binary system.

PxPy AA

A =

PPxPy BB

B =Raoult’s law:

AAB

AABA x

xy)1(1 −+

=αα

B

AAB P

P=α

17

AAB x)1(1+ α

when αAB is above 1.0, a separation is possible.

Prepared By: Prof.R. M. Patel, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 474: industrial chemical technology

Ex 4.3 Using data from table 1 calculate the relative volatility for theEx 4.3 Using data from table 1 calculate the relative volatility for the benzene-toluene system at 85ºC (358.2K) and 105ºC (378.2K)

Solution: At 85ºC, substituting into equation below for a system following R tl’ lRaoutl’s law,

54.20.469.116===

B

AAB P

Similarly at 105ºC,

38.20862.204==α

The variation in α is about 7%. Answer

0.86

18

Prepared By: Prof.R. M. Patel, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 475: industrial chemical technology

4.3 Distillation with Reflux and McCabe-Thiele Method4.3.1 Introduction to Distillation with Reflux

R tifi iti (f ti ti ) t di till ti ith fl iRectificaition (fractionation) or stage distillation with reflux is

a series of flash-vaporization stages are arranged in a series which the vapor and liquid products from each stage flow countercurrently to each other.

V2V1 V2 V3 Vn Vn+1

The liquid in a stage is conducted or flows to the stage below and the vapor from a stage flow upward to the stage above.

L1L0 L1 L2Ln-1 Ln

nnnn LVLV +=+ −+ 11

xLyVxLyV +=+ 1111

A total material balance:

A component balance on A:

19

nnnnnnnn xLyVxLyV ++ −−++ 1111A component balance on A:

Prepared By: Prof.R. M. Patel, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 476: industrial chemical technology

4.3.2 McCabe-Thiele Method of Calculation for Number of Theoretical StagesTheoretical Stages4.3.2A) Introduction and assumptions

A mathematical – graphical method for determining the number of theoretical trays or stages needed for a given separation of a binary mixture of A and B has been developed by McCabe and Thiele.

The method uses material balances around certain parts of the tower, which give operating lines and the xy equilibrium curve for the system.

Main assumption

1) Equimolar overflow through the tower between the feed inlet and the top tray and the feed inlet and bottom tray.

2) Liquid and vapor streams enter a tray, are equilibrated, and leave.

20

Prepared By: Prof.R. M. Patel, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 477: industrial chemical technology

A total material balance:

nnnn LVLV +=+ −+ 11 nnnn+ 11

A component A balance:

LVLV nnnnnnnn xLyVxLyV +=+ −−++ 1111

Where

Vn+1 is mol/h of vapor from tray n+1

Ln is mol/h liquid from tray n

yn+1 is mole fraction of A in Vn+1 and so on.

21

Prepared By: Prof.R. M. Patel, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 478: industrial chemical technology

4.3.2B) Equation for enriching section

A total material balance:

WDF += (1)

A component A balance:

wDF WxDxFx += (2)

Where

F is the entering feed (mol/h)F is the entering feed (mol/h)

D is the distillate (mol/h)

W is the bottoms (mol/h)

22

Prepared By: Prof.R. M. Patel, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 479: industrial chemical technology

Material balance over dashed-line section: DLV nn +=+1(3)

23

A balance on component A: DDxxLyV nnnn +=++ 11 (4)

Prepared By: Prof.R. M. Patel, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 480: industrial chemical technology

Solving for yn+1, the enriching-section operating line is

Dn DxL(5)

)1/(, 11 +=+= ++ RRVLDLV nnnnSince and equation becomes

111

+++ +=

n

Dn

n

nn V

xV

y (5)

111 ++

+=+ R

xxR

Ry Dnn (6)

DLR n /=where = reflux ratio = constant.

The eqn. (1) is a straight line on a plot of vapor composition versus liquid compositioncomposition.

24

Prepared By: Prof.R. M. Patel, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 481: industrial chemical technology

The slope is or . It intersects the y=x line (45º diagonal

line) at . The intercept of the operating line at x = 0 is .1/ +nn VL )1/( +RR

)1/( += Rxy DDxx =

The theoretical stages are determined by starting at xD and stepping off the first

plate to x1. Then y2 is the composition of the vapor passing the liquid x1.

I i il th th th ti l t t d ff d th t i

25

In a similar manner, the other theoretical trays are stepped off down the tower in

the enriching section to the feed tray.

Prepared By: Prof.R. M. Patel, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 482: industrial chemical technology

4.3.2C) Equation for stripping section

Material balance over dashed-line section: WLV mm −=+1 (7)

26

A component A balance: wWxxLyV mmmm −=++ 11 (8)

Prepared By: Prof.R. M. Patel, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 483: industrial chemical technology

Solving for ym+1, the enriching-section operating line is

Dm DxL(9)

Again, since equimolal flow flow is assumed, = constant and

111

+++ +=

m

Dm

m

mm V

xV

y (9)

NLL =Again, since equimolal flow flow is assumed, constant and

= constant, eqn. (2) is a straight line when plotted as y versus x,

with a slope of . It intersects the y = x line at x = xw.

Th i t t t 0 i1/ +mm VL

Nm LL

Nm VV =+1

/VWThe intercept at x = 0 is .1/ +−= mW VWxy

27

Prepared By: Prof.R. M. Patel, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 484: industrial chemical technology

The theoretical stages for the stripping section are determined by starting at

xW going up to yW and then across to the operating line etc

28

xW, going up to yW, and then across to the operating line, etc.

Prepared By: Prof.R. M. Patel, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 485: industrial chemical technology

4.3.2D) Effect of feed conditions

The condition of feed stream is represented by the quantity q, which is the mole fraction of liquid in feed.

qFLL nm +=

FqVV mn )1( −+=

(10)

(11)

The enriching and striping operating-line equations on an xy diagram can be derived as follows:

(12)Dnn DxxLyV +=

wmm WxxLyV −=

Where the y and x values are the point of

(12)

(13)

)()()( wDnmnm WxDxxLLyVV +−−=−

e e t e y a d a ues a e t e po t ointersection of the two operating lines. Subtracting eqn.(3) from eqn.(4),

(14)

29

Prepared By: Prof.R. M. Patel, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 486: industrial chemical technology

4.3.2D) Effect of feed conditions

Substituting eqn.(2), (10), and (11) into eqn.(14) and rearranging,

(15)11 −−

−=

qxx

qqy F

λ)(

1 FbpL TTcq

−+=

λ)(

1 dFpV TTcq

−+=

Cold-liquid feed Superheated vapor

where

CpL, CpV = specific heats of liquid and vapor, respectively

TF = temperature of feed

Tb, Td = bubble point and dew point of feed respectively

30

λ = heat of vaporization

Prepared By: Prof.R. M. Patel, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 487: industrial chemical technology

4.3.2E) Location of the feed tray in a tower and number of trays.

From eqn.(15), the q-line equation and is the locus of the intersection of the two operating lines. Setting y = x in eqn(15), the intersection of the q-line equation with the 45º line is y=x=xF, where xF is the overall composition of the feed.

In given below the figure, the q line is plotted for various feed conditions. The slope of the q line is q/(q-1).

q = 0 (saturated vapor)

q = 1 (saturated liquid)

q > 1(subcooled liquid)q > 1(subcooled liquid)

q < 0 (superheated vapor)

0 < q < 1 (mix of liquid and vapor)vapor)

31

Prepared By: Prof.R. M. Patel, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 488: industrial chemical technology

4.3.2D) Number of stages and trays

1st point

2nd point

3rd pointn = 7 =number of tray + reboiler

Number of tray = 6

Prepared By: Prof.R. M. Patel, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 489: industrial chemical technology

4.3.2F) Using Operating Lines and the Feed Line in McCabe-Thiele DesignDesign

Slope = R/(R+1)

Slope = q/(1-q)

Slope = L/ V

Prepared By: Prof.R. M. Patel, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 490: industrial chemical technology

Ex 4.4 A continuous fractioning column is to be designed to separate 30,000 kg/h of a mixture of 40 percent benzene and 60 percent toluene into an overhead product containing 97 percent benzene and a bottom product containing 98 percent toluene. These percentages are by weight. A fl ti f 3 5 l t 1 l f d t i t b d Th l l l t tA reflux ratio of 3.5 mol to 1 mol of product is to be used. The molal latent heats of benzene and toluene are 7,360 and 7,960 cal/g mol, respectively. Benzene and toluene from a nearly ideal system with a relative volatility of about 2 5 The feed has a boiling point of 95ºC at arelative volatility of about 2.5. The feed has a boiling point of 95ºC at a pressure of 1 atm.

a) Calculate the moles of overhead product and bottom product per hour.

b) Determine the number of ideal plates and the position of the feed plate (i) if the feed is liquid and at its boiling point; (ii) if the feed is liquid and at 20ºC (specific heat 0.44 cal/g.ºC); (iii) if the feed is a mixture of two-thirds ( p g ); ( )vapor and one-third liquid.

Prepared By: Prof.R. M. Patel, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 491: industrial chemical technology

Solution (a)

440.0

9260

7840

7840

=+

=Fx 0235.0

9298

782

782

=+

=Bx974.0

923

7897

7897

=+

=Dx

The average molecular weight of the feed is

9278 92789278

8.856040100

=+

The average of heat vaporization is

9278+

gmolcal /696,7)960,7(56.0)360,7(44.0 =+=λ

The feed rate F is 30,000/85.8 = 350 kg mol/h. By an overall benzene balance, using Eq. below

0235.0440.0⎟⎞

⎜⎛ − hkgmolD /4.153

0235.0974.00235.0440.0350 =⎟

⎠⎞

⎜⎝⎛

−=

hkgmolB /61964153350 == hkgmolB /6.1964.153350 =−=

Prepared By: Prof.R. M. Patel, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 492: industrial chemical technology

Solution (b) (i),

We determine the number of ideal plates and position of the feed plateWe determine the number of ideal plates and position of the feed plate.

1) Plot the equilibrium diagram, erect verticals at xD, xF, and xB.

2) Draw the feed line. Here q=1, and the feed line is vertical.) q ,

3) Plot the operating lines. The intercept of the rectifying lie on the y axis is, xD/(R+1) = 0.974/(3.5+1) = 0.216 (eqn (6)). From the intersection of the rectifying operating line and the feed line the strippingintersection of the rectifying operating line and the feed line, the stripping line is drawn.

4) Draw the rectangular steps between the two operating lines d th ilib i Th t i i li i t th th t Band the equilibrium curve. The stripping line is at the seventh step. By

counting steps it is found that, besides the reboiler, 11 ideal plates are needed and feed should be introduced on the seventh plate from the top.

Prepared By: Prof.R. M. Patel, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 493: industrial chemical technology

Prepared By: Prof.R. M. Patel, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 494: industrial chemical technology

Solution (b) (ii)Solution (b) (ii),

The latent heat of vaporization of the feed λ is 7,696/85.8 = 98.7 cal/g.

)2095(44.0 − 37.17.89

)2095(44.01 =+=q

11 −−

−=

qx

xq

qy F

The slope of the feed line is -1.37/(1-1.37) = 3.70. When steps are drawn for this case, as shown in Fig. below, it is found that a reboiler and 10 ideal plates are needed and that the feed should be introduced on the psixth plate.

Prepared By: Prof.R. M. Patel, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 495: industrial chemical technology

Prepared By: Prof.R. M. Patel, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 496: industrial chemical technology

Solution (b) (iii),

From the definition of q it follows that for this case q = 1/3 and the slope of the feed line is -0.5. The solution is shown in Fig. below. It calls for aof the feed line is 0.5. The solution is shown in Fig. below. It calls for a reboiler and 12 plates, with the feed entering on the seventh plate.

Prepared By: Prof.R. M. Patel, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 497: industrial chemical technology

Prepared By: Prof.R. M. Patel, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 498: industrial chemical technology

4.3.3 Total and Minimum Reflux Ratio for McCabe-Thiele4.3.3 Total and Minimum Reflux Ratio for McCabe Thiele Method

4.3.3A Total flux

One limiting values of reflux ratio is that of total reflux, or R = ∞. Since R = Ln/Dand, by eqn.(16).

DLV += (16)DLV nn +=+1

Then Ln is very large, as is the vapor flow Vn. This means that the slope R/(R+1)of the enriching operating line becomes 1.0 and the operating lines of both

(16)

sections of the column coincide with the 45º diagonol line, as shown in Fig below.

Minimum number of trays can be obtained by returning all the overheadcondensed vapor V1 from the top of the tower back to the tower as reflux i econdensed vapor V1 from the top of the tower back to the tower as reflux, i.e.,total reflux. Also, the liquid in the bottoms is reboiled.

42

Prepared By: Prof.R. M. Patel, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 499: industrial chemical technology

Minimum number of theoretical steps Nm

when a total condenser is used (α is constant).av

w

w

D

D

m

xx

xx

Nαlog

11

log ⎟⎟⎠

⎞⎜⎜⎝

⎛ −−

=avg

( ) 2/11 wav ααα =For small variations in α,

where α1 is the relative volatility of the overhead vapor

i th l ti l tilit f th b tt li id

43

αw is the relative volatility of the bottoms liquid.

Prepared By: Prof.R. M. Patel, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 500: industrial chemical technology

4.3.3B Minimum reflux ratio

The minimum reflux ratio (Rm) will require an infinite number of trays for the givenseparation desired of xD and xW.

If R is decreased the slope of the enriching operating line R/(R+1) is decreasedIf R is decreased, the slope of the enriching operating line R/(R+1) is decreased,and the intersection of this line and the stripping line with the q line moves fartherfrom the 45º line and closer to the equilibrium line.

Two operating lines touch theequilibrium line (“pinch point”) at y’and x’ (number of steps requiredbecomes infinite).)

The line passes through the points x’,y’ and xD (y=xD):

xxyx

RR

D

D

m

m

′−′−

=+1

44

Prepared By: Prof.R. M. Patel, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 501: industrial chemical technology

4.3.3C Operating and optimum reflux ratiop g p

Total reflux = number of plates is a minimum, but the tower diameter is infinite.

This corresponds to an infinite cost of tower and steam and cooling water ThisThis corresponds to an infinite cost of tower and steam and cooling water. Thisis the limit in the tower operation.

Minimum reflux = number of trays is infinite, which again gives an infinite cost.These are the two limits in operation of the tower.

Actual operating reflux ratio to use is in between these two limits. The optimumreflux ratio to use for lowest total cost per year is between the minimum Rm andtotal reflux (1.2Rm to 1.5Rm).

45

Prepared By: Prof.R. M. Patel, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 502: industrial chemical technology

Ex 4.5 What are (a) the minimum reflux ratio and (b) the minimumEx 4.5 What are (a) the minimum reflux ratio and (b) the minimum number of plates for cases (b)(i), (b)(ii), and (b)(iii) of EX 4.7 if αavis given as 2.47.

Solution (a)

For minimum reflux ratio use eqn. (x). Here xD = 0.974. The results are given in Table belowgiven in Table below.

Solution (b)

For minimum number of plates the reflux ratio is infinite the operatingFor minimum number of plates, the reflux ratio is infinite, the operating lines coincide with the diagonal, and there are no differences among the three cases. Use the αav 2.47 and equation below we get,

1 ⎞⎛

711058

1026.0024.0976.0974.0ln

log

11

log−⎟⎠⎞

⎜⎝⎛

××

=⎟⎟⎠

⎞⎜⎜⎝

⎛ −−

=av

w

w

D

D

m

xx

xx

46The minimum number of ideal plates is 7 plus a reboiler.71105.8 =−=

Prepared By: Prof.R. M. Patel, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 503: industrial chemical technology

Homework No.6

1. The vapor-pressure data are given below for the system hexane-octane.

(a) Using Raoult’s law, calculate and plot the xy data at a total pressure of 101.32 kPa.

(b) Plot the boiling-point diagram.

T(ºF) T(ºC) Vapor Pressure

n-Hexane n-Octane

kP H kP HkPa mmHg kPa mmHg

155.6 68.7 101.3 760 16.1 121

175 79.4 136.7 1025 23.1 173

200 93.3 197.3 1480 37.1 278

225 107.2 284.0 2130 57.9 434

258 2 125 7 456 0 3420 101 3 760258.2 125.7 456.0 3420 101.3 760

Prepared By: Prof.R. M. Patel, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 504: industrial chemical technology

Homework No.7 (continue)

2. A mixture of 50 g mol of liquid benzene and 50 g water. Determine the boiling at 101.32 kPa pressure. Liquid benzene g p qis immiscible in water. Determine the boiling point of the mixture and the composition of the vapor. Which component will first be removed completely from the still? Vapor pressure data of the pure components are as follows:

Temperature Pwater PbenzeneTemperature Pwater(mm Hg)

Pbenzene(mm Hg)

K ºC

308.5 35.3 43 150

325.9 52.7 106 300

345.8 72.6 261 600

353.3 80.1 356 760

Prepared By: Prof.R. M. Patel, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 505: industrial chemical technology

Homework No.8

1. A saturated liquid feed of 200 mol/h at the boiling pointcontaining 42mol% heptane and 58% ethyl benzene is to befractionated at 101.32 kPa abs to give a distillate containing 97mol% heptane and a bottoms containing 1.1 mol% heptane.The reflux ratio used is 2.5:1. Calculate the mol/h distillate,

l/h b tt th ti l b f t d th f d tmol/h bottoms, theoretical number of trays, and the feed traynumber. Equilibrium data are given below at 101.32 kPa abspressure for the mole fraction n-heptane xH and yH.

Temperature Temperature

K ºC xH yH K ºC xH yH

409.3 136.1 0 0 383.8 110.6 0.485 0.730

402.6 129.4 0.08 0.23 376.0 102.8 0.790 0.904

392.6 119.4 0.25 0.514 371.5 98.3 1.000 1.000

Prepared By: Prof.R. M. Patel, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 506: industrial chemical technology

Homework No.8 (continue)

2. Determine the minimum reflux ration Rm and the minimum number of theoretical plates at total reflux for the rectification of a mixture of heptane and ethyl benzene as given in problem 1. Do this by the graphical mehtods of McCabe-Thiele.

Prepared By: Prof.R. M. Patel, Lecturer,N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 507: industrial chemical technology

ICT Chemical Engineering Department

EXPERIMENT‐1              Date: 

Mass Transfer Technology (Prepared By: Mr. J. M. Vasoya) 

Tray & Rotary Dryer 

Objective: ‐ To measure moisture content of the given sample by using tray  

& rotary drier& Find out Drying time. 

Apparatus: ‐ Tray drier, Rotary drier, weight machine, dish 

Chemicals: ‐ sand, water 

Theory:‐     

Tray dryer  : It is the simplest batch dryer. It consists of enclosed insulated 

cabinet into which material to be dried is placed on a number of trays. The 

tray may be fabricated from sheets or from screens. It is provided with the 

inlet and outlet connection for air. A heating coil either electrical or steam 

heating is incorporated in it.  

The material to be dried  is spread over the trays and put  into the cabinet 

and then it is closed. The steam is continuously passed through the coil and 

fan is started. Air is heated by heating coils, its relative humidity decreases 

and hot  air  then passes over  the  trays.  The moisture  is evaporated  from 

wet  feed,  gets  added  in  air  and  finally  air  leaves  the  dryer  through  the 

outlet. 

Rotary dryer: This type of dryer, that may be directly or indirectly heated, is 

adopted  for  drying  of  free  flowing  granular materials  on  large  scale.  It 

consists of hollow cylindrical shell, set with  its axis at a slight angle to the 

horizontal, so that the material is consequently advanced through the dryer 

from one end to another end. 

Prepared By: Prof. J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer, N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 508: industrial chemical technology

ICT Chemical Engineering Department

It is supported on the supporting rollers so that it can be rotated. To avoid 

its slipping over the rollers,  it  is fitted with thrust wheels. It  is fitted  inside 

with  flights which  lift  the material upward and  shower  it down  from  the 

top. The material to be dried is fed at the high end of the dryer by a hopper 

and the product is taken out from the lower end of the dryer. The material 

moves through dryer by virtue of rotation, heat effect and inclination of the 

cylindrical shell. 

Rate of drying: 

 The rate,  

Nc =Ky (Ys – Y)  

Where, 

Nc = Rate of drying, 

Ky = Gas mass transfer co – efficient, 

Y = Absolute humidity   

Ys = Saturated temperature at drying surface, 

                                     Temperature co –efficient; constant  

Also, 

   Where,  

Ss = mass of dry solid  

A = cross section of bed  

X = moisture content i.e. mass of moisture / mass of dry solids  

Drying Time:    

Prepared By: Prof. J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer, N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 509: industrial chemical technology

ICT Chemical Engineering Department

Drying Time= Ss/A ∫ dx/N 

 

Procedure:‐    

      Tray drier 

 1.  Take an empty pan & weigh it. 

2. Put  500gm  sand  in  it &  distribute  it  through  the  X‐

surface of the pan. 

3. Add  100gm  of water  into  sand &  again weight  the 

pan with wet solid. 

4. Now  start  the  experiment  by  starting  the  heat  & 

adjust  temperature  here  about  100 0 C & wait  till 

steady state is achieved. 

5. Put the pan  in oven     & note down the weigh of the 

pan initially after two minutes & then after every gm 

of loss of the weight.  

Rotary Drier 

1. Feed material in rotary drier and operate drier for 10 

minutes.  

2. Weigh remove sample & record data. 

 

 

 

 

Prepared By: Prof. J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer, N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 510: industrial chemical technology

ICT Chemical Engineering Department

 

Observations:‐ 

Tray dryer 

1. Weight of empty pan = ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ gm. 

2. Weight of pan + dry solid = ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ gm. 

3. Weight of pan + dry solid + H2O = ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ gm. 

4. Temperature = ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ 0 C. 

5. Weight of dry solid = ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐gm. 

Rotary dryer 

1. Dry solid + H2O = ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ gm. 

2. Weight of dry solid= ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐gm. 

Observation Table for Tray Dryer:‐    

Sr. 

No. 

Time 

  

Wt. of solid 

 

X  N  1/N 

1     

2     

3     

4     

5     

6     

7     

8     

Prepared By: Prof. J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer, N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 511: industrial chemical technology

ICT Chemical Engineering Department

 

Graph:‐1/N vs X 

Result: ‐  

Drying Time= 

Conclusion:‐ 

Prepared By: Prof. J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer, N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 512: industrial chemical technology

ICT Chemical Engineering Department

Experiment: 02

Distillation – Separation of a Mixture Date: 31/10/10

Purpose:

a) To purify a compound by separating it from a non-volatile or less-volatile material. b) To separate a mixture of two miscible liquids (liquids that mix in all proportions) with different boiling points. Equipment / Materials:

large test tubes(3) test tube rack (1) 10-mL graduated cylinder 50- mL round bottom flask

clamp (1 or 2) heating mantle condenser (1 or 2) thermometer

ringstand glass adaptor grease rubber tubing (2)

boiling chips thermometer adaptor 50- mL round bottom flask unknowns ( A and B) In this experiment you will perform several distillations. You will compare distillations of a mixture of Benzene and Toluene using the glassware set-up for a simple distillation and one for fractional distillation. You will also measure the boiling point-range for an unknown compound and use this information as an aid in its identification from Table 1 of possible substances. Pairs of students will perform this experiment. Each pair will conduct either the simple distillation procedure or the fractional distillation procedure. Results will be shared between two groups, so that everyone has data for both simple and fractional distillation. Also remember Benzene and Toluene are flammable. Never add boiling chips to hot liquid and never distill the flask to dryness. Some organic compounds form peroxide, which explode upon dryness and concentration. All glassware must be clamped in place. Experimental Procedures Place 30 ml of an unknown liquid mixture (15ml A + 15 ml B) that is to be purified by simple distillation and for which the boiling point range is to be determined. Assemble the assigned distillation apparatus (simple or fractional). Transfer the unknown liquid to a 50 mL round bottom flask (this will be the distilling pot). Add one boiling stone, and proceed to distill the liquid into a 10 mL graduated cylinder (this will be the receiver). Check the position of the thermometer (the bulb of the thermometer must be

Prepared By: Prof. J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer, N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 513: industrial chemical technology

ICT Chemical Engineering Department

below the arm of the distillation head) and make sure that the bottom of the distillating pot touching the heating surface of the heating mantel. Securely attach a piece of condenser tubing to each condenser outlets. Securely connect the other end of the “water in” tubing to the water jet in the sink (or hood). Place the other end of the “water out” tubing in the sink (or back of the hood). Plug in the heating mantle and before heating your distillation apparatus or turning on the water for cooling the condenser, have your laboratory instructor check your distillation apparatus. After your laboratory instructor has checked your apparatus, slowly turn on the water for condenser, and begin heating. Adjust the heating mantle to maintain a distillation rate of one drop per second. As the lower boiling component is distilled, the boiling point of the mixture in the distillation flask will increase. Record the temperature after the first drop is collected and again after every 2 ml of distillate is collected. After the 10 ml of distillate has been collected, you will have to empty the graduated cylinder into a test tube as it fills. Cover and label the test tube first fraction (component A). KEEP IT. Collect the next 10 ml of distillate, again recording the temperature after every 1 ml of distillate. After the second 10 ml of distillate has been collected, you will have to empty the graduated cylinder into a test tube as it fills and DISCARD IT in organic waste container. Collection of last portion of distillate should continue until the temperature remains constant. If the distillation flask is approaching dryness, remove the heat source immediately and after cooling, transfer the distillate and any remaining liquid from the flask to the third test tube (component B). KEEP IT. Determine the boiling point range of the first fraction of the collected liquid and the third portion of the collected liquid. Identify the unknowns by their boiling points using the possible boiling points of compounds. Construct a table like that given below, to record the temperature at the distillation "head" as a function of volume distilled. You will record your data in report form. Plot distillate temperature (oC) vs. volume of distillate (ml) collected for the mixture with and without the fractionating column and use the graph to determine the boiling points of the two compounds in the mixture and identify the compound in the mixture. Both sets of data will be plotted on the same graph, using different symbols (colors). Label the two curves.

Volume distilled (mL) 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14

Temperature without column (simple or fractional)

Volume distilled (mL) 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 Temperature without column (simple or fractional)

Prepared By: Prof. J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer, N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 514: industrial chemical technology

ICT Chemical Engineering Department

Volume distilled (mL) 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 Temperature without column (simple or fractional)

Volume distilled (mL) 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 Temperature without column (simple or fractional)

Observed boiling point of the first compound (A): ____________oC range Literature boiling point of the first compound (A): ____________oC range Observed boiling point of the second compound (B): ____________oC range Literature boiling point of the second compound (B): ____________oC range Identity of Mixture Compound A is _____________________ (name) Compound B is _____________________ (name) * Fractional Distillation experiments also done. From experiment, they were asked to write on Fractional distillation and were assessed.

Prepared By: Prof. J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer, N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 515: industrial chemical technology

ICT Chemical Engineering Department

EXPERIMENT‐3              Date:   

Mass Transfer Technology (Prepared By: Mr. J. M. Vasoya) 

LIQUID – LIQUID EXTRACTION  

Objective: ‐ To obtain stage efficiency for liquid – liquid extraction. 

Apparatus:‐Separating funnel, Burette, Pipette, Beaker, Measuring cylinder, 

Flask, Thermometer, etc. 

Chemicals:‐Benzene (20 ml), Acetic acid (20 ml), Water (40 ml), 0.1N NaOH 

Solution, Phenolphthalein as an indicator 

Theory:‐   

 Liquid extraction, sometimes called solvent extraction, is the separation of 

the constituents of liquid solution by contact with another insoluble liquid. 

If the substance constituting the originally between the two liquid phase, a 

certain degree of separation will result, and this can be enhanced by use of 

multiple contacts or their equivalent  in the manner of gas absorption and 

distillation. 

If a  solution of acetic acid  in water  is agitated with a  liquid  such as ethyl 

acetate,  some  of  the  acid  but  relatively  little water will  enter  the  ester 

phase. Since at equilibrium  the densities of  the aqueous and esters  layer 

are  different,  they will  settle when  agitation  stops  and  can  be  decanted 

from each other. Since now the ratio of acid to water  in the ester  layer  is 

different  from  that  in  the original solution and also different  from  that  in 

the  residual  water  solution  a  certain  degree  of  separation  will  have 

occurred. This  is an example of stage wise contact.  In all such operations, 

the solution which is to be extracted is called the Feed, and the liquid with 

Prepared By: Prof. J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer, N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 516: industrial chemical technology

ICT Chemical Engineering Department

which the feed  is contacted  is the Solvent. The solvent rich product of the 

operation is called the Extract and the residual liquid from which solute has 

been removed is the Raffinate stage. 

When  two  insoluble  phases  are  allowed  to  come  in  the  contact,  so  that 

various substances are distributed themselves into the phase and phase are 

mechanically  separated. The entire operation and equipment  required  to 

carry it out is called stage. 

 Stage  efficiency:  ‐The  approach  to  equilibrium  realize  in  any  Stage  is 

defining  stage efficiency. 

 Procedure:‐      

(1) Take 20 ml of acetic acid, 20 ml of Benzene in the flask with the help of 

measuring cylinder in the beaker. 

(2) Take 40 ml of water by measuring cylinder and add it mixture of acetic 

acid and benzene. 

(3) Now transfer this mixture  into separating funnel and Separate the two 

layers. 

(4)  Measure the volume of two layers. 

(5)  Collect  the  lower  layer  which  mainly  contains  acetic  acid 

which extracted by water.  

 (6)  Collect  10 ml  lower  layer  and  dilute  it  10  times.  From  100ml  total 

solutions collect 10 ml and titrate it against 0.1 N  NaOH solutions 

 

 

Prepared By: Prof. J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer, N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 517: industrial chemical technology

ICT Chemical Engineering Department

 

Observation:‐  

1. Room temperature                         : ______ oC 

2. Volume of water taken                   : ______  ml 

3. Volume of Benzene taken              : ______ ml 

4. Volume of acetic acid taken           : ______ ml 

5. Volume of  upper layer (Raffinate) : ______ ml 

6. Volume of bottom layer (Extract)    :______ ml 

7. Sp. Gravity of water                        :______  gm/cc 

8. Sp. Gravity of Benzene                   :______  gm/cc 

9. Sp. Gravity  of Acetic acid               :______  gm/cc 

Observation Table for First Stage:‐ 

           Burette   :‐  

           Flask      :‐ 

Indicator:-

Sr. 

No. 

Initial 

Burette 

Reading 

Final  Burette 

Reading 

Difference Mean 

Difference 

1.     

2.     

  

 

Prepared By: Prof. J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer, N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 518: industrial chemical technology

ICT Chemical Engineering Department

 

Calculation for single stage: 

(1) Normality of Acetic acid;      N1V1= N2V2 

                                                    N1= N2V2/V1 

                                                    N1 =  

 

N1 = Normality of Acetic acid     = ________ 

N2 = Normality of NaoH solution = ________ 

V1 = Volume of Acetic acid         = ________ 

V2 = Volume of NaoH solution    = _________                                                                                     

(2) Concentration of gm/lit = equivalent weight × normality 

                                            = 

                                            = 

 

(3) Mass of A.A extract = Normality × ml of A.A × Eq.Wt x Lower ext.                                     

                                                       1000 

                                       = 

        

                                       = 

 

(4) Density =   mass 

                      Volume     

                  = 

                   

(5) % efficiency:    = 

Prepared By: Prof. J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer, N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 519: industrial chemical technology

ICT Chemical Engineering Department

Result:‐ 

            Stage efficiency for single stage is: _____________  

 

 

Conclusion:‐ 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Prepared By: Prof. J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer, N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 520: industrial chemical technology

ICT Chemical Engineering Department

EXPERIMENT‐4              Date: Mass Transfer Technology (Prepared By: Mr. J. M. Vasoya) 

Cooling Tower Objective: ‐   To cool down hot stream by using air in cooling tower. Apparatus: ‐   Cooling tower, Digital hydrometer. Theory:‐     

In cooling tower a stream of hot water  is cooled by exchange of the sensible and  latent heat and water vapor with a stream of relatively cool dry air. The operation of  a  cooling  tower  is  shown  in  figure which  the hot water  at  T2  is  introduced    at  the  top  of  the  tower  and  leaves  the bottom  at  T1  while  the  air  flows  counter  current  to  the  water, entering the bottom at position, Cooling  tower  is  square  shape  250  ×  250 mm  sides with  800mm height. The packing used  for  the  cooling  tower  is  sieve plate  (total contact area 1500 cm2) Air is supplied form 90.5 hp centrifugal blower. The flow rate by which may be varied. Digital hydrometer is fitted at the inlet and outlet air to the towers. Air enters the tower through air distributors.  The  cooled  water  is  removed  from  the  tower.  The temperature of inlet and outlet water form the tower is taken via air distributor.  The  temperature  of  inlet  and  outlet  water  form  the tower is taken in closed proximity to the tower.  The  air  velocity  is  measured  by  means  of  manometer  tapping pressure taping are made  in the tower  immediately blow and above the packing to unable pressure drop reading to be taken. 

 Procedure:‐    

The heater to the water storage tank is set to the desired value with the  tank  filled with water  line. The water  is pumped  to  the  tower. 

Prepared By: Prof. J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer, N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 521: industrial chemical technology

ICT Chemical Engineering Department

The  air  blower  is  then  started  at  lower  air  velocity  and  system  is allowed to run in this way for l hour to attain steady condition  It  is  possible  to  note  visual  examination  if  the  water  flow  rate sufficient under this condition to completely wet. 

Observation:‐    Room temperature __________________ 

 Observation Table:‐  

Sr. No.  Flow rate of water 

 m3/sec 

Inlet temp.

of water 

Outlet temp. of water 

 

Humidity 

1.   

2.   

3.   

4.   

5.   

 Result:‐  Inlet water temperature __________ Outlet water temperature _________  Conclusion:‐  Quiz:‐ 1. Write Principle of Cooling Tower. 2. Write Types of Cooling Tower. 3. What do you mean by Humidity? 

Prepared By: Prof. J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer, N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 522: industrial chemical technology

ICT Chemical Engineering Department

EXPERIMENT‐5              Date:   

Mass Transfer Technology (Prepared By: Mr. J.M.Vasoya) 

Adsorption 

Objective: ‐ Adsorbing Acetic acid on Charcoal. 

Apparatus: ‐Titration set, Conical flask, Funnel, Filter paper. 

Chemicals: ‐Charcoal, Acetic Acid, NaOH solution, Phenolphthalein.                            

Theory: ‐   

Adsorption  is  the adhesion of molecules of gas,  liquid, or dissolved 

solids to a surface. This process creates a film of the adsorbate (the 

molecules  or  atoms  being  accumulated)  on  the  surface  of  the 

adsorbent. It differs from absorption, in which a fluid permeates or is 

dissolved by a  liquid or  solid. The  term  sorption encompasses both 

processes, while desorption is the reverse of adsorption. 

Characteristics and general requirements for adsorbent: Adsorbents  are  used  usually  in  the  form  of  spherical  pellets,  rods, 

molding with hydrodynamic diameters between 0.5 and 10 mm. They 

must have high abrasion resistance, high thermal stability and small 

pore  diameters, which  results  in  higher  exposed  surface  area  and 

hence high surface capacity for adsorption. The adsorbents must also 

have  a  distinct  pore  structure which  enables  fast  transport  of  the 

gaseous vapors. 

The freundlich’s adsorption isotherm 

    Y = m * Xn 

    Where,  

      Y = gm of solute per gm of solvent 

Prepared By: Prof. J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer, N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 523: industrial chemical technology

ICT Chemical Engineering Department

      X = gm of solute / gm of adsorbent 

      N = component in isotherm 

M = slope of equilibrium adsorption     

isotherm 

  Taking log both side, 

    log Y = log m + n log X 

Now, plot of log Y v/s log X straight – line slope is n & intercept 

is log m. 

Procedure:‐     

1.  Prepare Acetic acid solution (1 N, 0.5 N, 0.25 N, 0.125N, 0.625 N) 

                by dissolving required Acetic acid in 250 ml of distillate water. 

 2.  Then 2 gm of charcoal weighted five times separately & feed it to     

      5 different conical flasks.  

 3.  100 ml Acetic acid is then added to those five conical flasks. 

 4.  Keep for 15 min & then filter all the flasks. 

 5. After weighing the filtrate titrate  it against 0.1 N NaOH solutions 

after    adding phenolphthalein. 

6. The weight of acid adsorbed  is  calculated  from  the normality of      

filtrate & graph of log Y v/s log X. 

Prepared By: Prof. J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer, N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 524: industrial chemical technology

ICT Chemical Engineering Department

Observation Tables:‐ 

 Equivalent weight of Acetic acid = ________ 

Table 1: 

Sr. 

No. 

Normality 

of Acetic 

acid before 

Adsorption 

Initial 

conc. of 

Acetic 

acid, 

gm/lit 

Weight of 

Acetic acid 

in sample 

(A) 

Final conc. 

of Acetic 

acid,  gm/lit

Weight of 

Acetic acid 

in sample 

after 

adsorption 

(B) 

Weight 

Adsorbed, 

A‐B = X 

gm 

1.       

2.       

3.       

4.       

5.       

 

 

Prepared By: Prof. J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer, N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 525: industrial chemical technology

ICT Chemical Engineering Department

Table 2: 

Sr. 

No. 

Weight of 

Adsorbent, 

M gm X/M  ln X/M  ln Co 

1.   

2.   

3.   

4.   

5.   

Calculations:‐ 

Normality of filtrate: 

• N1 = Normality of acetic acid in filtrate 

• N2 = Normality of NaOH 

• V1 = Volume of filtrate 

• V2 = Volume of  NaOH  ( Burette Reading) 

 

 N1 = N2V2/V1 

 

       = ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐N 

Weight of filtrate:        

= Normality * Eq. weight 

 

= ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ gm/lit 

Prepared By: Prof. J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer, N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 526: industrial chemical technology

ICT Chemical Engineering Department

Weight of Acetic acid in filtrate: 

= (gm/lit) / Volume of sample for titration 

 

= ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ gm 

     

Result:‐ 

Conclusion:‐ 

 

 

 

 

Quiz:‐              

        

1. Define: Adsorption & Desorption. 

2. Give the classification of Adsorption. 

3. Why do you heat the silica gel sample initially? 

4. Give the name of industrial adsorbents with application. (Any Four) 

  

 

 

 

 

 

Prepared By: Prof. J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer, N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 527: industrial chemical technology

ICT Chemical Engineering Department

EXPERIMENT‐6          Date:   

 MASS TRANSFER CO-EFFICIENT

Prepared By: Mr.J.M.Vasoya 

MASS TRANSFER CO-EFFICIENT FOR GAS-LIQUID SYSTEM

Aim :- To determine mass transfer co-efficient of water.

Apparatus :- Thermometer,stopwatch,glass beaker, measuring, burner,etc.

Chemical : - water

Theory :- Mass transfer co-efficient is defined as the rate of mass transfer

per unit area per unit concentration. The mechanism of flow

process involving the movement of eddies in the turbulent region

is not theoretically understood. On the other hand mechanism of

mole diffusion a, characteristics of mole diffusion DAB.c/z is

replaced by F.

Mass transfer co-efficient for binary solution the equation is,

NA = NA / (NA + NB). F. ln NA / (NA + NB ) - CA2 / C

NA / (NA + NB ) – CA1/ C

Where CA/C = mole fraction, 

                                 Concentration XA for liquid and XB for gases. It is at above equation is

the local mass transfer co-efficient define for a particular location on

the phase boundary.

                                 The rate of mass transfer is always expressed in terms of molar flux.

Molar flux = rate of mass transfer/ unit area. Unit time

Prepared By: Prof. J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer, N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 528: industrial chemical technology

ICT Chemical Engineering Department

In practical situation it has become customary describe the

mass flux in terms of mass transfer co-efficient.

                                 Flux = co-efficient x Concentration difference

Here concentration will be define in the variety of phase like in molar ,

volume, pressure , temperature etc. variety of mass transfer co-

efficient for liquid are given below.

                                 Diffusion of A through non diffusion B,

                                 NA = Kx(XA1- XA2)

= Kl(CA1- CA2)

for the equimolar counter diffusion.

NA = Kx “(XA1- XA2)

= KL’ (CA1- CA2)

Absolute humidity is the ratio ‘mass of vapor’ to ‘mass of gas’

is called humidity.

                                Molar humidity Y = nA / nb = PA / PB

= PA-/ Pt - PA

Here PA & PB indicate partial pressure.

Relative humidity:

                               It is expressed as the % & is define as ,

Relative humidity = 100 Y / Ys

Procedure :- (1) Measure the diameter of beaker to find cross sectional

area of beaker.

(2) Take 150 ml water in beaker

Prepared By: Prof. J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer, N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 529: industrial chemical technology

ICT Chemical Engineering Department

(3) Heat this water to some constant temperature i.e. 500

C by using burner for 30 minutes.

(4) Measure the final volume of the water after 30 minutes

heating.

(5) Repeat the same procedure at 80 C.

(6) Find dry bulb and wet bulb temperature for absolute

humidity with the help of psychometric chart.

Observation:-

10. Diameter of Beaker : ______cm.

11. Room temperature : ______oC.

12. Dry bulb temperature : ______oC.

13. Wet bulb temperature : ______oC.

14. Volume of water evaporated : ______ml.

Observation table: -

           Sr. No. Temperature,o

C

Initial volume of water,

ml

Final volume of water,

ml

Difference

1. 80

2. 50

Calculation : -

(1) C/S Area of Beaker

A = π/4.D2.

=

Prepared By: Prof. J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer, N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 530: industrial chemical technology

ICT Chemical Engineering Department

=

(2) Mass of water evaporated = volume of water evaporated x density (H2O)

(3) Rate of Evaporation WA = mass of water evaporated / time

=

=

(4) Absolute humidity of Air From graph directly

(5) Mass Transfer Co-efficient Ky = WA / A( PAV - PA) =

Therefore K = Ky / 18

=

Result :- M.T. co-efficient of water at 50oC =

M.T. co-efficient of water at 80oC =

Conclusion :-

 

Prepared By: Prof. J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer, N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 531: industrial chemical technology

Heat EnginesHeat Engines

V K JoshiV K Joshi

Asst Prof

FETRFETR

Prepared By: Prof. J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer, N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 532: industrial chemical technology

Prepared By: Prof. J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer, N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 533: industrial chemical technology

Prepared By: Prof. J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer, N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 534: industrial chemical technology

ContentsContents

• Thermal prime movers• Definitions

– Heat reservoirs– Heat sources

k– Heat sink– Heat engines– Refrigerators

Heat pumps– Heat pumps• Carnot Cycle• Air standard cycles

Otto cycle– Otto cycle– Diesel cycle

• Rankine cycle

Prepared By: Prof. J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer, N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 535: industrial chemical technology

Thermal prime moverThermal prime mover

DefinitionDefinition

i–Device 

working over a cycle to convert

the heat energy (low grade)

into work energy(high grade)into work energy(high grade)

Prepared By: Prof. J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer, N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 536: industrial chemical technology

Thermal prime moverThermal prime mover

Prepared By: Prof. J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer, N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 537: industrial chemical technology

Thermal prime moverThermal prime mover

Prepared By: Prof. J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer, N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 538: industrial chemical technology

Thermal prime moverThermal prime mover

Ob d l f h d iObey second law of thermodynamics– Kelvin Plank statement

Prepared By: Prof. J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer, N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 539: industrial chemical technology

Thermal prime moverThermal prime mover

Classification

• Internal combustion engine (I.C.)

• External combustion engine (E.C.)External combustion engine (E.C.)

Prepared By: Prof. J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer, N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 540: industrial chemical technology

Thermal prime moverThermal prime moverClassification• Internal combustion engine (I C )• Internal combustion engine (I.C.)

– Reciprocating• Four stroke• Four stroke

– Petrol– DieselG– Gas

• Two stroke– Petrol– Diesel– Gas

– RotaryRotary– Space shuttle

Prepared By: Prof. J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer, N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 541: industrial chemical technology

Thermal prime moverThermal prime mover

Prepared By: Prof. J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer, N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 542: industrial chemical technology

Thermal prime moverThermal prime mover

ClassificationClassification

• External combustion engineR i ti– Reciprocating

• Steam engine

R t– Rotary• Steam turbine

• Gas turbine• Gas turbine

Prepared By: Prof. J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer, N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 543: industrial chemical technology

Thermal prime moverThermal prime mover

Prepared By: Prof. J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer, N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 544: industrial chemical technology

Thermal prime moverThermal prime mover

Prepared By: Prof. J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer, N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 545: industrial chemical technology

Thermal prime moverThermal prime mover

Prepared By: Prof. J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer, N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 546: industrial chemical technology

Thermal prime moverThermal prime mover

Prepared By: Prof. J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer, N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 547: industrial chemical technology

Thermal prime moverThermal prime mover

Prepared By: Prof. J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer, N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 548: industrial chemical technology

Thermal prime moverThermal prime mover

Prepared By: Prof. J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer, N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 549: industrial chemical technology

Thermal prime mover

• Internal combustion engine

Thermal prime mover

Internal combustion engine– The energy of fuel is released – by combustion of fuel with air y– in the engine  cylinder itself

• External combustion engineExternal combustion engine– The energy of combustion is not released – inside the cylinder y– it is transferred to a working medium like– steam or gasg

Prepared By: Prof. J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer, N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 550: industrial chemical technology

Thermal prime moverThermal prime mover

Sources of energySources of energy • Chemical energy

– Combustion of solid , liquid or gaseous fuels• Atomic energy

– Energy is released from h h i f i i l– the changes in structure of atomic material

– Fission or fusion• Heat energyHeat energy

– Obtained directly– Solar radiation– Geothermal energy

• gysers

Prepared By: Prof. J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer, N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 551: industrial chemical technology

DefinitionsDefinitions

ReservoirReservoir– Source of infinite heat energy 

Finite amount of heat absorbed or rejected– Finite amount of heat absorbed or rejected

– Will not affects its temperature

O At h– Ocean, Atmosphere

Prepared By: Prof. J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer, N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 552: industrial chemical technology

DefinitionsDefinitions

SinkSink‐ Absorbs heat from a system

Source‐ Supplies heat to a system

Prepared By: Prof. J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer, N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 553: industrial chemical technology

DefinitionsDefinitions

• Heat engineHeat engine– Produce work continuously

At the expenses of heat input– At the expenses of heat input

Prepared By: Prof. J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer, N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 554: industrial chemical technology

Heat engineHeat engineHeat Source η = Input

Output

T1Input

=

EWork

Heat Engine

W = Q1‐Q2

Energy

= W

Heat Sink

1Q

= 21 QQ −T2 1Q

Prepared By: Prof. J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer, N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 555: industrial chemical technology

QuizQuiz

A heat engine performs 200 J of work/cycle andA heat engine performs 200 J of work/cycle and is 30% efficient. How much energy is absorbed per cycle?per cycle?A. 200 J  B. 467 JC 667 J D 60 JC. 667 J  D. 60 J

Prepared By: Prof. J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer, N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 556: industrial chemical technology

QuizQuiz

A heat engine performs 200 J of work/cycle andA heat engine performs 200 J of work/cycle and is 30% efficient. How much energy is absorbed per cycle?per cycle?A. 200 J  B. 467 JC 667 J D 60 JC. 667 J  D. 60 J

Prepared By: Prof. J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer, N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 557: industrial chemical technology

QuizQuiz

A heat engine performs 200 J of work/cycle andA heat engine performs 200 J of work/cycle and is 30% efficient. How much energy is expelled per cycle?per cycle?A. 200 J  B. 467 JC 667 J D 60 JC. 667 J  D. 60 J

Prepared By: Prof. J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer, N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 558: industrial chemical technology

QuizQuiz

A heat engine performs 200 J of work/cycle andA heat engine performs 200 J of work/cycle and is 30% efficient. How much energy is expelled per cycle?per cycle?A. 200 J  B. 467 JC 667 J D 60 JC. 667 J  D. 60 J

Prepared By: Prof. J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer, N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 559: industrial chemical technology

QuizQuiz

A heat engine takes in 1000 J of energy at 1000A heat engine takes in 1000 J of energy at 1000 K and exhausts 700 J at 400 K. What is the actual efficiency of this heat engine?actual efficiency of this heat engine?A. 30 %  B. 40 %C 60 % D 70 %C. 60 %  D. 70 %

Prepared By: Prof. J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer, N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 560: industrial chemical technology

QuizQuiz

A heat engine takes in 1000 J of energy at 1000A heat engine takes in 1000 J of energy at 1000 K and exhausts 700 J at 400 K. What is the actual efficiency of this heat engine?actual efficiency of this heat engine?A. 30 %  B. 40 %C 60 % D 70 %C. 60 %  D. 70 %

Prepared By: Prof. J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer, N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 561: industrial chemical technology

QuizQuiz

What is the theoretical maximum efficiency ofWhat is the theoretical maximum efficiency of this heat engine?A 30 % B 40 %A. 30 %  B. 40 %C. 60 %  D. 70 %

Prepared By: Prof. J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer, N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 562: industrial chemical technology

QuizQuiz

What is the theoretical maximum efficiency ofWhat is the theoretical maximum efficiency of this heat engine?A 30 % B 40 %A. 30 %  B. 40 %C. 60 %  D. 70 %

C. 60 %C 60 %

Prepared By: Prof. J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer, N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 563: industrial chemical technology

QuizQuiz

How should you set the operating temperaturesHow should you set the operating temperatures in order to maximize the efficiency of a heat engine?engine?A. Make TL as warm as possible.B Make ΔT as large as possibleB. Make ΔT as large as possible.C. Make ΔT as small as possible.D Make TH as cool as possibleD. Make TH as cool as possible.

Prepared By: Prof. J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer, N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 564: industrial chemical technology

QuizQuiz

How should you set the operating temperaturesHow should you set the operating temperatures in order to maximize the efficiency of a heat engine?engine?A. Make TL as warm as possible.B Make ΔT as large as possibleB. Make ΔT as large as possible.C. Make ΔT as small as possible.D Make TH as cool as possibleD. Make TH as cool as possible.

Prepared By: Prof. J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer, N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 565: industrial chemical technology

DefinitionsDefinitions

• RefrigeratorRefrigerator– Operating in a cycle

Absorbs heat from a low temperature body– Absorbs heat from a low temperature body

– Rejects heat to high temperature body

At th f h t i t– At the expenses of heat input

Prepared By: Prof. J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer, N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 566: industrial chemical technology

RefrigeratorPrepared By: Prof. J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer, N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 567: industrial chemical technology

Refrigerator

COP= InputOutputInput

=

W kEnergyWork

= Q2

W= 1Q

21 QQ −

Prepared By: Prof. J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer, N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 568: industrial chemical technology

QuizQuiz

How should you set the operating temperaturesHow should you set the operating temperatures in order to maximize the performance of a refrigerator?refrigerator?

A. Make TL as warm as possible.B Make ΔT as large as possibleB. Make ΔT as large as possible.C. Make ΔT as small as possible.D Make T as cool as possibleD. Make TH as cool as possible.

Prepared By: Prof. J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer, N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 569: industrial chemical technology

QuizQuiz

How should you set the operating temperaturesHow should you set the operating temperatures in order to maximize the performance of a refrigerator?refrigerator?

A. Make TL as warm as possible.B Make ΔT as large as possibleB. Make ΔT as large as possible.C. Make ΔT as small as possible.D Make T as cool as possibleD. Make TH as cool as possible

Prepared By: Prof. J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer, N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 570: industrial chemical technology

QuizQuiz

Can the coefficient of performance of aCan the coefficient of performance of a refrigerator be greater than one?

A Yes B NoA. Yes  B. No

Prepared By: Prof. J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer, N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 571: industrial chemical technology

QuizQuiz

Can the coefficient of performance of aCan the coefficient of performance of a refrigerator be greater than one?

A Yes B NoA. Yes  B. No

Good COP values for actual refrigerators can be 33 or more.

Prepared By: Prof. J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer, N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 572: industrial chemical technology

QuizQuiz

An ideal refrigerator runs between 0°C and 25°CAn ideal refrigerator runs between 0 C and 25 C. It removes 8000 kJ/h from the cold region. What minimum power is required?What minimum power is required?A. 204 W  B. 320 WC 400 W D 733 WC. 400 W  D. 733 W

Prepared By: Prof. J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer, N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 573: industrial chemical technology

QuizQuizAn ideal refrigerator runs between 0°C and 25°C. It removes 8000 kJ/h from the cold region. What minimum power is required?A. 204 W  B. 320 WC. 400 W  D. 733 W

Prepared By: Prof. J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer, N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 574: industrial chemical technology

Thermal ProcessPrepared By: Prof. J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer, N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 575: industrial chemical technology

QuizPrepared By: Prof. J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer, N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"

Page 576: industrial chemical technology

QuizQuiz

Prepared By: Prof. J. M. Vasoya, Lecturer, N.G. Patel Polytechnic, Bardoli

Long Term Training Programme on "Industrial Chemical Technology"